*ARMY TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

AIR FORCE T.O. 14D1-2-468-2 

MARINE CORPS TM 09011A-23&P 

NAVY NAVAIR 13-1-38 

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 

*This manual supercedes TM 10-1670-287-23&P, dated 31 January 1992 

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 30 July 2003 

TECHNICAL MANUAL 

UNIT AND DIRECT SUPPORT 

MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

(INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST) 

FOR

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL 

PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

NSN 1670-01-306-2100 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P

 a Change 1 

WARNING SUMMARY 

This warning summary contains general safety warnings and hazardous material warnings 

that must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance of this equipment. 

Failure to observe these precautions could result in serious injury or death to personnel. 

WARNING

Exercise extreme care when using petroleum products to destroy 

equipment by fire, as these materials are highly flammable.

Improper handling may cause injury to personnel. 

WARNING

Do not allow the release assembly to become wet in cold weather. It 

may freeze, stiffen the webbing, and fail in use causing death or 

serious injury. 

WARNING

Any amount of extension past the index surface may mean the 

ripcord pins will not be pulled, which may result in death of 

parachutist.

WARNING

Failure to detect areas of damage during packing, or failure to 

comply with the following procedures, may result in a malfunction of 

the parachute and injury or loss of life to personnel. 

WARNING

The reserve parachute-closing loop will be replaced at each reserve 

parachute repack cycle (120-days). Failure to comply may result in 

a malfunction of the parachute and injury, or loss of life, to 

personnel.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P

Change 1 b 

WARNING

The Stroke Simulator must be able to pull both reserve ripcord pins 

positively and completely to ensure adequate travel of the AR2 

power cable. Inadequate travel of the AR2 power cable may cause 

the parachute to not deploy, resulting in serious injury or death of the 

parachutist.

WARNING

When attaching the power cable assembly to the AR2, always verify 

proper engagement of ball end of power cable with piston rod of 

AR2 by looking through transparent plastic cable seal retainer.

Cable seal retainer and power cable seal must be present to ensure 

correct seating of power cable ball. If ball is not engaged with piston 

rod or if cable seal retainer is missing, actuation of AR2 will fail to 

pull ripcord pins, which may result in death of parachutist. 

WARNING

The FF-2 must be able to pull the main ripcord pin positively and 

completely to ensure adequate travel of the FF-2 power cable.

Inadequate travel of the FF-2 power cable may cause the parachute 

to not deploy, resulting in serious injury or death of the parachutist. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

CHANGE HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

NO. 2 WASHINGTON, DC, 31 AUGUST 2005 

TECHNICAL MANUAL 

UNIT AND DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

(INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST) 

FOR 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

NSN: 1670-01-306-2100 

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: - Approved for public release; distribution is 

unlimited. 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P, 30 July 2003, is updated as follows: 

1. File this sheet in front of the manual for reference. 

2. This change implements Army Maintenance Transformation and changes the 

Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) to support Field and Sustainment 

Maintenance. 

3. New or updated change information is indicated by a vertical bar in the outer 

margin of the page. 

4. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below: 

Remove Pages Insert Pages

A/(B Blank) A/(B Blank) 

 

 

 

5. Replace the following work packages with their revised version: 

Work 

Package 

Number

Work 

Package 

Number

Work 

Package 

Number

Work 

Package 

Number

WP 0001 00 WP 0013 00 WP 0063 00 

WP 0004 00 WP 0014 00 

WP 0008 00 WP 0061 00 

WP 0011 00 WP 0062 00 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

C2 

By Order of the Secretaries of the Army, Air Force, and Navy (Including the Marine Corps): 

PETER J. SCHOOMAKER 

General, United States Army 

 Chief of Staff 

Official: 

 

 SANDRA R. RILEY 

 Administrative Assistant to the 

 Secretary of the Army 

 0521620

 

 

 MICHAEL E. RYAN 

 GENERAL, USAF 

 Chief of Staff 

Official: 

GEORGE T. BABBETT 

General, USAF 

Commander, Air Force Materiel Command 

 D.G. MORRAL 

 Rear Admiral, USN 

 Program Executive Officer 

 For Expeditionary Warfare 

 Naval Sea Systems Command

R.P. SHOCKEY 

Director, Program Support 

Marine Corps Systems Command 

DISTRIBUTION: 

To be distributed in accordance with initial distribution IDN 255304, requirements for 

TM10-1670-287-23&P. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

 WASHINGTON, D.C., 31 JANUARY 2005 

TECHNICAL MANUAL

UNIT AND DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

 INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST 

FOR

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL 

PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

NSN 1670-01-306-2100 

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P, 30 July 2003, is updated as follows: 

1. File this sheet in front of the manual for reference. 

2. This change is a result of corrected National Stock Numbers (NSN)s and/or CAGEC codes 

and part numbers. 

3. New or updated text is indicated by a vertical bar in the outer margin of the page. 

4. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below: 

Remove Pages Insert Pages Remove Pages Insert Pages

a/b a/b 2028 Sample 2028 Sample 

A/B A/B 2028 2028 

i-iv i-iv 2028 2028 

5. Replace the following work packages with their revised version: 

Work Package Number Work Package Number Work Package Number Work Package Number

0001 00 0008 00 0015 00 0048 00 

0002 00 0010 00 0030 00 0070 00 

0004 00 0011 00 0033 00 0071 00 

0005 00 0013 00 0037 00 0074 00 

0006 00 0014 00 0047 00 0076 00 

6. Add the following new pages: 

Insert Pages 

2028 Front/Back 

CHANGE

NO. 1
ARMY TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

AIR FORCE T.O. 14D1-2-468-2 

MARINE CORPS TM 09011A-23&P 

NAVY NAVAIR 13-1-38 

C-1

By Order of the Secretaries of the Army, Air Force, and Navy (to include Marine Corps): 

PETER J. SCHOOMAKER 

General, United States Army 

 Chief of Staff 

Official:

 

SANDRA R. RILEY 

 Administrative Assistant to the 

 Secretary of the Army 

 0436401 

MICHAEL E. RYAN 

GENERAL, USAF 

 Chief of Staff 

Official: 

GEORGE T. BABBETT 

General, USAF 

Commander, Air Force Materiel Command 

 D.G. MORRAL 

Rear Admiral, USN 

 Program Executive Officer 

 For Expeditionary Warfare 

 Naval Sea Systems Command 

R.P. SHOCKEY 

Director, Program Support 

Marine Corps System Command 

DISTRIBUTION: 

To be distributed in accordance with initial distribution number (IDN) 255304 requirements for TM 10-1670-287-

23&P.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

 A Change 2 

USA 

INSERT LATEST UPDATED PAGES / WORK PACKAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED DATA. 

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES 

NOTE: The portion of text affected by the update is indicated by a vertical line in the outer margins of the 

page. Updates to illustrations are indicated by miniature pointing hands or vertical lines in the 

outer margins of the page in the area of the illustration changed. Zero in the “Change No.” 

column indicates an original page or work package. 

Dates of issue for original and changed pages / work packages are: 

 

Original 30 July 2003 

Change 1 31 January 2005 

Change 2 31 August 2005 

TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 28. THE TOTAL NUMBER 

 OF WORK PACKAGES IS 77, CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING: 

Page/WP No. Change No. Page/WP No. Change No.

Front Cover 0 WP 0026 00 (4 pgs) 0 

a - b 1 WP 0027 00 (4 pgs) 0 

i-iv 1 WP 0028 00 (2 pgs) 0 

v/(vi blank) 0 WP 0029 00 (2 pgs) 0 

Chp 1 title page 0 WP 0030 00 (4 pgs) 1 

WP 0001 00 (6 pgs) 2 WP 0031 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0002 00 (16 pgs) 1 WP 0032 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0003 00 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0033 00 (8 pgs) 1 

Chp 2 title page 0 WP 0034 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0004 00 (8 pgs) 2 WP 0035 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0005 00 (20 pgs) 1 WP 0036 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0006 00 (26 pgs) 1 WP 0037 00 (12 pgs) 1 

WP 0007 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0038 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0008 00 (4 pgs) 2 WP 0039 00 (4 pgs) 0 

Chp 3 title page 0 WP 0040 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0009 00 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0041 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0010 00 (4 pgs) 1 WP 0042 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0011 00 (10 pgs) 2 WP 0043 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0012 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0044 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0013 00 (40 pgs) 2 WP 0045 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0014 00 (48 pgs) 2 WP 0046 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0015 00 (16 pgs) 1 WP 0047 00 (10 pgs) 1 

WP 0016 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0048 00 (6 pgs) 1 

WP 0017 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0049 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0018 00 (4 pgs) 0 Chp 4 title page 0 

WP 0019 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0050 00 (12 pgs) 0 

WP 0020 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0051 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0021 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0052 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0022 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0053 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0023 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0054 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0024 00 (2 pgs) 0 WP 0055 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0025 00 (4 pgs) 0 WP 0056 00 (2 pgs) 0 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Change 2 B 

USA 

INSERT LATEST UPDATED PAGES / WORK PACKAGES. DESTROY SUPERSEDED DATA. 

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES - continued 

Page/WP No. Change No. 

WP 0057 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0058 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0059 00 (4 pgs) 0 

Chp 5 title page 0 

WP 0060 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0061 00 (2 pgs) 2 

WP 0062 00 (4 pgs) 2 

WP 0063 00 (10 pgs) 2 

WP 0064 00 (8 pgs) 0 

WP 0065 00 (6 pgs) 0 

WP 0066 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0067 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0068 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0069 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0070 00 (4 pgs) 1 

WP 0071 00 (6 pgs) 1 

WP 0072 00 (4 pgs) 0 

WP 0073 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0074 00 (2 pgs) 1 

WP 0075 00 (2 pgs) 0 

WP 0076 00 (4 pgs) 1 

WP 0077 00 (2 pgs) 0 

Index-1 – Index –7/(8 Blank) 0 

Back Cover 0 
*TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

AIR FORCE T.O. 14D1-2-468-2 

MARINE CORPS TM 09011A-23&P 

NAVY NAVAIR 13-1-38 

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENTS OF 

THE ARMY, AIR FORCE, NAVY, AND 

HEADQUARTERS, U.S. MARINE CORPS 

WASHINGTON, D.C., 30 JULY 2003 

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A: Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited. 

*This manual supersedes TM 10-1670-287-23&P, dated 31 January 1992 

 i Change 1 

TECHNICAL MANUAL 

UNIT AND DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST) 

FOR

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL 

PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM

NSN 1670-01-306-2100

REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS 

You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to 

improve the procedures, please let us know. 

ARMY - Mail DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), or 

DA Form 2028-2, located in the back of this manual, direct to: Commander, U.S. Army Tankautomotive & Armament Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CECT, Kansas Street, Natick, MA 

01760. You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail directly to 

amssbriml@natick.army.mil. A reply will be furnished directly to you. Instructions for 

sending electronic 2028 may be found at the back of this manual immediately preceding the 

hard copy 2028. 

AIR FORCE – Reports by U.S. Air Force units should be submitted on AFTO Form 22, 

Technical Order Publication Improvement Report and Reply, and forwarded to the address 

prescribed above for the Army. An informational copy of the prepared AFTO Form 22 shall 

be furnished to WP-ALC/TILTA, 420 2nd Street, Suite 100, Robins AFB, GA 31098-1640. 

MARINE CORPS –Submit NAVMC Form 10772 to Commander, ATTN: (Code 850), Marine 

Corps Logistics Bases, 814 Radford Blvd., Albany, GA 31704-1128. A reply will be sent to 

you.

NAVY – Submit NAVSEA Form 4160/1 (REV 299) to Commander, NSDSA Code 5E30, 

NAVSURFSENDIV, 4363 Missile Way, Port Hueneme, CA 93043-4307. A reply will be sent to 

you.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Change 1 ii 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

WP Sequence No. 

WARNING SUMMARY a 

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL V 

CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION INFORMATION 

 General Information .....................................................................................................................0001 00 

 Equipment Description and Data ................................................................................................0002 00 

 Theory of Operation .....................................................................................................................0003 00 

CHAPTER 2 - OPERATOR MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

 Service Upon Receipt ..................................................................................................................0004 00 

 Assembly – Reserve Parachute...................................................................................................0005 00 

 Assembly – Main Parachute ........................................................................................................0006 00 

 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS), Introduction.........................................0007 00 

 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) .............................................................0008 00 

CHAPTER 3 - UNIT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

 Shakeout and Airing.....................................................................................................................0009 00 

 Cleaning and Drying ....................................................................................................................0010 00 

 Inspection.....................................................................................................................................0011 00 

 Salt/Fresh-Water Contamination Test .........................................................................................0012 00 

 Packing Procedures – Reserve Parachute..................................................................................0013 00

 Packing Procedures – Main Parachute .......................................................................................0014 00 

 General Repair Procedures .........................................................................................................0015 00 

 Searing and Waxing.....................................................................................................................0016 00 

 Marking and Restenciling.............................................................................................................0017 00 

 Main Pilot Chute Bridle Line or Deployment Bag.........................................................................0018 00

 Main Pilot Chute...........................................................................................................................0019 00 

 Main and Reserve Pilot Chute Attachment..................................................................................0020 00 

 Main Deployment Bag..................................................................................................................0021 00 

 Reserve Pilot Chute or Reserve Deployment Bag and Bridle Line .............................................0022 00 

 Safety Stow Loop.........................................................................................................................0023 00 

 General Canopy Repair (Main and Reserve) ..............................................................................0024 00 

 Main Canopy Replacement..........................................................................................................0025 00 

 Reserve Canopy Replacement....................................................................................................0026 00 

 Crossport Main or Reserve Canopy.............................................................................................0027 00 

 Stabilizer Left or Right, Main or Reserve Canopy........................................................................0028 00

 Tail Seam Main or Reserve Canopy............................................................................................0029 00 

 Slider Main and Reserve Canopy ................................................................................................0030 00 

 Slider Stop Main and Reserve Canopy........................................................................................0031 00 

 Connector Links Main and Reserve Canopy ...............................................................................0032 00 

 Main Risers ..................................................................................................................................0033 00 

 Main Canopy Release Cable Channel.........................................................................................0034 00 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

 iii Change 1 

TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

 WP Sequence No. 

CHAPTER 3 - UNIT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

Riser Hook and Pile Tapes ..........................................................................................................0035 00 

Suspension Line Attaching Loop .................................................................................................0036 00 

Harness/Container .......................................................................................................................0037 00 

Grommets ....................................................................................................................................0038 00 

Snap Fasteners............................................................................................................................0039 00 

Main Ripcord Pocket....................................................................................................................0040 00 

Reserve Ripcord Pocket ..............................................................................................................0041 00 

Main Canopy Release Ripcord and Housing...............................................................................0042 00 

Reserve Ripcord Housing............................................................................................................0043 00 

Main Ripcord Housing..................................................................................................................0044 00 

AAD Junction Plate ......................................................................................................................0045 00 

AR2 Ripcord Release Pocket (Padded) ......................................................................................0046 00

AR2 Power Cable Assembly Installation/Mounting......................................................................0047 00 

Porosity Procedures.....................................................................................................................0048 00 

Conversion (Reserve Canopy to a Main Canopy) .......................................................................0049 00 

CHAPTER 4 - DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

General Repair Procedures .........................................................................................................0050 00 

Searing and Waxing.....................................................................................................................0051 00 

Marking and Restenciling.............................................................................................................0052 00 

Suspension Lines (Lines 4 A/B and 5A/B Only) ..........................................................................0053 00 

Suspension Line Sets (Preferred Method)...................................................................................0054 00 

Suspension Lines/Cascade Lines (Alternate Method).................................................................0055 00 

Suspension Line Attaching Loop .................................................................................................0056 00 

Control Lines................................................................................................................................0057 00 

Canopy Rib ..................................................................................................................................0058 00 

Section Replacements .................................................................................................................0059 00 

CHAPTER 5 - SUPPORTING INFORMATION 

Preparation for Storage................................................................................................................0060 00 

Preparation for Shipment.............................................................................................................0061 00 

References...................................................................................................................................0062 00 

Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) ..........................................................................................0063 00 

Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL), Introduction.........................................................0064 00 

Group 00, MC-4 Ram Air Free Fall Personnel Parachute System..............................................0065 00 

Group 01, Main Deployment Bag.................................................................................................0066 00 

Group 02, Reserve Deployment System .....................................................................................0067 00

Group 03, Main Canopy...............................................................................................................0068 00 

Group 04, Reserve Canopy .........................................................................................................0069 00 

Group 05, Main Risers .................................................................................................................0070 00 

Group 06, Harness/Container......................................................................................................0071 00 

Group 99, Bulk Materials .............................................................................................................0072 00 

Special Tools List.........................................................................................................................0073 00 

National Stock Number (NSN) Index ...........................................................................................0074 00 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Change 1 iv 

 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

 WP Sequence No. 

CHAPTER 5 - SUPPORTING INFORMATION - continued 

 Part Number Index.......................................................................................................................0075 00 

 Expendable/Durable Supplies and Materials List ........................................................................0076 00 

 Illustrated List of Manufactured Items..........................................................................................0077 00 

 ALPHABETICAL INDEX............................................................................................................INDEX 1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P

v/(vi Blank)

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 

In this manual, primary chapters appear in upper case/capital letters; work packages are presented in 

numeric sequence, e.g., 0001 00; paragraphs within a work package are not numbered and are presented 

in a titles format. For a first level paragraph, title all upper case/capital letters, e.g., FRONT MATTER 

subordinate paragraph title will have the first letter of the first word of each principle word all upper 

case/capital letters, e.g., Manual Organization and Page Numbering System. The location of additional 

material that must be referenced is clearly marked. Illustrations supporting maintenance procedures/text 

are located underneath, or as close as possible to, their referenced paragraph. 

FRONT MATTER. Front matter consists of front cover, warning summary, title block, table of contents, 

and how to use this manual page. 

CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION. Chapter 1 contains general information and equipment. 

CHAPTER 2 - OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS. Chapter 2 contains service upon receipt, initial receipt, 

receipt of used parachute assembly, and preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS), 

lubrication instructions, and maintenance procedures authorized at operator level. 

CHAPTER 3 – UNIT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. Chapter 3 contains maintenance procedures 

authorized at the unit level. 

CHAPTER 4 – DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS. Chapter 4 provides maintenance 

procedures authorized at the direct support level.

CHAPTER 5 - SUPPORTING INFORMATION. Chapter 5 contains references, expendable and durable 

items list, maintenance allocation chart, repair parts and special tools list, national stock number index, 

part number index, and illustrated list of manufactured items. 

REAR MATTER. Rear matter consists of alphabetical index, DA Form 2028, authentication page, and 

back cover. 

Manual Organization and Page Numbering System. The manual is divided into five major chapters that 

detail the topics mentioned above. Within each chapter are work packages covering a wide range of 

topics. Each work package is numbered sequentially starting at page 1. The work package has its own 

page-numbering scheme and is independent of the page numbering used by other work packages. Each 

page of a work package has a page number of the for XXXX YY-ZZ where XXXX is the work package 

number (e.g. 0010 is work package 10), YY is the revision number for that work package, and ZZ 

represents the number of the page within that work package. A page number such as 0010 00-1/(2 blank) 

means that page 1 contains information but page 2 of that work package has been intentionally left blank. 

Finding Information. The table of contents permits the reader to find information in the manual quickly. 

The reader should start here first when looking for a specific topic. The table of contents lists the topics 

contained within each chapter and the work package sequence number where it can be found. 

Example: If the reader were looking for instructions on “Conversion (Reserve Canopy to a Main Canopy)”, 

which is a unit maintenance topic, the table of contents indicates that unit maintenance information can be 

found in chapter 3. Scanning down the listings for chapter 3, Conversion (Reserve Canopy to a Main 

Canopy) information can be found in WP 0049 00 (Work Package 49). 

An Alphabetical Index can be found at the back of the manual; specific topics are listed with the 

corresponding work package number. 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

CHAPTER 1 

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

FOR

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL 

PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0001 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

GENERAL INFORMATION 

0001 00-1 Change 2 

SCOPE 

This manual contains instructions for organizational and Direct Support (DS) maintenance on the MC-4 

Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System. Included are procedures for service upon receipt, 

packing procedures, maintenance procedures, and repair parts and special tool lists. 

MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS 

Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed 

by DA PAM 738-751, Functional Users Manual For The Army Maintenance Management System 

(TAMMS). Additional maintenance forms, records, and reports that are to be used by organizational and 

direct support maintenance personnel are listed in and prescribed by TM 10-1670-201-23 and TB 43-

0002-43. TM 4700-15/1 prescribes maintenance forms and records used by the Marine Corps. 

REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR) 

Army. If the MC-4 needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. You, the user, are the only one 

who can tell us what you don’t like about your equipment. Let us know why you don’t like the design. 

Tell us why a procedure is hard to perform. Put it on a SF 368 (Product Quality Deficiency Report). Mail 

it to us at Commander, U.S. Army Tank-automotive & Armament Command, 15 Kansas Street, Natick, 

MA 01760. A reply will be furnished directly to you. 

Air Force. Reports by U.S. Air Force units should be submitted on AFTO Form 22, Technical Order 

Publication Improvement Report, and forwarded to the address prescribed above for the Army. An 

information copy of the prepared AFTO Form 22 shall be furnished to ALC/LDEAM, Kelly AFB, TX 78241. 

Navy. Submit NAVSEA Form 4160/1 (REV 2-99) to Commander, NSDSA Code 5E30, 

NAVSURFCENDIV, 4363 Missile Way, Port Hueneme, CA 93043-4307. A reply will be sent to you. 

Marine Corps. Submit NAVMC Form 10772 to Life Cycle Management Center, ATTN: Product Support 

Section 822, 814 Radford Blvd., Albany GA 31704-0320. A reply will be sent to you. 

CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC) 

Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It is important that any 

corrosion problems with this item be reported so that the problem can be corrected and improvements 

can be made to prevent the problem in future items. 

While corrosion is typically associated with rusting of metals, it can also include deterioration of other 

materials, such as rubber and plastic. Unusual cracking, softening, swelling, or breaking of these 

materials may be a corrosion problem. 

If a corrosion problem is identified, it can be reported using Standard Form SF 368, Product Quality 

Deficiency Report. Use of keywords such as "corrosion,” "rust," "deterioration," or "cracking" will ensure 

that the information is identified as a CPC problem. 

The form should be submitted to the address specified in DA PAM 750-8, The Army Maintenance 

Management System, Users Manual (TAMMS).

OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES (ODS) 

Not applicable. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0001 00 

Change 2 0001 00-2 

DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIAL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE

GENERAL INFORMATION: 

Objective. Methods of destruction used to inflict damage on air delivery equipment should make it 

impossible to restore equipment to a usable condition in a combat zone by either repair or 

cannibalization. 

Authority. Destruction of air delivery equipment that is in imminent danger of capture by an enemy is a 

command decision that must be made by a battalion or higher commander or the equivalent. 

Implementation plan. All units that possess air delivery equipment should have a plan for the 

implementation of destruction procedures. 

Training. All personnel who use or perform such functions as rigging, packing, maintenance, or storage 

of air delivery equipment should receive thorough training on air delivery equipment destruction 

procedures and methods. The destruction methods demonstrated during training should be simulated. 

Upon completion of training, all applicable personnel should be thoroughly familiar with air delivery 

equipment destruction methods and be capable or performing destruction without immediate reference to 

any publication. 

SPECIFIC METHODS: 

Specific methods of destroying Army material to prevent enemy use shall be by mechanical means, fire, 

or by use of natural surroundings. 

Destruction by Mechanical Means. Air delivery equipment metal assemblies, parts, and packing aids 

shall be destroyed using hammers, bolt cutters, files, hacksaws, drills, screwdrivers, crowbars, or other 

similar devices to smash, break, bend, or cut. 

WARNING 

Exercise extreme care when using petroleum products to destroy 

equipment by fire, as these materials are highly flammable. 

Improper handling may cause injury to personnel. 

Destruction by Fire. Items that can be destroyed by fire shall be burned. The destruction of equipment 

by use of fire is an effective method of destroying low melting point metal items. However, mechanical 

destruction should be completed first, whenever possible, before initiating destruction by fire. When 

items to be destroyed are made of metal, textile materials (or some comparable low combustible material) 

they should be packed under and around the item, then soaked with a flammable petroleum product and 

ignited. Proper concentration of equipment that is suitable for burning will provide a hotter and more 

destructive fire. 

Destruction by Use of Natural Surroundings. Small vital parts of assemblies that are easily accessible 

may be disposed of as follows. Disposal or denial of equipment to an enemy may be accomplished 

through use of natural surroundings. Accessible vital parts of assemblies may be removed and scattered 

through dense foliage, buried in dirt or sand, or thrown into a lake, stream, or other body of water. Total 

submersion of equipment in a body of water will provide water damage as well as concealment. Salt 

water will inflict extensive damage to air delivery equipment. 

Other Methods of Destruction. Oxygen system equipment will be destroyed as prescribed in TM 750-

244-1-2. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0001 00 

0001 00-3 Change 2 

PREPARATION FOR STORAGE AND SHIPMENT

For storage, refer to TM 10-1670-201-23/T.O. 13C-1-41/NAVAIR 13-1-17, and WP 0060 00 of this 

manual; for shipment, refer to WP 0061 00 of this manual. 

WARRANTY INFORMATION 

The MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System does not contain warranty provisions. 

LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 

Common Name Official Nomenclature 

MC-4 MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System 

LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 

AAD Automatic Activation Device 

AGL Above Ground Level 

AR2 Automatic Ripcord Release 

BER Beyond Economical Repair 

BOI Basis of Issue 

CAGEC Commercial and Government Entity Code 

CFM Cubic Feet Per Minute 

Cm. Centimeter 

CPC Corrosion Prevention and Control 

DA Department of the Army 

DS Direct Support 

Dtd. Dated 

EA Each 

EIR Equipment Improvement Recommendation 

EDS Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive 

F Fahrenheit 

FF-2 Free Fall Secondary 

fps Feet Per Second 

FSC Federal Supply Classification 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0001 00 

Change 2 0001 00-4 

LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS – CONTINUED 

ft. Feet 

GPM Ground Precautionary Message 

in. Inches 

KIAS Knots Indicated Air Speed 

Ltrs Liters 

LG Long 

Lbs Pounds 

MAC Maintenance Allocation Chart 

MAM Maintenance Advisory Message 

MSL Mean Sea Level 

MTOE Modified Table of Organization and Equipment 

MTG Mounting 

MWO Modification Work Order 

NF National Fine (Thread) 

NIIN National Item Identification Number 

NLT No Later Than 

No. Number 

NSN National Stock Number 

OD Olive Drab 

oz. Ounces 

PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 

PQDR Product Quality Deficiency Report 

psi Pounds Per Square Inch 

RAPPS Ram Air Personnel Parachute System 

RFI Ready For Issue 

RPSTL Repair Parts and Special Tools List 

SDR Supply Discrepancy Report 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0001 00 

0001 00-5/(6 Blank) Change 2 

LIST OF ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS – CONTINUED

SMR Source, Maintenance and Recoverability 

TAMMS The Army Maintenance Management System 

TB Technical Bulletin 

TMDE Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment 

UOC Usable on Code 

WP Work Package 

SAFETY, CARE AND HANDLING 

The following subparagraphs summarize the safety, care and handling requirements for the MC-4 Ram 

Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System. 

Safety. Use care in handling packed parachutes as exposed metal parts could cause painful injuries. 

Care and Handling. Every effort shall be made to protect the parachute from weather elements, dust, 

dirt, oil, grease, and acid. An unpacked parachute shall be placed in an aviator kit bag. When available, 

an environmentally controlled building should be used to store parachutes. Parachutes shall be stored in 

a dry, well-ventilated location and protected from pilferage, dampness, fire, dirt, insects, rodents, and 

direct sunlight. 

COMMON TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT 

For authorized common tools and equipment, refer to the Modified Table of Organization and Equipment 

(MTOE) applicable to your unit. 

SPECIAL TOOLS, TEST MEASUREMENT AND DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT (TMDE), AND SUPPORT 

EQUIPMENT 

Special tools, TMDE and support equipment are not required. 

REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST (RPSTL) 

Repair parts are listed and illustrated in WP 0065 00 through WP 0072 00 of this manual. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA 

0002 00-1 Change 1 

EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, AND FEATURES 

A summary of the characteristics, capabilities and features of the equipment is contained in the following 

subparagraphs:

The MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System (front and back view) is designed to place 

Army personnel into areas of mission interest. An MC-4’s inherent gliding capability offers important 

potential for minimizing detection during entry or changing the landing area during descent in order to 

avoid capture. The high altitude standoff capability significantly reduces aircraft vulnerability and 

detection.

The various modes of the MC-4 parachute use, such as High Altitude High Opening (HAHO) and High 

Altitude Low Opening (HALO), provide versatility and opportunity for controlling descent which are not 

possible with standard (round) or less efficient gliding parachute designs.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

Change 1 0002 00-2 

FRONT VIEW

Carrying Handle 

Reserve Static Line 

Release Lanyard

Left Main Riser 

Automatic Ripcord Release 

Pocket, AR2 

Reserve Static Line 

With Metal Rings 

Right Main Riser 

Weapon 

Tie-downs

3-Ring Release 

Assembly

Main

Ripcord

Free Fall

Secondary

Pocket, FF-2

Reserve Ripcord 

Main Canopy Ripcord 

Release Assembly 

Oxygen Fitting 

Leg Strap 

Waist Band 

Reset

Indicator

Window

Equipment

D-Ring
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

0002 00-3 Change 1 

BACK VIEW 

COMPONENTS

The ram air parachute system consists of: 

1. A harness assembly compatible with a free fall secondary (FF-2) and an automatic ripcord release 

(AR2) automatic activation devices (AAD) and a single-point canopy release system. The harness 

also includes four equipment/lowering line attachment points. 

2. A back-mounted container assembly designed to accommodate a main and reserve canopy situated 

in tandem with the reserve canopy above the main canopy. The main and reserve canopies are 

identical in size and performance with provisions for turning and executing maneuvers prior to 

landing. Both canopies are capable of three-to-one glide ratios.

DEPLOYMENT CAPABILITY

The ram air parachute system has a deployment capability as follows: 

1. The deployment of the main canopy is by either the automatic ripcord release or the main ripcord. 

2. In the event the main canopy needs to be released during descent or landing, the main parachute 

system is equipped with a single-point canopy release system. This system releases both left and 

right risers from the same single point at the same instant. 

3. Deployment of the reserve canopy is by either a reserve static line connected to the main canopy 

risers which is initiated through the single-point canopy release system or by the reserve ripcord. 

Main Riser 

Compartment

Main Parachute 

Compartment

Free Fall

Secondary

Housing

Channel, FF-2

Reserve Parachute 

Compartment

Main Ripcord 

Housing

 Channel 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

Change 1 0002 00-4 

4. The reserve deployment system allows reserve canopy deployment even if the reserve pilot chute 

becomes entangled/snagged with the parachutist or equipment.

LOCATION AND DESCRIPTION OF MAJOR COMPONENTS 

1. Main Parachute Assembly. The main parachute assembly consists of a pilot chute connected by a 

bridle line to a seven-cell ram air canopy. A deployment bag is used to stow the canopy and 

suspension lines. The pilot chute, bridle line, and deployment bag comprise the main deployment 

system. The deployment bag is packed in the bottom compartment of the container assembly with 

risers attached to the main harness using a three-ring release system. A single-point release can be 

used to actuate the three-ring release system and to disengage the risers from the harness. 

Deployment 

Bag

Bridle Line 

Main Canopy 

Slider

Toggles

Riser

Reserve 

Ripcord

Harness

Main Ripcord

Main Canopy

Ripcord Release

Assembly

Pilot Chute 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

0002 00-5 Change 1 

2. Main Deployment System. The main deployment system consists of the items shown below. The 

pilot chute has a 7-inch diameter crown, a 32-inch spiral spring, and is covered with a combination of 

Type I nylon cloth (0 to 5 cfm) and nylon mesh fabric. A 1-inch loop at the bottom of the main pilot 

chute is used to connect a 62-inch main pilot chute bridle line into the main canopy. The deployment 

bag measures 17 by 10-inches and is constructed of nylon cloth. A grommet in the top of the bag 

allows the bridle line to pass through the bag and attach to the canopy. The bag has attachment 

points for type II heavy-duty retainer bands, which are used to lock the bag closed and stow the 

suspension lines. 

3. Main Canopy Assembly. The main canopy assembly consists of a rectangular canopy constructed of 

Type I nylon with heat set, stabilized, braided polyester suspension and control lines, a slider for 

reefing, and four barrel-nut style connector links for connection to the main risers. 

a. Canopy. The MC-4 canopy is a semi rigid wing when inflated. It has an upper and lower surface 

connected by a series of ribs. This construction forms a rectangular shaped canopy with seven 

dual openings at the leading edge known as cells. Each cell is identified numerically, 1 through 

7. The cells allow ram air pressure between upper and lower surfaces giving the canopy its 

shape and glide characteristics. 

MAIN PILOT CHUTE 

MAIN PILOT CHUTE BRIDLE AND DEPLOYMENT BAG 

Ring

NO. 5 

Grommet

Suspension

Line Attaching 

Points

Locking Stow 

Attaching Points Locking Flap 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

Change 1 0002 00-6 

(1) All ribs except the outer ribs have oval shaped crossports cut into them to allow span wise 

airflow. The outer ribs and alternating ribs through the canopy (eight) have load distributing 

tapes and attachment loops for suspension line attachment. 

(2) The suspension lines are connected to alternate ribs at four chordwise attachment points on 

each rib. The lines attached to the leading edge are identified as the A lines. The lines 

attached aft of the A lines are the B lines, and so on to the D lines. The lines attached to the 

trailing edge are the control lines. Each set of lines along each rib (A, B, C, D) are identified 

numerically, 1 through 8. 

(3) The center A and B lines are continuous (lines 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B). They run directly from 

the fourth A line attachment point down to and around the front left connector link, and up to 

the fourth B line attachment point. The fifth A and B lines run similarly from the fifth B line 

attachment point down to and around the front right connector link and up to the fifth B line 

attachment point. 

(4) Lines other than the forward center lines are cascaded to points beneath the canopy. The A 

lines are attached directly to one of the front two connector links. The B lines are connected 

to their associated A lines at a point below the canopy. The C lines run directly to one of the 

two rear connector links, and the D lines are attached to their associated C lines in the same 

way that the B lines are connected to the A lines. This cascaded method of construction 

reduces weight, volume, and aerodynamic drag and also contributes to structural integrity. 

(5) Two control lines controlled at the risers are used to maneuver the canopy. Each control line 

is formed by attaching five cascaded lines from the trailing edge of the canopy into one main 

control line. Each control line then runs directly to the back of the rear risers. 

(6) A stabilizer panel is attached to each outboard side of the canopy. 

b. Slider. The slider, used for reefing, is made of Type I nylon, is dome shaped, and measures 27 

by 28-inches. All sides are reinforced with Type XII webbing. No. 8 grommets are installed at 

each corner. 

c. Connector Links. Four barrel-nut style stainless steel connector links are used to connect the 

suspension lines to risers. 

NOTE

Only No. 6 Stainless Steel Connector Links Are Authorized. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

0002 00-7 Change 1 

Crossports

Rib Oval Shaped 

DETAIL A 

(TYP 13 PLACES) 

Control Line

Slider

Toggle

Connector Link

Line 8A

Line 8B 

Line 8C 

Line 8D 

Slider Stop 

Stabilizer Panel 

Main Pilot Chute Bridle 

Attaching Ring 

7

1

Control Line

DETAIL A 

Line 1A 

Line 1B 

Line 1C 

Line 1D 

NOTES: 

1. Only outboard lines are shown 

solid for clarity. 

2. Cells are identified 1 through 7. 

3. Suspension lines are identified 

1A, 1B, 1C, 1D through 8A, 8B, 

8C, AND 8D. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

Change 1 0002 00-8 

4. Container and Harness Assembly. The container and harness are an integral part of each other.

The container is divided into two compartments for the main and a reserve canopy while the harness 

provides attachment points for the main and reserve ripcords, main risers, main canopy, and 

accessory attachment rings. 

a. Container. The container, constructed of nylon duck cloth, provides an upper (reserve) and lower 

(main) compartment for stowage of the canopies. Protective covers are provided for the main 

risers and an automatic ripcord release pocket is located on the right side of the container for the 

FF-2, and the left side of the container for the AR2. 

Waistband 

Main Ripcord Housing 

Waistband 

Main Closing 

Loop

Main Parachute 

Compartment

Reserve 

Parachute

Compartment

Control Line Guide Ring 

Reserve 

Risers

AR2 Power 

Cable Housing

Continuous

Reserve 

Closing Loop Elastic

Locking Loop

Excess Control 

Line Keeper 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

0002 00-9 Change 1 

b. Harness. The harness is constructed of Type VII nylon webbing, and is an integral part of the 

container. The harness includes eight adjustment points: two (2) leg connector snaps and six (6) 

adjusting adapters. Four (4) accessory attachment rings, one (1) each on the upper and lower lift 

webs, are used to accommodate rucksacks, containers, and weapons. The reserve canopy 

attaches to the reserve risers. The risers feature control line guide rings and covers for the 

control lines. The right and left lift webs serve as attachment locations for the main and reserve 

ripcord pockets. Also located on the lift webs are the base rings of the three-ring release 

assembly. These rings are used for attachment/release of the main parachute. 

Chest Strap 

Leg Strap 

Equipment

D-Ring

Reserve Ripcord 

Cable Housing 

Waistband 

Reserve 

Ripcord Pocket

Base Ring of Three-Ring 

Release Assembly 

Static Line Guide Ring 

Reserve Risers

Main Canopy Release 

Ripcord Cable Housing 

Main Canopy Release 

Ripcord Pocket 

Main Ripcord 

Cable Housing

Main Ripcord 

Pocket

Waistband 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

Change 1 0002 00-10 

5. Main Ripcord Assembly. The main ripcord assembly consists of a stainless steel braided cable with 

a single locking pin. The cable is secured to a curved ripcord handle with two swaged balls. The 

terminal end of the cable also has a swaged ball. 

6. Reserve Ripcord Assembly. The reserve ripcord assembly consists of a stainless steel braided cable 

with two locking pins. The cable is secured to a curved ripcord handle with two swaged balls. 

7. Main Canopy Release Ripcord. The main canopy release ripcord consists of a red padded nylon 

cushion grip and lengths of plastic coated ripcord cable. A length of hook tape is sewn to the cushion 

grip to secure the grip to the stow pocket. 

Reserve Ripcord 

Main Ripcord 

Main Canopy Release Ripcord 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

0002 00-11 Change 1 

8. Main Riser Assembly. The main risers are constructed of Type VII nylon webbing. Each riser is 36- 

inches in length. The bottom end of the main risers incorporates two riser release rings, a grommet, 

and a main canopy release-locking loop. A channel is sewn to the back of the rear risers for stowage 

of the main canopy release cable. The back of the rear risers incorporates control line keepers used 

to stow excess control line, control line toggle keepers for stowage of control line toggles and control 

line guide rings. 

9. Free Fall Secondary FF-2. The automatic ripcord release is designed to open the main parachute 

compartment automatically. It consists of a release mechanism mounted in a metal case and is 

designed to work mechanically on barometric pressure. The arming cable, power cable, and the 

power cable housings are located on one side of the case. The 14-inch power cable is attached to 

the container base plate and the power cable is attached to the ripcord-locking pin. Refer to TM 10-

1670-300-20&P for operational limitations, maintenance, and repair. 

MRI RIV

ISSUE

TYPED/IMK

T MI E DELAY

SEC

SERIAL NO. REF NO.

MOD NO.

AUTOMATIC PARACH UTE RELEASE

MILL BI ARS

570

560

550

WITHDRAW KEY

T UR

HALF VE G I

N

D

DN

RT E I

N E P R E S S

A

S

RESET INDICATOR

Toggle Keepers 

Riser Release 

Rings

Trim Tabs 

Excess Control

Line Keepers Control Line Guide 

Rings

Reset Indicator 

Flangible Cap Barrel

Reset Key Access

Hole Plug Rectangular Key 

Knurled Locking Nut

Withdrawal Hook 

Rubber Bumper 

Power Cable 

14-IN. 

Arming Pin 

Assembly 

Millibar Dial 

Knob

Millibar Window 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

Change 1 0002 00-12 

10. Automatic Ripcord Release AR2. The AR2 is designed to open the main or reserve parachute 

compartment automatically. The AR2 consists of an aneroid with associated mechanism, rate-of-fall 

sensing chamber, and a spring-loaded power cable. All components except the power cable and its 

flexible conduit are contained in a housing. The housing provides all required chamber, passages 

and mounting pads for each component. An altitude setting dial and JUMP/OFF switch are mounted 

on the housing. There are two power cables assemblies, one for opening the main parachute and 

one for opening the reserve parachute. The power cable ends in a fixed eye that connects to the 

parachute ripcord pin. A lanyard assembly with cap is attached to the power cable to protect the 

open end of the power housing when detached from the AR2. Refer to TM 10-1670-305-23&P for 

operational limitations, maintenance, and repair. 

11. Reserve Parachute Assembly. The reserve parachute consists of a seven-cell ram air canopy and 

the reserve deployment system. The canopy is attached to the reserve risers and is packed in the 

upper compartment of the container. The reserve parachute can be deployed by three methods: 

manually by using the reserve ripcord, by the reserve static line upon release of the main parachute 

after pulling the main canopy release ripcord, or by actuation of the reserve mounted AAD. 

Retainer

Cable Seal

Power Cable Seal 

Retaining Ring 

Power Housing 

Main Power Cable Power Housing 

Retainer

Lanyard 

Assembly

With Cap

Decal JUMP/OFF 

JUMP/OFF Switch 

Assembly 

Storage Cable 

Piston Rod Cap 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

0002 00-13 Change 1 

12. Reserve Deployment System. The reserve deployment system consists of items shown below. The 

reserve pilot chute has a 7-inch diameter crown and a 19-inch spiral spring, and is covered with a 

combination of Type I nylon and large hole nylon mesh fabric. A 2-inch wide by 18-foot bridle line is 

attached to the reserve pilot chute and deployment bag. The deployment bag constructed of nylon 

cloth, measures 12 by 16-inches. The mouth of the bag has a channel for an elastic safety stow loop 

and grommets for locking the bag closed. The suspension lines are stowed in the suspension line 

retention pocket.

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MAIN AND RESERVE PARACHUTE ASSEMBLIES

The ram air parachute system consists of a main and reserve parachute mounted in tandem on the back 

of the parachutist. The differences between the main and reserve assemblies are as follows: 

1. The main and reserve deployment systems are different and are described in items 2. and 12., 

above.

2. The main parachute may be deployed by a ripcord or by an Automatic Ripcord Release (ARR). 

3. The reserve parachute may be deployed by ripcord, a left main riser actuated reserve static line, or 

by the ARR. 

4. The main risers have excess control line keepers, toggle keepers and control line guide rings; the 

reserve risers have excess control line keepers and the control line guide rings only. 

5. There is an 8-inch difference in control line length. The main canopy control lines are longer than the 

reserve canopy control lines. 

6. The main ripcord has a single locking pin the reserve ripcord has two locking pins. 

Reserve Pilot 

Chute

Reserve

Bridle Line

Deployment 

Assist Pocket 

Deployment Assist 

Pocket

Reserve Elastic Safety 

Stow Loops 

Reserve 

Deployment 

Bag
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

Change 1 0002 00-14 

EQUIPMENT DATA

Refer to Table 1 for performance data for the main and reserve parachute assemblies. 

Table 1. Main and Reserve Parachute Characteristics 

Performance/Description Characteristics 

Lift/Drag Ratio, L/D 3 to 1 

Span 28.5-ft 

Chord 13-ft 

Area 370 sq ft 

Maximum Suspended Weight 360-lbs 

Forward Speed Range 10 to 25 mph 

Rate of Descent Variable Full Flight to Fully Flared Landing 

Full Flight 14 to 16 fps 

50% Brakes 6 to 10 fps 

100% Brakes 2 to 6 fps 

Fully Flared Landing Touchdown 0 to 4 fps (if executed properly) 

Deployment Altitude Range 2000-ft AGL to 25,000-ft MSL 

Deployment Velocity Range 0 to 150 KIAS 

SAFETY, CARE, AND HANDLING 

The following subparagraphs summarize the safety, care, and handling requirements for the parachute 

assembly. 

Safety. It is imperative that you observe all safety precautions specified on the warning page in the front 

of this manual. You must also observe specific warnings and cautions specified throughout this manual.

The warnings are provided to tell you how to protect yourself from death or serious injury. 

Care and Handling. Observe the following precautions: 

1. Use care in handling packed parachutes as metal parts could cause personal injury. 

2. Remove all jewelry when packing or performing maintenance on the parachute. Damage to the 

canopy materials could result from watches, rings, bracelets etc. 

3. Avoid grabbing the ripcord grip or grip-retaining pocket when handling a parachute. 

4. Use every effort to protect the parachute from the weather elements, dust, dirt, oil, grease, and acids
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0002 00 

0002 00-15/(16 Blank) Change 1 

5. Place unpacked parachutes in aviator kit bags. 

6. Cover canopy during periods of inactivity. Avoid exposing canopy to sunlight, inspection lights, or 

fluorescent lights for prolonged periods. Nylon material is subject to deterioration under ultraviolet 

light.

7. Use a heated building to store parachutes when available. Store parachute in a dry, well-ventilated 

location protected from pilferage, dampness, fire, dirt, insects, rodents, and direct sunlight. 

8. Canopies should be slowly removed from water immersion by tail section first so water will drain from 

the open cells and not warp the construction.

END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0003 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

THEORY OF OPERATION 

0003 00-1 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM THEORY OF OPERATION

The MC-4 parachute system is a dual parachute system with similar main and reserve canopies. Both 

parachutes are located on the back of the parachutist leaving the front clear for mounting additional 

equipment or instrumentation. The principles used in its construction allow it to have high forward speed, 

a 3 to 1 glide ratio, and excellent maneuverability. In an emergency, the ram air system uses a single 

point canopy release to jettison the main canopy and deploy the reserve canopy. The reserve parachute 

uses a free bag deployment system, a high drag pilot chute, and an 18-foot bridle line with deployment 

assist pockets; each designed to increase the reliability of the reserve parachute in an emergency. 

1. Canopy. The ram air canopy incorporates spanwise construction. By running fabric from side-to-side 

instead of from front-to-rear, the size of each cell is not limited to the width of the cloth. This method 

of construction results in a decrease in weight and bulk and a higher level of safety. 13-airfoil section 

ribs dividing the canopy into 7 cells attach the upper and lower surfaces of the canopy. Each rib has 

three (3) elliptical crossports cut into it. These crossports allow air to flow spanwise through the 

canopy to equalize parachute pressurization. During descent, air enters the cell openings at the 

leading edge, pressurizing each cell and giving the canopy its shape and glide characteristics. A 

glide ratio of 3-feet of lateral movement to 1-foot of the descent is obtained. The rate of descent is 

determined by the suspended weight as well as the angle of the parachute with respect to the ground 

and distance that the trailing edge is pulled down. The parachute is controlled and maneuvered by 

using trim tabs and control lines. The canopy has two control lines that connect to five (5) cascaded 

lines attached to the trailing edge of the outer cells. By pulling on either the right or left control line, 

the canopy will turn in that direction. By pulling down on both control lines simultaneously, the rate of 

descent and the forward speed are decreased. Trim tabs are used to change the glide angle of the 

MC-4 canopy.

2. Slider. A slider is used with the ram air parachute system to reef the opening of the canopy and 

reduce opening loads. This allows for a more controlled opening of the canopy. During packing, the 

slider is placed at the lower surface of the canopy. During opening, the slider controls the drag area 

of the parachute as it slides down the suspension lines. 

3. Stabilizer Panels. During parachute descent, turbulent air can be produced at each side of the 

canopy, creating instability. The addition of stabilizer panels to each side helps reduce turbulent 

airflow, thus stabilizing the canopy. 

4. Deployment Brakes. Without deployment brakes, the parachute deployment becomes unreliable.

Deployment brakes lock down the trailing edge of the parachute using the control lines during 

deployment. They are set by pulling each control line down through the guide ring and locking each 

in place by using the appropriate toggle. The control line remains locked in place until manually 

released by the parachutist after deployment.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0003 00 

0003 00-2 

Crossports Oval Shaped 

Rib

DETAIL A 

(TYP 13 PLACES) Control

Line

Slider

Toggle

Connector Link

Stabilizer Panel 

7

1

Control Line 

Detail A 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0003 00 

0003 00-3 

5. Reserve Deployment System. The reserve deployment system consists of the items shown below.

The reserve pilot chute is constructed to provide a maximum amount of drag during a low speed 

canopy deployment. The reserve pilot chute is connected to an 18-foot bridle line with deployment 

assist pockets that, in case the pilot chute is unable to deploy due to entanglement, should alone 

create sufficient drag to deploy the reserve canopy successfully. The deployment bag is not attached 

to the canopy, allowing the parachute to deploy even in situations of pilot chute entanglement with the 

parachutist or a “horseshoe” malfunction. 

Reserve Pilot 

Chute

Reserve 

Bridle Line

Deployment Assist 

Pocket

Deployment Assist 

Pocket

Reserve Elastic Safety 

Stow Loops 

Reserve 

Deployment Bag 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0003 00 

0003 00-4 

6. Main Canopy Release Ripcord. The ram air parachute design features a single-point release that is 

capable of releasing the main canopy and deploying the reserve in one smooth function. In the event 

of a main parachute malfunction, the parachutist has only to withdraw the main canopy release 

ripcord (as shown on the following page). Once withdrawn, the two rings on each riser are released 

from the base ring, releasing the main canopy. If still attached to the main risers, the reserve static 

line will withdraw the reserve ripcord pins, deploying the reserve parachute.

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

DETAIL A 

(OPPOSITE SIDE) 

Main Canopy Release 

Locking Loop 

Main Canopy Release 

Ripcord Handle 

Base Ring 

Riser

Rings

Main Canopy 

Release

Locking Loop 

Detail A 

Main

Riser

Main Canopy 

Release Cable 

Main Canopy Release 

Ripcord Cable Housing 

Main Canopy

Release Cable
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

CHAPTER 2 

OPERATOR MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL 

PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0004 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SERVICE UPON RECEIPT 

0004 00-1 Change 2 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Overview 

• Initial Receipt 

• Receipt of Used Parachute 

• After-Use Receipt 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools 

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

All equipment shall be serviceable and 

ready for use. 

OVERVIEW 

This chapter contains information necessary to maintain the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel 

Parachute, on the Unit and Direct Support (DS) maintenance levels, in accordance with the Maintenance 

Allocation Chart (MAC) for the equipment. It includes the following: 

Common Tools and Equipment. For authorized common tools and equipment, refer to the Modified 

Table of Organization and Equipment or Table of Distribution and Allowances (MTOE/TDA) applicable to 

your unit. 

Special Tools, TMDE, and Support Equipment. A repair parts and special tools list (RPSTL) is 

included in WP 0064 00 of this manual. Tools or equipment that must be fabricated are listed in WP 0077 

00 of this manual. 

Repair Parts. Repair parts are listed and illustrated in WP 0065 00 through WP 0072 00 of this manual. 

INITIAL RECEIPT 

The following describes the procedures for processing parachutes upon initial receipt. 

General Procedures for Air Delivery Equipment. When air delivery equipment is initially procured from 

a supply source and issued to a using unit, the item(s) will be unpacked from the shipping container(s) 

and inspected by a qualified parachute rigger (MOS 92R, 921A, 92D). The inspection preformed will be a 

technical/ rigger-type inspection and will be conducted as outlined in the Preventive Maintenance Checks 

and Services (PMCS) procedures. Upon completion of the inspection, the item(s) will be tagged as 

prescribed in DA PAM 738-751. Serviceable equipment may then be entered either into storage or into 

use in airdrop operations, as applicable. An unserviceable item will be held and reported, in accordance 

with DA PAM 750-8/ MCO 4855.10B. 

Inspection Personnel. Personnel other than parachute rigger personnel may assist in the unpacking 

process of initially received parachutes as directed by the local air delivery equipment maintenance 

officer. However, the parachute maintenance officer ensures that the entire unpacking effort is conducted 

under the direct supervision of a qualified rigger (92R, 921A, 92D) in accordance with AR 750-32.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0004 00 

Change 2 0004 00-2 

Configuration Condition. Acceptance of new equipment from the manufacturer is based upon 

inspections made of sample lots that have been randomly selected in accordance with military standards. 

It is incumbent upon the using activity personnel to bear this in mind whenever equipment is first placed in 

service. Changes will sometimes evolve from the original equipment design and sometimes contractors 

are authorized deviations in material and construction techniques. Air delivery equipment that has been 

in the field cannot be expected to meet exacting manufacturing specifications; however, the equipment 

should closely reflect desired design characteristics. Since repairs, modifications, and/or changes can 

alter or detract from the configuration originally desired, such equipment shall be airworthy, safe, of the 

desired configuration, and adequate for intended use.

Marking Parachutes. Prior to being placed into service, personnel parachutes that have had no 

previous use will be marked to reflect the date of entry into service. The marking will be made on the 

canopy information data block by stenciling the lettering in 1⁄2-inch characters, using the marking and 

restencilling repair procedures detailed in WP 0017 00. Other applicable parachute components will be 

marked adjacent to existing data. The stenciled data will appear on IN-SVC followed by the date, which 

will indicate the month and calendar year, such as "Jan. 99". Ensure the added marking does not infringe 

upon, or obliterate, any original data on the information data block. 

Parachute Log Record. The Army Parachute Log Record, DA Form 3912, AFTO 391, and 

NAVWPNCEN or NAWCWPNS CL 13512/11 (Premeditated Parachute Record) are history-type 

maintenance documents that accompany the parachute canopy and pack tray assemblies through the 

period of service of the individual assembly. The log record provides a means of recording maintenance 

actions performed on a parachute canopy assembly. Normally, a log record is initiated and attached to a 

pack tray upon receipt by a using unit. However, if the item is subjected to alteration or modification by a 

maintenance activity during the interim period from date of manufacture to receipt by a using unit, the log 

record will be prepared by the activity performing the maintenance function. Once initiated, a log record 

will be attached to, and contained in, an affixed parachute log record/ inspection data pocket, until such 

time as the parachute canopy assembly is destroyed or rendered unfit for further use or repair. 

Additionally, should an item that requires a log record, be transferred from one unit to another, the log 

record for the parachute assembly will accompany the item in the transfer action. A prepared log record 

will not be removed or separated from a parachute, and especially a packed parachute, except as 

directed by the local air delivery equipment maintenance officer. 

A log record that is illegible, lost, damaged, soiled, or precludes further entries due to lack of space, will 

be replaced upon the next repack or inspection, as applicable, with a serviceable item from stock. 

Installing Attaching Tie. Install attaching tie as follows: 

1. Cut a 30-inch length of tape, lacing and tying (super tack), and double the lacing length. 

2. Pass the looped end, of the doubled lacing length, around the centerfold of the log record and form a 

slip loop on the outside, at the log record top. 

ARMY

PARACHUTE

LOG

RECORD

DA FORM 3912,1 JUN 79

W

RE

H

P

I

L

C

A

H 

C

W

ES DA FORM 3912, 1 AUG 72

ILL BE USED UNTIL EXHAUSTED

Slip Loop 

Forming Slip Loop on Log Record Outside
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0004 00 

0004 00-3 Change 2 

3. Pass the lacing length running ends through the corner-attaching hole, from the front cover of the log 

record. 

PARACHUTE

WHICH WILL BE USED UNTIL EXHAUSTED

DA FORM 3912,1 JUN 79

REPLACES DA FORM 3912, 1 AUG 72

ARMY

LOG

RECORD

4. Ensure the running ends are routed over that part of the lacing length located inside the log record 

book along the log record centerfold. 

JUMP, INSPECTION

DATE

DAY MO. YR.

BAG NUMBER

INSPECTION

ROUTINE

AND REPACK DATA

NAME

PACKER'S INSPECTOR'S NAME UNIT

REPACK

5. Complete the attachment tie by making a half hitch on top of the slip loop made in step 2., above. 

WHICH WILL BE USED UNTIL EXHAUSTED

REPLACES DA FORM 3912, 1 AUG 72

RECORD

DA FORM 3912,1 JUN 79

LOG

ARMY

PARACHUTE

Corner Attaching Hole 

Passing Lacing Loose Ends Through Corner Attaching Hole 

Routing Lacing Loose End Through Log Record Centerfold 

Log Record Attachment Tie Completed 

Half Hitch 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0004 00 

Change 2 0004 00-4 

6. Thread one running end of the log record attachment tie in a tacking needle and pass the tacking 

needle, with attached end, through the edge binding of the applicable parachute log record/ 

inspection data pocket. 

7. Remove the lacing end from the tacking needle; make a finished 10-inch-long log record attaching 

loop by securing the two lacing ends together with an overhand knot. 

8. Insert the log record into the pocket and secure the record within the pocket using the pocket flap and 

applicable type flap fastener. 

NOTE 

Log record book entries will be made with a suitable type blue or 

black marking device that cannot be erased (no felt tip markers). 

Accomplishing a Log Record. Upon completion of the first technical/ rigger-type inspection, the 

individual performing the inspection will initially prepare a log record for an individual parachute and 

accomplish subsequent record entries using the following procedures: 

1. Inside front cover. Using the information provided on the parachute canopy data block, make the 

following entries on the inside front cover of the log record. Entries may be continued on the inside of 

the back cover, if necessary. 

SERIAL NO.

TYPE

PART NO.

DATE OF MFG. (Month & Year)

MANUFACTURER

MO/YR CANOPY PLACED IN SERVICE

CANOPY CONTRACT NO.

STATION & UNIT

(Continued on inside back cover)
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0004 00 

0004 00-5 Change 2 

a. Serial number. Enter the parachute canopy assembly serial number. 

NOTE 

A parachute canopy serial number is recorded in a log record as a 

method of establishing control for maintenance, Equipment 

Improvement Report (EIR) and Product Quality Deficiency Report 

(PQDR) documentation, and to ensure the correct original record is 

reattached should the record become detached. A canopy serial 

number will not be used for property accountability, except in test 

projects or other special instances. 

b. Type. Enter the parachute type. 

c. Part number. Enter the part number of the parachute canopy. 

d. Date of manufacture. Enter the month and year the parachute canopy was manufactured. 

e. Manufacturer. Enter the name of the parachute canopy manufacturer. 

f. Canopy contract number. Enter the entire contract number specified for the parachute canopy. 

2. Station and unit. Enter the name of the station and unit to which the parachute canopy is currently 

assigned. When a parachute is transferred permanently to another station and/or unit, line out the 

original entry and enter the name of the receiving station and/or unit. 

3. Inside back cover. Entries may be continued on the inside back cover, if necessary. 

STATION & UNIT (Continued)
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0004 00 

Change 2 0004 00-6 

4. Modification Work Order (MWO) Compliance Record Page. When a modification is performed on a 

parachute canopy, make the following entries on the Modification Work Order Compliance Record 

pages of the Log Record. 

a. MWO number. Enter the publication number and date of the MWO that describes the MWO (1 

above). 

b. MWO title. Enter a short, abbreviated title extracted from the MWO prescribing the work. 

c. Modified by. Enter the last name of the individual who has performed the modification. If the 

original log record for the parachute has been lost, and it has been ascertained through 

inspection that a particular modification has been accomplished, the entry for this column will be 

Complied With (CW), (2 above), which signifies the applicable MWO has been complied with. 

d. Inspected by. The individual who accomplished the inspection required after modification will 

sign this entry with his last name only. 

e. Unit. Enter the unit designation responsible for performing the MWO or in the event of a lost Log 

Record, the unit to which the inspector is assigned. 

f. Date. Enter the day, month, and year the modification was completed. 

UNIT & INTERMEDIATE

TYPE OF REPAIR UNIT

DATE

DAY MONTH YEAR

REPAIR & INSPECTION DATA

INSP BY

MWO 10-1670-287-20-1

AR2 CABLE MOD 

AR2 CABLE MOD 

02 

02 

1. Completion of Initial Inspection 

2. Repair Accomplishment 

3. MWO Inspection Compliance 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0004 00 

0004 00-7 Change 2 

5. Unit and Direct Support Repair and Inspection Data. When a parachute assembly is initially received 

from a supply source and a technical/rigger type inspection is performed, document the inspection 

accomplishment on the Unit and Intermediate Repair and Inspection Data page of the individual 

Parachute Log Record. Additional entries will also be made on this page each time the canopy 

assembly is repaired or is administered an inspection in compliance with a Maintenance Advisory 

Message (MAM) or Ground Precautionary Message (GPM) as follows: 

a. Type of repair. Enter the type of repair, completion of initial inspection, repair accomplishment, 

Maintenance Advisory Message (MAM) or Ground Precautionary Message (GPM) compliance. 

b. Inspection by. The individual who accomplished the inspection required will sign this entry with 

last name only. 

c. Unit. Enter the unit designation responsible for performing the type of repair. 

d. Date. Enter the day, month, and year the repair was performed. 

e. Note page. A page is provided at the back of a parachute log record to accommodate recording 

of additional data pertinent to the serviceability of a parachute canopy assembly. This shall also 

include the month and year the item was placed in service. 

NOTE 

A parachute log record that is completely filled out, lost, illegible, or 

in an otherwise unserviceable condition, will be replaced with a 

serviceable log record. 

6. Replacing a filled out or unserviceable log record. 

a. Using a suitable blue or black marking device, enter NEW BOOK on the outside front cover of the 

replacement log record. 

b. Transcribe the information from the inside front cover of the original log record to the inside front 

cover of the replacement log record. If the original data is illegible or missing, use the canopy 

information data block to collect the required data. 

NOTES 

RISER MFG DATE: 7 JAN 2000 

PLACED IN SERVICE: 7 JAN 2001 

IMMERSED IN SALT WATER: 26 JULY 2001 

RINSED: 27 JULY 2001 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0004 00 

Change 2 0004 00-8 

c. In the replacement log record; transcribe the initial and last entry made on the Jump, Inspection, 

and Repack Data page of the original log record. 

d. Transcribe all data from the remaining pages of the original log record; to the appropriate pages 

of the replacement log record. 

e. After all original data has been transcribed destroy the original log record. 

7. Replacing a lost log record. 

NOTE 

Any time a log record is discovered missing from a parachute, a 

replacement log record will be initiated during repack or inspection, 

as applicable. 

a. Using a suitable blue or black marking device, enter NEW BOOK on the front cover of the 

replacement log record. 

b. Accomplish the log record inside front cover as prescribed above. 

c. The age life of the canopy will be obtained from the date placed in service (initial) and other 

applicable data on the Jump, Inspection, and Repack Data page of the log record, as detailed 

above. Enter IN, if the date placed in service is known. If not known, enter UNK. 

d. If it can be ascertained by inspection that a previous MWO has been complied with, applicable 

entries will be made on the appropriate page of the replacement log record. 

e. Attach the replacement log record to the log record/inspection data pocket using the procedures 

above. 

RECEIPT OF USED PARACHUTE. Upon initial receipt of used parachute, proceed as follows: 

1. Follow “GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR AERIAL DELIVERY EQUIPMENT” found in WP 0002 00, 

and check each component for excessive wear and tear. 

 

2. If defects or damages are discovered, process the parachute for maintenance at the maintenance 

level assigned by the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) WP 0063 00. 

After-Use Receipt. When the parachutist receives a parachute at the maintenance activity following its 

use during air delivery, it must be given a shakeout and aired (WP 0009 00), and if necessary, cleaned 

(WP 0010 00) before it can be returned to service. If a parachute is issued but is not used, it does not 

need to be given a shakeout; however, it must be given a routine inspection by a qualified parachute 

rigger before it is placed in a Ready for Issue (RFI) status. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

ASSEMBLY – RESERVE PARACHUTE

0005 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Ripcord Test 

• Layout

• Attachment of Canopy to Risers 

• Application of Markings 

• Installation of Safety Stow; Elastic Loop in 

Deployment Bag 

• Attachment of Control Lines to Control 

Toggles 

• Canopy Trim Check 

• Spanwise Line Check

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Brush, Stenciling (Item 5, WP 0063 00) 

Inspection Kit, Ripcord Grip (Item 21, WP 0063 00) 

Machine, Stencil Cutting (Item 26, WP 0063 00) 

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, 7

/16-IN., Open-End (Item 45, WP 0063 00) 

Equipment Condition

Stretch canopy and suspension lines full length in 

packing area. 

Personnel Required 

92R(10) Parachute Rigger 

92R(20) Parachute Rigger 

Materials/Parts

Ink, Marking, Parachute (Item 25/26, WP 0076 00) 

Stencil Board, Oiled (Item 31, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Pressure-Sensitive, Yellow, 1⁄2-IN. 

Wide (Item 38, WP 0076 00)

RIPCORD TEST 

1. Perform a ripcord test as follows: 

a. Insert 1⁄2-inch of a locking pin end into the hole of a fixed ripcord locking pin test block (as shown 

in A below). Ensure the test block is firmly secured in the fixed position. 

90°

(REF)

1/2 IN

1/16 IN

Ripcord Cable 

Ripcord Grip 

7-Pound 

Weight 

Locking Pin

Fixed Wooden

Blocks

A. TESTING LOCKING PIN 

WITH TEST BLOCK. 

B. TESTING LOCKING PIN 

WITH GAUGE BLOCK. 

A B

Test Gauge

Pin Hole Test Gauge Hole

Locking Pin 

Fixed Test Block
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-2 

b. Attach a 7-pound weight to ripcord grip and suspend weight from handle, exercising care to apply 

the load gradually without impact. The hands or lifting device, as applicable, must be fully 

removed from the weight. 

NOTE

A ripcord-locking pin will withstand a 7-pound load without assuming 

a permanent set. 

c. Remove weight, rotate locking pin one-quarter turn, and test pin again by reapplying the load as 

prescribed in step b. 

d. Repeat the procedure in step c. until locking pin has been tested in four positions and rotated 

one-quarter turn prior to each test. 

NOTE

Each locking pin on a ripcord length will be tested under load in four 

positions. 

e. Remove weight from ripcord grip and remove locking pin from test block. 

f. Visually examine the tested locking pin to ascertain if it was marred, cracked, or distorted during 

the test under load. If any defects are noted, remove ripcord from service. 

g. Repeat procedure in steps b. through f. for the remaining locking pins on the ripcord length. After 

testing all locking pins, if there are no visual defects apparent, test each of the locking pins for 

bends. 

h. Place locking pins in vertical position with pin end facing up and either clamp the pin between two 

wooden blocks at a point below the shoulder (as shown in B of the illustration on the previous 

page) or hold between the thumb and index finger of one hand. 

i. Using test gage, manually locate the hole in the block over the end of the secured pin, allowing 

for a 1

/16-inch maximum insertion. 

j. With axis of the gage block hole aligned with axis of the locking pin, release gage block and allow 

block to fall freely. 

k. When the weight of the gage block fails to cause full penetration of the pin into gage block hole, 

the pin is excessively bent. Remove ripcord from service. 

l. Repeat the procedures in steps h. through k. for each of the remaining locking pins on the ripcord 

length.

m. Position ripcord grip on a fixed hook from a corner nearest weld. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-3 Change 1 

n. Attach and suspend a 40-pound weight from the opposite corner of grip nearest to the weld. 

Ensure that total weight is suspended without impact. Hands or lifting device, as applicable, must 

be fully removed from weight. 

o. Using suitable illumination, visually inspect welded joint for cracks or breaks. If any cracks or 

breaks are detected in welding area, remove ripcord from service. 

p. Remove weight from ripcord grip and remove grip from hook. 

q. A ripcord that has been tested according to above and is considered serviceable shall be marked 

to indicate test accomplishment. Wrap two turns of 1⁄2 inch-wide yellow pressure-sensitive tape 

around the center of the grip tubing at a point near the weld. However, ensure tape wrapping 

does not cover the welding joint. 

LAYOUT 

1. Perform layout as follows: 

a. Lay out parachute on a clean dry surface with canopy positioned on its left side. Leading edge 

(nose) will be to the right when viewed from riser end. 

b. Stretch lines full length with a helper positioned at riser end to check continuity and to hold lines 

taut.

Fixed Hook 

40-LB Weight 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-4 

c. Grasp high points of each cell and flip canopy toward trailing edge. Canopy shall lie flat with 

trailing edge lines on left side when viewed from riser end. 

LEFT RIGHT

FRONT

REAR

PLEASE READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY

LEFT STEERING LINE RIGHT STEERING LINE

LINE ORGANIZING

CARD

d. Remove any twists, turns, and tangles between suspension line groups. 

e. Starting with lines 8A and 8B, raise to a sufficient height to see if line 8A runs free from canopy 

through right front slider grommet to outside of right front riser connector link. Line 1A should run 

free through left front slider grommet to outside of left front riser connector link. 

Leading 

Edge Lines

Line 8B 

Line 8A 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-5 Change 1 

f. Grasp lines 8C and 8D and raise to a sufficient height to see if line 8C runs free from canopy 

through right rear slider grommet to outside of right rear riser connector link. Line 1C should run 

free through left rear slider grommet to outside of left rear riser connector link. 

g. Grasp control lines and raise to a sufficient height to ensure they run free and clear from the tail 

through the proper slider grommets to the line-organizing card. 

SLIDER

DETAIL

Line 8D Line 8C 

Control Lines 

D Lines 

C Lines 

A and B Lines 

Control Lines 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-6 

ATTACHMENT OF CANOPY TO RISERS 

Attach canopy to risers as follows: 

1. Lay out container at connector links with risers facing canopy and parachute compartment facing up. 

2. Prior to attaching connector links to the risers, if applicable, re-position suspension lines on the short 

portion of the connector link. 

NOTE

Connector link barrel nuts must face inboard and tighten upward. 

3. Remove connector links and control lines from line organizing card and loosely connect connector 

links and control lines to proper riser. 

4. Perform a suspension line continuity check by tracing each line from canopy through proper slider 

grommet to proper riser connector link as follows: 

a. Hang the parachute at every loaded rib, with clamps, by its tail, using a suitable (locally 

manufactured) suspension device (approximately 16-feet in length). 

b. Elongate the suspension lines and obtain suspension line group separation. 

c. Suspend the slider by the two rear grommets. 

Longer Portion Of

Connector Link

(Riser End)

Short Portion 

of Connector 

Link

Connector 

Link Barrel Nut 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-7 Change 1 

d. Secure the risers to a suitable anchor point. 

e. Trace each riser up to the connector link and ensure each barrel nut faces inboard and closes 

upward toward the canopy. 

f. Check the slider to ensure the reinforcement webbing is facing the canopy and the arrow is facing 

down.

NOTE

During the process of tracing each control line/cascade line, half 

twists are acceptable. 

g. Check each control line to ensure it is not misrouted by following the base line of the control line 

from the canopy-attaching loop down to the toggle. 

h. Grasp the base line of the control line at the attaching loop again and using thumb and forefinger, 

trace the base line down to the 3rd finger trap ensuring there are no full twists. 

Risers

Slider

Suspension

Device Clamps 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-8 

i. Trace each cascade line attached to the base line ensuring there are no full twists and that each 

line is attached to the appropriate corresponding attaching loop. 

j. Starting with line 1C, trace the line to the bar tack using the thumb and forefinger and remove all 

twists. From the bar tack trace line 1D to the canopy-attaching loop then continue tracing line 1C 

from the bar tack to the canopy-attaching loop. 

k. Using the procedures from step l., above, trace lines 2C and 2D through 8C and 8D. 

l. Starting with line 1A, trace the line up to the bar tack using thumb and forefinger and remove all 

twist. Trace line 1B from the bar tack to the canopy-attaching loop, and then continue tracing line 

1A to the canopy-attaching loop. 

m. Using the procedures in step n., above, trace lines 2A and 2B, 3A and 3B, 6A and 6B, 8A and 8B. 

n. Lines 4A and 5A are continuous. Trace each line from the connector link to the canopy attaching 

loops ensuring there are no twists and that line 4A and 5A are attached to the nose of the 

canopy. 

5. Using 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, tighten barrel nut on connector links 1⁄4 turn past hand tight. 

6. Hand-tack each riser below the connector link with one turn double, tape lacing and tying, and with an 

overhand knot. 

Connector

Tacking

Riser

Base Line

Cascade 

Lines

Bar Tack
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-9 Change 1 

7. Remove parachute from suspension device and place in proper layout. 

APPLICATION OF MARKINGS 

Apply markings as follows: 

NOTE

When a parachute component is placed in service, the month and 

year of date placed in service shall be marked on it. 

1. Canopy. On cell with data block. 

2. Pilot chute assembly. Anywhere on fabric area that will be visible after marking. 

3. Slider. Anywhere on fabric area that will be visible after marking. 

4. Risers. Stencil riser on fabric, in suitable location (near data tag). 

5. Allow marking to dry 20 to 30-minutes. 

INSTALLATION OF SAFETY STOW; ELASTIC LOOP IN DEPLOYMENT BAG 

Install safety stow elastic loop in deployment bag as follows: 

CAUTION 

Do not tack elastic loop to deployment bag. Safety stow elastic loop 

must move freely within guide channel. 

1. Insert elastic loop in channel. Center loop splice between grommets. 

2. Route each loop end through appropriate grommet. 

Safety Stow 

Loops
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-10 

ATTACHMENT OF CONTROL LINES TO CONTROL TOGGLES 

Attach control lines to control toggles as follows: 

1. Pass control line through guide ring on rear riser, and the through ring on control toggle. 

2. Temporarily secure control line to ring with a loose overhand knot against toggle ring. 

Control Line

Overhand Knot 

Rear Riser

Ring

Toggle

Control Line 

Tacking

Guide

Ring

Toggle

Rear Riser 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-11 Change 1 

NOTE

Final adjustment will be made during the full-flight trim check (WP 

0005 00). 

3. Perform canopy trim check as follows: 

a. Using the equipment D-rings, attach the container to a stationary point, ensuring equal tension, 

with the harness down and container facing up. 

b. Obtain suspension line group separation and place canopy with the nose down and the tail facing 

up.

c. Pull control lines down until finger-trapped loops are below control line guide rings. 

Control Line 

Guide Ring

Finger

Trapped 

Loop

Control Line
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-12 

d. Move right finger-trapped loop and riser strap to the left riser strap. Insert toggle thong through 

both finger-trapped loops. 

e. With the toggles inserted in the finger trap loops, locate lines 1A and 8A. 

1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

Finger

Trapped 

Loop

Right Riser 

Strap Left Riser

Strap

Toggle Thong

TAIL

NOSE
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-13 Change 1 

NOTE

Pull both lines evenly before looking at the ruler to ensure an 

accurate measurement can be obtained.

f. Grasp canopy fabric near line 1A attaching loop. Moving to center of canopy, pull line 1A and the 

control line on the right riser and compare lengths to ensure control line is 15-inches (+1-inch) 

longer than line 1A. 

g. Grasp the base line of the right control line and compare the control line cascade lines to the 

control line base line and insure they are even (+1

/2-inch). 

15 ± 1 IN.

Control

Line

Reference

Point For

Comparing

Lengths

Line 1A 

Control Line

Cascade Line 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-14 

h. Grasp canopy fabric near line 8A attaching loop. Moving to center of canopy, pull line 8A and the 

control line on the left rear riser and compare lengths to ensure control line is 15-inches (+1-inch) 

longer than line 8A. 

i. Grasp the base line of the left control line and compare the control line cascade lines to the 

control line baseline and ensure they are even (+1

/2-inch). 

15 ± 1 IN.

Control

Line

Reference 

Point For 

Comparing

Lengths

LINE 8A 

Left Control

Line

Cascade Line 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-15 Change 1 

j. Move to the trailing edge of the canopy (tail). Grasp canopy fabric near both main control line 

attachment loops. Pull control lines and compare to ensure lengths are equal within 1⁄2-inch. 

k. Remove toggles from finger trap loop. 

l. Move to leading edge of canopy and ensure connector links are held even with one another. 

m. Grasp canopy fabric near lines 1A and 1B attachment points. Moving to center of canopy, stretch 

and compare lengths. Line 1B should be 3-inches (± 1-inch) longer than line 1A. 

Control Line

Control Line 

3 ± 1 IN 

Line 1B

Line 1A 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-16 

n. Grasp canopy fabric near lines 1B and 1C attachment points. Moving to center of canopy, stretch 

and compare lengths. Line 1C should be 9-inches (± 1-inch) longer than line 1B. 

o. Grasp canopy fabric near lines 1C and 1D attachment points. Moving to center of canopy, stretch 

and compare lengths. Line 1D should be 12-inches (± 1-inch) longer than line 1C. 

Line 1C

Line 1B 

9 ± 1-IN 

12 ± 1-IN. 

Line 1C 

Line 1D
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-17 Change 1 

p. Move to the trailing edge of the canopy and ensure connector links are held even with one 

another. 

q. Locate lines 1D and 8D. 

NOTE

Pull both lines evenly before looking at the ruler to ensure an 

accurate measurement can be obtained. Adjust knot at the toggle 

to obtain correct length. 

r. Grasp canopy fabric near line 1D attaching loop. Moving to center of canopy, pull line 1D and the 

control line on the right riser and compare lengths to ensure control line is 15-inches (+ 1-inch) 

longer than line 1D. 

15 ± 1 IN. 

Line 1D 

Control Line
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-18 

NOTE

Pull both lines evenly before looking at the ruler to ensure an 

accurate measurement can be obtained. Adjust knot at the toggle 

to obtain correct length. 

s. Grasp canopy fabric near line 8D attaching loop. Moving to center of canopy, pull line 8D and the 

control line on the left riser and compare lengths to ensure control line is 15-inches (+ 1-inch) 

longer than line 8D. 

15 ± 1-IN. 

Line 8D 

Control Line
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

0005 00-19 Change 1 

t. Move to the trailing edge of the canopy. Grasp canopy fabric near both main control-attaching 

loops. Pull control lines and compare to ensure lengths are equal (+ 1⁄2-inch). 

NOTE

Ensure the knot is drawn tight against the toggle ring. 

u. Permanently secure control line knot formed below. Trim the running end to the length of the 

toggle.

Control Line

Control Line 

Control Line

Permanent

Overhand

Knot

Rear Riser

Ring

Toggle
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0005 00 

Change 1 0005 00-20 

4. Perform spanwise line check as follows: 

a. Lay out parachute on a clean dry surface with canopy positioned on its left side. Leading edge 

(nose) will be on right when viewed from riser end. Stretch lines full length with a helper 

positioned at riser end to check continuity and to hold lines taut. 

b. Grasp high points of each cell and flip canopy toward trailing edge. Canopy shall lie flat with 

trailing edge lines on left side when viewed from riser end. 

c. Beginning with line 1A, compare each line in the A group. The maximum allowable difference 

between that line and any other line is 1⁄2-inch. 

d. Repeat step c., above, for B, C, and D line groups. 

1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Leading Edge 

Lines

TAIL

NOSE
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

ASSEMBLY – MAIN PARACHUTE 

0006 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Ripcord Test 

• Layout

• Attachment of Canopy to Risers 

• Application of Markings 

• Attachment of Control Lines to Control Toggles

• Attachment of Pilot Chute, Bridle Line, 

and Deployment Bag 

• Attachment of Risers to 

Harness/Container 

• Canopy Trim Check 

• Spanwise Line Check

INITIAL SETUP: 

Personnel Required 

92R(10) Parachute Rigger 

92R(20) Parachute Rigger 

Tools

Brush, Stenciling (Item 5, WP 0063 00) 

Inspection Kit, Ripcord (Item 21, WP 0063 00) 

Machine, Stencil Cutting (Item 26, WP 0063 00) 

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, 7

/16-IN., Open-End (Item 45, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Ink, Marking, Parachute (Item 25/26, WP 

0076 00) 

Stencil Board, Oiled (Item 31, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Pressure-Sensitive, Yellow, 1⁄2-IN. Wide, 

(Item 38, WP 0076 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Stretch canopy and suspension lines full length 

in packing area. 

RIPCORD GRIP TEST 

1. Perform a ripcord test as follows: 

a. Insert 1⁄2-inch of locking pin end into hole of fixed ripcord locking pin test block (as shown in A 

below). Ensure the test block is firmly secured in the fixed position. 

90°

(REF)

1/2 IN

1/16 IN

Pin Hole

Fixed Test 

Block Locking

Pin

Ripcord

Cable

Ripcord Grip

7-Pound

Weight

Test

Gauge

Hole

Test

Gauge

Locking Pin 

Fixed

Wooden 

Blocks

A. TESTING LOCKING PIN 

WITH TEST BLOCK 

B. TESTING LOCKING PIN 

WITH GAUGE BLOCK

A B
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-2 

b. Attach a 7-pound weight to ripcord grip handle and suspend weight from handle, exercising care 

to apply load gradually without impact. Hands or lifting device, as applicable, must be fully 

removed from weight. 

NOTE

The ripcord-locking pin will withstand a 7-pound load without 

assuming a permanent set. 

c. Remove weight, rotate locking pin one-quarter turn, and test pin again by reapplying the load as 

prescribed in step b. 

d. Repeat procedure in step c. until locking pin has been tested in four positions and rotated onequarter turn prior to each test. 

NOTE

Each locking pin on a ripcord length will be tested under load in four 

positions. 

e. Remove weight from ripcord grip and remove locking pin from test block. 

f. Visually examine tested locking pin to ascertain if it was marred, cracked, or distorted during the 

test under load. If any defects are noted, remove ripcord from service. 

g. Repeat procedure in steps b. through f. for the remaining locking pins on the ripcord length. After 

testing all locking pins, if there are no visual defects apparent, test each of the locking pins for 

bends. 

h. Place locking pin in vertical position with pin end facing up and either clamp the pin between two 

wooden blocks at a point below the pin shoulder (as shown in B of the illustration on the previous 

page) or hold between thumb and index finger of one hand. 

i. Using test gage, manually locate hole in the block over the end of the secured pin, allowing for 1

/16-inch maximum insertion. 

j. With axis of gage, block hole aligned with axis of locking pin, then release gage block and allow 

block to fall freely. 

k. When weight of gage block fails to cause full penetration of the pin into the gage block hole, the 

pin is excessively bent. Remove ripcord from service. 

l. Repeat the procedures in steps h. through k. for each of the remaining locking pins on the ripcord 

length.

m. Position ripcord grip on a fixed hook from a corner nearest the weld. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-3 Change 1 

n. Attach and suspend a 40-pound weight from opposite corner of grip nearest the weld. Ensure 

that total weight is suspended without impact. Hands or lifting device, as applicable, must be fully 

removed from weight. 

o. Using suitable illumination, visually inspect welded joint for cracks or breaks. If any cracks or 

breaks are detected in the welded area, remove ripcord from service. 

p. Remove weight from ripcord grip and remove grip from hook. 

q. A ripcord that has been tested according to above and is considered serviceable will be marked 

to indicate test accomplishment. Wrap two turns of 1⁄2-inch-wide yellow pressure sensitive tape 

around the center of the grip tubing at a point near the weld. However, ensure the tape wrapping 

does not cover the welding joint. 

LAYOUT 

1. Perform layout as follows: 

a. Lay out parachute on a clean dry surface with canopy positioned on its left side. Leading edge 

(nose) will be on right when viewed from riser end. Stretch lines full length with a helper 

positioned at riser end to check continuity and to hold lines taut. 

Fixed Hook 

40-LB Weight
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-4 

b. Grasp high points of each cell and flip canopy toward trailing edge. Canopy shall lie flat with 

trailing edge lines on left side when viewed from riser end. 

LEFT RIGHT

FRONT

REAR

PLEASE READ INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE ASSEMBLY

LEFT STEERING LINE RIGHT STEERING LINE

LINE ORGANIZING

CARD

c. Remove any twists, turns, and tangles between suspension line groups. 

d. Starting with line 8A and 8B, raise to a sufficient height to see if line 8A runs free from canopy 

through right front slider grommet to outside of right front riser connector link. Line 1A should run 

free through left front slider grommet to outside of left front riser connector link. 

Leading

Edge

Lines

Line 8B

Line 8A 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-5 Change 1 

e. Grasp lines 8C and 8D and raise to a sufficient height to see if line 8C runs free from canopy 

through right rear slider grommet to outside of right rear riser connector link. Line 1C should run 

free through left rear slider grommet to outside of left rear riser connector link. 

f. Grasp control line and raise to a sufficient height to ensure they run free and clear from the tail 

through the proper slider grommets to the line-organizing card. 

SLIDER

DETAIL

Line 8D Line 8C 

Control

Lines

Control

Lines

D Lines

C Lines 

A and B 

Lines
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-6 

ATTACHMENT OF RISERS TO HARNESS/CONTAINER 

Attach risers to harness/container as follows: 

CAUTION

Ensure Clearslip #2TM silicone lubricant does not come in contact 

with any textile surface of the MC-4 RAPPS. 

1. Insert main ripcord cable through main ripcord housing. Insert main ripcord grip into ripcord grip 

pocket. Apply a small amount of Clearslip #2TM silicone lubricant to a clean dry rag and wipe each 

single point release cable several times. Allow a few moments for evaporation. Insert single point 

release cable through cable housings. Mate hook tape on grip with pile tape on harness. Attach 

reserve static line to container with reserve static line pull ring facing top of container. Pass reserve 

ripcord cable through reserve static line pull ring and then through reserve static line guide ring. 

Reserve

Static

Line Pull

Ring

Main Canopy

Release

Ripcord

Housing

Main Ripcord

Release 

Ripcords

Reserve 

Ripcord

Grip

Ripcord

Main

Release

Reserve Static Line 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-7 Change 1 

2. Position right riser on harness above main ripcord and pass large ring on riser through base ring of 

three ring release. 

3. Pass small riser ring through large riser ring. Position small riser ring over riser grommet. 

Base Ring of 3 Ring Release 

Large Riser Ring

Large Riser Ring 

Small Riser Ring

Positioned Over

Grommet
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-8 

4. Pass locking loop over small riser ring and down through riser grommet. Ensure riser locking loop is 

not twisted. Insert locking loop through eye on end of cable housing. 

NOTE

Ensure riser locking loop is not twisted. 

5. Pass main canopy release cable through locking loop and insert main canopy release cable in riser 

stowage flute. 

Riser Locking Loop 

Cable Housing Eye

Stowage Flute

Release Cable

Riser Locking Loop
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-9 Change 1 

6. Attach left riser to harness in same manner as in step 2. through 5. 

7. Connect reserve static line ring to reserve static line release shackle. 

8. Mate and close snap on reserve static line release lanyard to riser snap. 

Reserve Static

Line Release

Shackle

Reserve

Static

Line

Snap
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-10 

ATTACHMENT OF CANOPY TO RISERS 

Attach canopy to risers as follows: 

1. Position risers at connector links. 

2. Prior to attaching connector links to the risers, if applicable, re-position suspension lines on the short 

portion of the connector link. 

NOTE

Connector link barrel nuts must face inboard and tighten upward. 

3. Remove connector links and control lines from line organizing card and loosely connect connector 

links and control lines to proper riser. 

4. Perform a suspension line continuity check by tracing each line from canopy through proper slider 

grommet to proper riser connector link as follows: 

a. Hang the parachute at every loaded rib, with clamps, by its tail, using a suitable (locally 

manufactured) hanging device (approximately 16-feet in length). 

b. Elongate the suspension lines and obtain suspension line group separation. 

c. Suspend the slider by the two rear grommets. 

Longer Portion of

Connector Link

(Riser End)

Short Portion 

of Connector 

Link 

Connector 

Link Barrel 

Nut
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-11 Change 1 

d. Secure the risers to a suitable anchor point. 

e. Starting from the risers (from rigger view), check to ensure the right and left risers are attached to 

the correct side. 

f. Check each riser to ensure that the three-ring assemble is facing down. 

g. Trace each riser up to the connector links and ensure each barrel nut faces inboard and closes 

upward toward the canopy. 

h. Check the slider to ensure that the reinforcement webbing is facing the canopy and the arrow is 

facing down. 

NOTE

During the process of tracing each control line/cascade line, half twists are 

acceptable. 

i. Check each control line to ensure that it is not misrouted by following the base line of the control 

line from the canopy-attaching loop down to the toggle. 

Risers

Slider

Suspension

Device Clamps 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-12 

j. Grasp the base line of the control lines at the attaching loop again and using thumb and forefinger 

trace the base line down to the 3rd finger trap ensuring there are no full twists. 

k. Trace each cascade line attached to the base line ensuring there are no full twists and that each 

line is attached to the appropriate corresponding attaching loop. 

l. Starting with line 1C trace the line to the bar tack using the thumb and forefinger and remove all 

twist. Trace line 1D from the bar tack to the canopy-attaching loop then continue tracing line 1C 

from the bartack to the canopy-attaching loop. 

m. Using procedures from step l., above, trace lines 2C and 2D through 8C and 8D. 

n. Starting with line 1A, trace the line up to the bar tack using thumb and forefinger and remove all 

twists. Trace line 1B from the bar tack to the canopy-attaching loop the continue tracing line 1A 

to the canopy-attaching loop. 

o. Using procedures in step n., above, trace lines 2A and 2B, 3A and 3B, 6A and 6B, 7A and 7B, 

and 8A and 8B. 

p. Lines 4A and 5A are continuous. Trace each line from the connector link to the canopy attaching 

loops ensuring there are no full twists and that line 4A and 5A are attached to the nose of the 

canopy. 

5. Using 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, tighten barrel nut on connector links 1⁄4 turn past hand tight. 

Base Line 

Cascade

Lines

Bar Tack
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-13 Change 1 

6. Hand tack each riser below the connector link with one turn double tape lacing and tying with an 

overhand knot. 

7. Remove parachute from hanging device and place in proper layout. 

APPLICATION OF MARKINGS 

Apply markings as follows: 

NOTE

When a parachute component is placed in service, the month and 

year of date placed in service shall be marked on it. 

1. Canopy. On cell with data block. 

2. Harness/container. On left diagonal back strap near the data label. 

3. Pilot chute. Anywhere on fabric area that will be visible after marking. 

4. Slider. Anywhere on fabric area that will be visible after marking. 

5. Risers. Stencil riser on fabric, in suitable location (near data tag). 

6. Allow markings to dry 20 to 30-minutes. 

Connector Link 

Tacking

Riser
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-14 

ATTACHMENT OF CONTROL TOGGLES TO CONTROL LINES 

Attach control lines to control toggles as follows: 

1. Pass control lines through guide rings on rear risers, and then through rings on control toggles. 

2. Temporarily secure control lines to rings with a loose overhand knot against toggle ring. 

NOTE

Final adjustment will be made during full-flight trim check (WP 0006 00). 

ATTACHMENT OF PILOT CHUTE, BRIDLE LINE, AND DEPLOYMENT BAG 

Attach pilot chute, bridle line, and deployment bag as follows: 

1. Pass bridle line loop at ring end through deployment bag top grommet from outside to inside. 

2. Pass bridle line loop at ring end completely through bridle line attachment ring on top of canopy. 

3. Pass opposite end of bridle line and deployment bag through loop at end ring. Pull tight forming a 

girth hitch. 

4. Pass other loop end of bridle line through 1-inch loop at bottom end of pilot chute. 

Upper

Guide

Ring

Control Line

Lower Guide Ring

Toggle Ring

Overhand 

Knot 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-15 Change 1 

5. Pass entire pilot chute through loop. Pull tight forming a girth hitch. 

CANOPY TRIM CHECK 

Perform canopy trim check as follows: 

1. Using the equipment D-rings, attach the container to a stationary point, ensuring equal tension, with 

the harness down and container facing up. 

2. Obtain suspension line group separation and place canopy with the nose down and the tail facing up. 

Canopy Bridle Line 

Attachment 

Ring

Deployment Bag 

Grommet 

Bridle Line

Girth Hitch 

Girth Hitch
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-16 

3. Pull control lines down until finger-trapped loops are below lower control line guide rings. 

4. Move right finger-trapped loop and riser strap to left riser strap. Insert toggle thong through both 

finger-trapped loops. 

Control Line

Guide Ring

Finger

Trapped 

Loop

Control Line 

Finger

Trapped 

Loop

Right Riser 

Strap Left Riser

Strap

Toggle Thong
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-17 Change 1 

5. With the toggles inserted in the finger-trapped loops, locate lines 1A and 8A. 

1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

NOTE

Pull both lines evenly before looking at the ruler to ensure an 

accurate measurement can be obtained.

6. Grasp canopy fabric near line 1A attaching loop. Moving to center of canopy pull line 1A and the 

control line on the right front riser and compare lengths to ensure control line is 15-inches (+ 1-inch) 

longer than line 1A. 

Control Line 

Reference Point 

For Comparing 

Lengths

Line 1A 

15+ 1-IN. 

TAIL

NOSE
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-18 

7. Grasp base line of the right control line and compare the cascade lines to the base line and ensure 

they are even (+ 1

/2-inch).

8. Grasp canopy fabric near line 8A attaching loop. Moving to center of canopy pull line 8A and the 

control line on the left rear riser and compare lengths to ensure control line is 15-inches (+ 1-inch) 

longer than line 8A. 

Control Line

Cascade Line 

15 ± 1-IN.

Control

Line

Reference Point 

For Comparing 

Lengths

Line 8A 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-19 Change 1 

9. Grasp the base line of the left control line and compare the cascade line to the base line and ensure 

they are even (+ 1

/2-inch).

10. Move to the trailing edge of the canopy (tail). Grasp canopy fabric near both main control line 

attachment loops. Pull control lines and compare to ensure lengths are equal within 1⁄2-inch. 

11. Remove toggles from finger trap loop. 

12. Move to leading edge of canopy and ensure connector links are held even with one another. 

Left Control Line

Cascade Line 

Control Line

Control Line 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-20 

13. Grasp canopy fabric near lines 1A and 1B attachment points. Moving to center of canopy stretch and 

compare lengths. Line 1B should be 3-inches (+ 1-inch) longer than line 1A. 

14. Grasp canopy fabric near lines 1B and 1C attachment points. Moving to center of canopy, stretch 

and compare lengths. Line 1C should be 9-inches (+ 1-inch) longer than line 1B. 

3 ± 1-IN. 

Line 1B

Line 1A 

Line 1C

Line 1B 

9 ± 1-IN. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-21 Change 1 

15. Grasp canopy fabric near lines 1C and 1D attachment points. Moving to center of canopy stretch and 

compare lengths. Line 1D should be 12-inches (+1-inch) longer than line 1C. 

16. Move to trailing edge of canopy and ensure connector links are held even with one another. 

17. Locate line 1D and 8D. 

NOTE

Pull both lines evenly before looking at ruler to ensure an accurate 

measurement can be obtained. Adjust knot at the toggle to obtain 

correct length. 

12 ± 1 IN. 

Line 1C 

Line 1D
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-22 

18. Grasp canopy fabric near line 1D attaching loop. Moving to center line of canopy, pull line 1D and the 

control line on the right riser and compare lengths to ensure control line is 15-inches (+ 1-inch) longer 

than line 1D. 

NOTE

Pull both lines evenly before looking at ruler to ensure an accurate 

measurement can be obtained. Adjust knot at the toggle to obtain 

correct length.

15 ± 1-IN. 

Line 1D 

Control Line
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-23 Change 1 

19. Grasp canopy fabric near line 8D attaching loop. Moving to center of canopy pull line 8D and the 

control line on the left riser and compare lengths to ensure control line is 15-inches (+ 1-inch) longer 

than line 8D. 

20. Move to the trailing edge of the canopy. Grasp canopy fabric near both main control line-attaching 

loops. Pull control lines and compare to ensure lengths are equal (+ 1

/2-inch). 

15 ± 1-IN. 

Line 8D 

Control Line

Control Line

Control Line 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

Change 1 0006 00-24 

NOTE

Ensure the knot is drawn tight against the toggle ring. 

21. Permanently secure control line knot formed below. Trim the running end to the length of the toggle. 

SPANWISE LINE CHECK 

Perform spanwise line check as follows: 

1. Lay out parachute on a clean dry surface with canopy positioned on its left side. Leading edge (nose) 

will be on right when viewed from riser end. Stretch lines full length with a helper positioned at riser 

end to check continuity and to hold lines taut. 

Control Line

Overhand Knot

Rear Riser Ring

Toggle
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0006 00 

0006 00-25/(26 Blank) Change 1 

2. Grasp high points of each cell and flip canopy toward trailing edge. Canopy shall lie flat with trailing 

edge lines on left side when viewed from riser end. 

3. Beginning with line 1A, compare each line in the A group. The maximum allowable difference 

between that line and any other line is 1⁄2-inch. 

4. Repeat step 3., for B, C, and D line groups. 

1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D

1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C

1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Leading

Edge Lines 

TAIL

NOSE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0007 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS), INTRODUCTION 

0007 00-1/(2 Blank) 

GENERAL

The following describe PMCS procedures on the unit and direct support levels. The PMCS table has 

been provided to ensure the MC-4 parachute is in proper operating condition, and ready for its primary 

mission. 

SCOPE

The following work packages (WP 0015 00 through WP 0059 00) contain maintenance procedures that 

are the responsibility of the specified technician, as authorized by the Maintenance Allocation Chart 

(MAC), and the Source, Maintenance, and Recoverability (SMR) coded items that are identified in the 

Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL). 

MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS/PROCEDURES

Each of the mentioned work packages above identifies a maintenance function specified in the MAC. All 

maintenance procedures required to complete a maintenance function are identified under THIS TASK 

COVERS: in the order in which the work is most logically accomplished. 

PARACHUTE REPACK INTERVAL 

The MC-4 parachute will be repacked at a scheduled interval to insure airworthiness. When necessitated 

by climate/storage/use condition, the local airdrop equipment maintenance officer may require more 

frequent repack intervals. In this regard, a major concern would be rapid fluctuations of temperature 

(fluctuations around 32 degrees Fahrenheit, freezing point) sustained high or low temperature, or high 

humidity and heavily polluted atmosphere. The MC-4 Ram Air Personnel Parachute System will be 

repacked at a 120-day interval (both main and reserve). 

DROP TESTING CRITERIA 

Drop testing of the MC-4 Ram Air Personnel Parachute System consist of physically airdropping an item 

from an aircraft in flight. The drop-test is used as a means of proving the serviceability of an item or 

checking parachute rigger proficiency, and will only be performed under the supervision of qualified 

parachute rigger personnel who satisfy the supervisory requirements outlined in AR 750-32 and TM 10-

1670-201-23. Drop testing will usually be conducted by an activity responsible for the inspection and 

maintenance of airdrop equipment, which includes either parachute packing or airdrop load rigging. The 

criteria required to accomplish a drop test is as follows: 

1. To drop-test a troop-type personnel parachute, a qualified parachute rigger will jump the 

parachute and the applicable type parachute will be released under conditions that are consistent 

with the requirements for a personnel jump or equipment drop. 

2. During the drop-test of any type parachute, the deployment of the parachute will be thoroughly 

monitored and observed to detect any indication of malfunction or defect. A subsequent record of 

the applicable parachute log record will be entered into the applicable log record using 

procedures outline in WP 0004 00. 

3. Any type of airdrop equipment that indicates evidence of malfunction/defect during, or after, a 

drop-test will be disposed of as prescribed in WP 0011 00. 

4. A personnel parachute that is considered to have contributed to the injury of an individual 

parachutist (critical or fatal) will be disposed of in accordance with WP 0011 00, Equipment 

Disposition.

5. Airdrop equipment that does not reflect evidence of malfunction or defect upon completion of a 

drop-test will be administered a technical/rigger-type inspection as outlined in WP 0011 00. If 

serviceable, the item(s) may then remain in use. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0008 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) 

0008 00-1 Change 2 

GENERAL 

The following describe PMCS procedures on the unit and direct support levels. The PMCS table has 

been provided to ensure the MC-4 parachute is in proper operating condition and ready for its primary 

mission. 

Warnings and Cautions. Warnings and cautions appear before applicable procedures. You must 

observe these WARNINGS and CAUTIONS to prevent serious injury to yourself and others, and to 

prevent damage to equipment. 

Frequency of Performing PMCS. PMCS will be performed before equipment is packed for use, during 

modification and repair after use, or at any time deemed necessary by the air delivery equipment 

maintenance officer. 

PMCS Columnar Entries Table 1. 

Item Number. The item number column shall be used as a source of the item number required for the 

TM Number column on DA Form 2404 (Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet), when 

recording the results of the PMCS. 

Interval. This column identifies the required PMCS interval. 

Item to be Inspected. Contains the common name of the item to be inspected. 

Procedures. Provides a brief description of the procedures by which the checks are to be performed. 

Recording Defects. All defects discovered during the inspection will be recorded using the applicable 

specifics in DA Pamphlet 750-8, DA Pamphlet 738-751 and TB 43-0002-43.

Over Age Items. During any inspection, or at any time that an item is found to be over age (i.e., 

shelf/service-life has expired as specified in TB 43-0002-43), the item will be removed from service, 

condemned, and tagged, in accordance with DA PAM 738-751.

Conservation of Resources. To conserve time and labor, and to avoid evacuation to a direct support 

maintenance activity, unit/detachment commanders may designate, in writing, rigger personnel to 

accomplish classification inspection of over age air delivery equipment and the classification of Beyond 

Economical Repair (BER) parachutes. 

Inspection Function Requirement. Normally, air delivery equipment maintenance personnel at a 

packing, rigging, or repair activity will perform a technical/rigger-type inspection. The inspection of initial 

receipt items will be performed as a separate function from packing or rigging activity; the item to be 

inspected will be placed in proper layout on a packing table or suitable sized floor area. 

Should defect or damage be discovered at any point during the inspection, the inspection will be 

terminated and the applicable item will be processed and forwarded to repair activity. The repair activity, 

in turn, will conduct a technical/rigger-type inspection that will be performed by only those parachute 

rigger personnel cited in AR 750-32. The repair activity inspection of personnel parachutes will be made 

on the light table. 

Any defect discovered during a unit level repair activity inspection, that exceeds the capability of that 

activity, will require the affected item to be evacuated to a direct support maintenance function.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0008 00 

Change 2 0008 00-2 

NOTE 

Parachutes that are deemed unserviceable, by a packing or rigging 

activity, will be rigger-rolled (see the ACCORDION FOLDING/ 

RIGGER ROLLING paragraph detailed in WP 0061 00) prior to 

being sent to a repair activity. 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 

X – Before and after all repairs, and 

before packing (technical/rigger 

type inspection). 

Y – After use (shakeout). Z – Prior to issue (routine 

inspection). 

Interval 

ITEM 

NO. X Y Z 

ITEM TO BE 

INSPECTED PROCEDURES 

00 MC-4 System 

01 • Parachute 

(Packed for Use) 

Check for serviceability and completeness of visible parts 

without opening container. Pack date in parachute log 

record. 

02 • • Canopies and Riser 

Assemblies 

Check for dampness, fungus, acid, grease, oil, foreign 

material, holes, cuts, tears, and broken lines as canopy is 

raised, lowered, and suspended during shakeout. 

03 • • Canopy Fabric Materials 

Check for legibility and completeness of marked data; 

dampness, fungus, dirt, acid, grease, oil, foreign material, 

rips, burns, cuts, breaks, frays, tears, holes, and loose or 

broken stitching on fabric and lines. 

04 • Hardware Check for corrosion, rust, rough spots, burrs, breaks, 

cracks, bends, and stripped or damaged threads. 

05 • • Risers Check for dampness, fungus, acid, grease, oil, dirt, 

foreign material, cuts, tears, and frays. 

06 

• • Riser Fabric 

Materials 

Check for dampness, fungus, dirt, acid, grease, oil, 

foreign material, burns, cuts, tears, broken or loose 

stitching, excess line keepers, reserve static line release 

lanyard, main canopy release locking loop, and riser 

release rings. 

07 • Riser Hardware Check for corrosion, rust, rough spots, burrs, breaks, 

cracks, bends, and stripped or damaged threads. 

08 • • Pilot Parachutes Check for dampness, acid, grease, oil, and dirt, foreign 

material, and broken springs. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0008 00 

 0008 00-3/(4 Blank) Change 2 

Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (CONT) 

X – Before and after all repairs, and 

before packing (technical/rigger 

type inspection). 

Y – After use (shakeout). Z – Prior to issue (routine 

inspection). 

INTERVAL 

ITEM 

NO. X Y Z 

ITEM TO BE 

INSPECTED PROCEDURE 

09 • •

Pilot parachute 

fabric materials 

Check for dampness, fungus, acid, grease, oil, dirt, 

foreign material, rips, burns, cuts, frays, tears, holes, thin 

spots, and loose or broken stitching. 

10 • 

Pilot parachute 

hardware Check for cracks, rust, distorted or broken springs. 

11 • • •

Harness/container 

assembly 

Check for dampness, fungus, acid, grease, oil, dirt, cuts, 

and broken webbing. 

12 • • •

Harness fabric 

material 

Check for dampness, fungus, acid, grease, oil, dirt, cuts, 

broken webbing, and loose or broken stitching. 

13 • •

Hardness hardware Check for corrosion, cracks, rust, rough spots, burrs, and 

distortion. 

14 • • • Container assembly Check for dampness, fungus, acid, oil, grease, dirt, 

foreign material, holes, and tears. 

15 • • •

Container fabric 

materials 

Check for dampness, fungus, acid, oil, grease, dirt, 

foreign material, cuts, tears, and holes. 

16 • • Container hardware Check for corrosion, cracks, rust, rough spots, burrs, 

loose or missing grommets or snap fasteners. 

17 • • Deployment bags 

Check for dampness, fungus, acid, grease, oil, dirt, 

foreign material, cuts, holes, tears, broken or loose 

stitching, loose or missing grommets, and burrs/rough 

spots on grommets. 

18 • • Ripcords 

Check for corrosion, cracks, rust, bends, fraying, broken 

strands, and security of swaged terminal balls and ripcord 

pins. 

LUBRICATION SERVICE INTERVALS 

The MC-4 Ram Air Personnel Parachute System 3-Ring Riser Release requires lubrication every 120-

days (WP 0011 00). 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

CHAPTER 3 

UNIT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL 

PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0009 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SHAKEOUT AND AIRING 

0009 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Shakeout 

x Airing

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Brush, Scrub, Household (Item 4, WP 0063 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Parachute Suspended.

SHAKEOUT

A two-person team, either indoors within a shakeout room or outdoors at a shakeout tower, will 

accomplish the shakeout. Shake out is accomplished by elevating the tail seam (ensuring nose is off the 

ground) and vigorously shaking all debris out of each cell. Each parachute will be suspended and all 

debris removed by shaking the canopy thoroughly or by brushing with a dry, soft-bristled brush, as 

detailed below: 

1. With assistance from the No. 2 person, the No. 1 person will gather the control lines on the left and 

right side of the canopy and wrap them two (2) times around the snap. 

2. Through use of the pulley rope, the No. 2 person will raise the tail of the canopy to a suitable height; 

this will enable the No. 1 person to perform shakeout on each of the canopy cells. Until the cell 

shaking process is completed, the No. 2 person will maintain a steady pull on the pulley rope to hold 

the suspended canopy at the working height needed by the No. 1 person. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0009 00 

0009 00-2 

3. The No. 1 person will grasp any two-consecutive suspension lines, one in each hand, and vigorously 

shake the first cell. 

4. When the cells are free of debris, the No. 1 person passes the line from the right hand to the left hand 

and grasps the next consecutive suspension line, in the right hand. The No. 1 person will shake out 

each consecutive cell until all suspension lines are held in the left hand, and all cells are free of 

debris. 

5. Once the cell shaking process is completed, the No. 2 person will slowly raise the suspended canopy 

higher as the No. 1 person clears the suspension lines of debris and removes entanglements, when 

possible. 

First Cell 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0009 00 

0009 00-3/(4 Blank) 

6. After the suspension lines have been cleared, the No. 2 person may hold, or temporarily secure, the 

pulley rope while the No. 1 person proceeds to clear debris from other parachute components such 

as the risers, harness/container. 

7. When all components are free of debris, the No. 2 person will slowly lower the canopy, while the No. 

1 person S-folds the suspension lines into the MC-4 kit bag, as applicable. 

8. After the suspension lines have been completely folded, the No. 1 person will accordion-fold the 

canopy length on top of the folded lines (see WP 0061 00). 

9. As the canopy folding is being completed, the No. 1 person disconnects the canopy from the pulley 

rope snap. Secure the folded canopy assembly for further handling. 

AIRING 

Where dampness and mildew are prevalent, air delivery equipment will be aired at frequent intervals 

according to the severity of the prevailing conditions. Parachutes that have been previously packed or 

are unpacked, and have been subjected to conditions of dampness or mildew, will be aired for a period of 

at least 6-hours prior to being repacked. Air delivery items may be aired either indoors or outdoors, in dry 

weather. However, fabric items will not be aired in direct sunlight. Suspending or elevating the applicable 

item(s) in a manner that would allow maximum exposure to air circulation may accomplish airing. Outside 

facilities used for the shakeout of parachutes may be used for the airing of air delivery equipment, if 

weather conditions permit. If the shakeout facilities are inadequate for airing, the applicable item(s) may 

be suspended or elevate at several points, or draped over suitable type objects that will not cause 

damage. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0010 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

CLEANING AND DRYING 

0010 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Cleaning fabric items with dishwashing compound 

• Rinsing parachute assembly immersed in salt water 

• Rinsing parachute assembly immersed in fresh water 

• Drying fabric items 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Brush, Scrub, Household (Item 4, WP 0063 00) 

File, Flat, 1-IN. (Item 15, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Cloth, Abrasive (Item 6, WP 0076 00) 

Dishwashing Compound (Item 14, WP 0076 00) 

Rag, Wiping (Item 30, WP 0076 00) 

Cleaner, Industrial (Item 50, WP 0076 00) 

Equipment Condition

Laid out on packing table or other 

suitable surface. 

Personnel Required 

92R(10) Parachute Rigger 

WARNING 

Due to flammable properties and nylon-damaging substances, 

cleaning solvents other than EVERBLUM GOLDTM (industrial 

cleaner) will not be used in the spot-cleaning or airdrop equipment. 

EVERBLUM GOLDTM will only be used in areas where substantial 

ventilation is available. Repeated or prolonged inhalation of the 

solvent vapors can be detrimental to human health. In addition, 

avoid prolonged or repeated contact of the solvent fluid with areas 

of the skin. EVERBLUM GOLDTM must not be taken internally. 

CAUTION 

If during the cleaning there exists a possibility that the substance to 

be removed contains acid or some other equally destructive 

ingredient, the item will be evacuated to the intermediate 

maintenance activity for determination as to the nature of the 

substance and item disposition. If the substance cannot be 

identified or if normal repair procedures will not eliminate all traces 

of chemical or acid damage, the applicable item will be condemned. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0010 00 

Change 1 0010 00-2 

NOTE

Cleaning of parachutes should be held to a minimum and should be 

performed only when necessary to prevent malfunction or 

deterioration. When a parachute contains debris, or when it is 

soiled by dirt, oil, grease, rust, corrosion or other foreign substances 

to such an extent that cleaning is necessary, the cleaning should be 

done manually and should be limited to the soiled area only, unless 

the parachute has been contaminated by water. The method of 

cleaning must be determined by the nature of the substance to be 

removed. Do not use cleaning solvent to clean item soiling caused 

by airsickness. Use a solution of hand dishwashing compound to 

clean this type of soiling. 

CLEANING FABRIC ITEMS WITH INDUSTRIAL CLEANING 

Use EVERBLUM GOLDTM (industrial cleaner) to clean fabric items as follows: 

1. Gently brush with a soft bristle brush. 

2. Spot clean with EVERBLUM GOLDTM industrial cleaner as follows: 

a. Rub the soiled area with a clean dampened cloth with EVERBLUM GOLDTM industrial cleaner. 

b. Rinse the cleaned area by repeating the rubbing process with the clean portion of the cloth 

dampened with the industrial cleaner. 

c. Rub with a dry cloth to remove excess solvent and air dry. 

CLEANING FABRIC ITEMS WITH A SOLUTION OF HAND DISHWASHING COMPOUND

Use dishwashing compound to clean fabric items as follows: 

1. Gently brush with a soft bristle brush. 

2. Spot clean with a solution of dishwashing compound. 

a. Completely dissolve one-half cup of dishwashing compound in one-gallon of warm water. 

b. Rub the soiled area with a clean cloth dampened with a solution of dishwashing compound. 

c. Rinse the cleaned area by repeating the rubbing process, with a clean portion of the cloth 

dampened with water. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0010 00 

0010 00-3 Change 1 

RINSING PARACHUTE ASSEMBLY IMMERSED IN SALT-WATER

If the parachute, or any of its components, has been immersed in salt water in excess of 24-hours it will 

be condemned. Additionally, if the parachute, or any of its components, has been immersed in salt-water 

for a period less than 24-hours, but cannot be rinsed within 48-hours after recovery, it will also be 

condemned, unless the following actions are performed. Upon removal from the salt water, the parachute 

is placed in a single heavy-duty plastic trash bag, the top of the bag secured closed and kept in a wet 

state until a rinse can be performed following normal rinse procedures. The bag must be doubled when 

outside temperatures exceed 85 degrees F. The bags must be inspected after transport and storage to 

ensure the bag did not get torn and the assembly was allowed to dry. Parachutes recovered using this 

method must be rinsed NLT than seven (7) days after the salt-water immersion or be condemned. 

However, if the cited time limitations can be met, then immediately upon recover, suspend or elevate the 

parachute assembly in a shaded area and allow it to drain for at least 5-minutes. Do not attempt to wring 

the fabric or the suspension lines. Within 48-hours after recover, under the supervision of a qualified 

parachute rigger (92R), rinse the recovered parachute assembly as follows: 

1. Place the parachute assembly in a large watertight container filled with a suitable amount of fresh, 

clean water to cover the assembly. 

NOTE

If the salt-water-soaked parachute assembly is too large to be 

placed into a rinsing container, then the rinsing process will be 

affected by applying fresh, clean water to the assembly using a 

hose.

2. Agitate the container contents by hand for 5-minutes. 

3. Remove the parachute assembly from the container and suspend or elevate it in a shaded area, 

allowing a 5-minute drainage period. Do not attempt to wring the fabric or the suspension lines. 

4. Repeat the procedures in steps 1. through 3. above, two more times, using fresh, clean water for 

each rinse. 

5. After the third rinse, allow the parachute assembly to drain thoroughly. Upon completion of draining, 

dry the assembly in accordance with the DRYING FABRIC ITEMS procedures, below. 

6. When dried, perform a technical/rigger-type inspection of the parachute assembly. Corroded metal 

components, or corrosion-stained fabrics or suspension lines, will be either repaired or replaced as 

prescribed by the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) in WP 0063 00. 

7. Record any repair, immersion, and rinsing in the parachute log record as shown in WP 0004 00. 

RINSING PARACHUTE ASSEMBLY IMMERSED IN FRESH-WATER 

Any parachute, or its components, that has been immersed in a fresh water lake, river, or stream will not 

require rinsing unless it has been ascertained that the water is dirty, oily, or otherwise contaminated. 

Procedures for handling a fresh water immersed parachute are as follows: 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0010 00 

Change 1 0010 00-4 

1. Contaminated fresh-water. If the parachute, or its components, has been immersed in contaminated 

fresh-water, rinse and dry (see RINSING PARACHUTE ASSEMBLY IMMERSED IN SALT-WATER, 

above), and, if applicable, repair. 

2. Uncontaminated fresh-water. If the parachute, or its components, has been immersed in 

uncontaminated fresh-water, it will be cleaned and dried as outlined in CLEANING FABRIC ITEMS 

WITH A SOLUTION OF HAND DISHWASHING COMPOUND, DRYING FABRIC ITEMS, and 

CLEANING METAL ITEMS, in the detailed paragraphs above and below. Minor discoloration of 

fabric items, resulting from immersion in uncontaminated fresh-water, may occur. 

NOTE

Fabric items will not be dried in direct sunlight or by laying an item 

on the ground. 

DRYING FABRIC ITEMS

Dry fabric items as follows: 

1. Suspend or elevate the item in a well-ventilated room or in a heated drying room. 

2. Using electric circulating fans may reduce drying time. 

3. When heat is used, the heat temperature shall not exceed 160 degrees Fahrenheit (71 degrees 

Celsius). The preferred temperature is 140 degrees Fahrenheit (60 degrees Celsius). 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

INSPECTION 

 0011 00-1 Change 2 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Routine 

• Pack-In-Process 

• Technical/Rigger-Type

• 3-Ring Release Riser Inspection

• Slack Checker 

• In-Storage 

• Equipment Disposition 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition

Packed. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

92R (20) Parachute Rigger 

References 

DA PAM 738-751 

TB 43-0002-43 

DA PAM 750-8 

AR 750-1 

ROUTINE INSPECTION

A routine inspection is a visual check performed to ascertain the serviceability of all visible components of 

a parachute that is packed or rigged for use. The inspection will be made on all components that can be 

inspected without opening the parachute pack. 

Prior to issue, a parachute rigger will administer this inspection. Personnel parachutes issued for an air 

delivery operation and not deployed will receive a routine inspection prior to being placed into ready-forissue storage. 

PACK-IN-PROCESS INSPECTION

A pack-in-process inspection is performed at specified intervals during the packing of a parachute to 

ensure that only authorized procedures and methods are being used. 

A parachute rigger other than the packer or rigger preparing the applicable equipment for use will 

accomplish the inspection. The intervals, at which the inspection is performed, are as follows: 

NOTE 

For Army personnel, the In-Process Inspector (IP) qualifications are 

IAW AR 750-32. 

TECHNICAL/RIGGER-TYPE INSPECTION PROCEDURES 

Perform inspection as follows: 

1. Overall inspection. An overall inspection will be made on the MC-4 parachute to ascertain the 

following: 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

Change 2 0011 00-2 

a. Log record/parachute inspection data pocket and form. As applicable, inspect the assembly log 

record parachute inspection data pocket to ensure the Army Parachute Log Record (DA Form 

3912), NAVWPNCEN or NAVWPNS CL 13512/11(Parachute History Record) is enclosed and 

properly attached. Further, remove the log record from the pocket and evaluate the recorded 

entries. Inspect and evaluate as follows: 

The Army Parachute Log Record, DA Form 3912, and AFTO 391 

are history-type maintenance documents that accompany the 

parachute canopy and pack tray assemblies through the period of 

service of the individual assembly. The log record provides a means 

of recording maintenance actions performed on a parachute canopy 

assembly. Normally, a log record is initiated and attached to a right 

rear riser upon receipt by a using unit. However, if the item is 

subjected to alteration or modification by a maintenance activity 

during the interim period from date of manufacture to receipt by a 

using unit, the log record will be prepared by the activity performing 

the maintenance function. Once initiated, a log record will be 

attached to, and contained in, an affixed parachute log record/ 

inspection data pocket, until such time as the parachute canopy 

assembly is destroyed or rendered unfit for further use or repair. 

Additionally, should an item that requires a log record, be 

transferred from one unit to another, the log record for the parachute 

assembly will accompany the item in the transfer action. A prepared 

log record will not be removed or separated from a parachute, and 

especially a packed parachute, except as directed by the local air 

delivery equipment maintenance activity officer. A log record that is 

illegible, lost, damaged, soiled, or precludes further entries due to 

lack of space, will be replaced upon the next repack or inspection, 

as applicable, with a serviceable item from stock. 

b. Assembly completeness. Ensure the applicable assembly is complete and that no components 

(or parts) are missing. 

c. Operation adequacy. Check the item components and parts to ensure proper assembly, which 

includes attachment and alignment, and that the assembled product functions in the prescribed 

manner. Further, ensure that no stitch formation (or sewn seam) has been omitted. 

d. Markings and stenciling. Inspect each assembly and components for faded, illegible, obliterated, 

or missing informational data and identification numbers. 

e. Foreign material and stains. Inspect each assembly and related components for the presence of 

dirt or similar type foreign material. Also check for evidence of mildew, moisture, oil, grease, 

pitch, resin, or contamination by salt water. 

2. Detailed inspection. In addition to the overall inspection performed in 1., above, a detailed inspection 

will be performed on the materials that constitute the assembly or component construction using the 

following criteria, as applicable: 

a. Metal. Inspect for rust, corrosion, dents, bends, breaks, burrs, rough spots, sharp edges, wear, 

deterioration; damaged, loose or missing grommets, safety pins, connector snap, eye hook, pack 

fastener; improper swaging or welding; loss of spring tension; and missing or loose screws. 

b. Cloth. Inspect for breaks, burns, cuts, frays, holes, rips, snags, tears; loose, missing, or broken 

stitching or tacking; and weak spots, wear, or deterioration. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

 0011 00-3 Change 2 

c. Fabric tape, webbing, and cordage. Inspect for breaks, burns, cuts, frays, holes, snags, tears, 

incorrect weaving, and sharp edges formed from searing; loose, missing, or broken stitching, 

tacking, whipping, and weaving; weak spots, wear, and deterioration. 

d. Pressure-sensitive (adhesive) tape. Inspect for burns, holes, cuts, tears, weak spots; and 

looseness and deterioration. 

e. Rubber and elastic. Inspect for burns, cuts, holes, tears, weak spots, loss of elasticity and 

deterioration. 

3-RING RELEASE/RISER INSPECTION 

The following inspection will be conducted to determine the serviceability of the 3-ring release risers 

throughout the parachute’s service life. Perform inspection as follows: 

1. Lay the riser to be inspected face up on a smooth flat surface. Flip the smallest metal ring (No. 3) up 

toward the top of the riser and then push down on it to firmly seat it in the webbing, securing it to the 

riser. The range of allowable relationships between the No. 3 ring and the grommet is illustrated 

below. 

2. If the riser is serviceable up to this point, flip the No. 3 ring down toward the bottom of the riser. Push 

down the No. 2 and No. 3 rings (the next larger ring) to firmly seat them in the webbing, securing 

them to the riser. The range of allowable relationships between the No. 3 and No. 2 rings is illustrated 

below. The riser to be inspected must now be properly assembled to a harness to complete the 

inspection. 

CAUTION 

Repetitive use of the rings in the same position may cause 

elongation. This will prevent the rings from releasing. 

3. Rotate the small and large ring and visually check for deformed rings. 

Locking Loop 

Removed For 

Clarity 

No. 3 Ring Grommet 

Minimum Maximum 

LOCATION OF NO. 3 RING AND GROMMETS 

No. 2 

Ring 

Minimum Maximum 

LOCATION OF NO. 3 AND NO. 2 RING

No. 3 

Ring 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

Change 2 0011 00-4 

4. Look at the rear of the riser and with the weight (min 20-lbs) of the parachute rig (minus main 

parachute) suspended by the riser to be inspected, grasp the release cable housing by the swaged 

terminal end fitting with the small grommet in it and slide the end fitting to one edge (either edge) of 

the riser. You must NOT be able to move the fitting (do not use excessive force to move the fitting) 

completely off the edge of the riser (as depicted in the right illustration below), thus ensuring the 

fabric-locking loop is not too long. The length of the fabric locking loop should range as shown below. 

5. Periodic Maintenance Procedures. The three-ring release system is a durable item; however; it 

requires periodic maintenance and inspection to ensure proper operation. The 3-ring release will be 

carefully inspected and cycled (operated) on a regular basis. The procedures below will be 

completed every 120-days. This is especially important if the parachute system has not been used 

for 120-days or more (such as during the winter). Immediate inspection is required if the system has 

been subjected to abuse such as drug across the ground, a water landing, or exposure to a lot of dust 

or sand. Perform inspection as follows: 

Cutaway 

Cable

Swaged 

Terminal 

End Fitting 

Off The 

Riser 

Swaged 

Terminal 

End Fitting 

Cutaway 

Cable 

Locking 

Loop 

Locking 

Loop Too 

Long 

Cutaway 

Cable 

Housing 

Cutaway 

Cable 

Housing

WEIGHT OF 

PACKED/HARNESS 

AND (PACKED) 

RESERVE ASSEMBLY 

WEIGHT OF 

PACKED/HARNESS 

AND (PACKED) 

RESERVE ASSEMBLY 

CORRECT INCORRECT 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

 0011 00-5 Change 2 

a. Every 120 days operate the 3-ring release assembly on the ground by removing the cutaway 

handle. Extract the release cable completely from the housing and disconnect the risers. 

b. While the system is disassembled, closely inspect it for wear. Check the white locking loops (the 

ones that pass over the smallest ring and through the grommet) to be sure they are not frayed. 

Do not mix the risers with different material locking loops, i.e. nylon cord and nylon fabric locking 

loops. The locking loop may discolor (black) where it contacts the metal ring or grommets. This 

is permissible. 

c. Check the hook and pile fastener tape on the release handle and main lift web to ensure that it 

adequately holds the handle. 

d. Check the stitching, including that which holds the base ring to the main lift web and the hand 

tacking that prevents the release housing from sliding through the keeper (this keeper is located a 

few inches above the padded release handle). 

e. Take each riser and vigorously twist and flex the webbing where it passes through each ring. The 

idea is to remove any set or deformation in the webbing. Failure to do this might make the 

release hesitate when activated in response to a low drag malfunction such as a streamer. 

f. Check the inside of the release housing for gravel or other obstructions. Use cable to do this. 

Inspect the housing for dents or other damage. 

CAUTION 

Never lubricate the release cable with oil. Moisture only increases 

the probability of foreign material adhering to the release cable. 

CAUTION 

Ensure Clearslip #2TM silicone lubricant does not come in contact 

with any textile surface of the MC-4 RAPPS. 

g. Wipe the release cable with a clean, dry rag several times until all residue is removed. Ensure 

cable is clean. Apply a small amount of Clearslip #2TM silicone lubricant to another clean dry rag 

and wipe each cable several times. Allow a few moments for evaporation. 

h. Inspect the housing for dirt, dents, and debris. Any dents are cause for immediate grounding of 

the system until a replacement housing is installed. 

i. After repeated use, dents will appear in the cadmium plating. Rotate the rings periodically to 

reduce the localized plating damage. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

Change 2 0011 00-6 

WARNING 

Do not allow the release assembly to become wet in cold weather. 

It may freeze, stiffen the webbing, and fail in use causing death or 

serious injury. 

j. Inspect each release housing and assembly. Check release assembly for rust. Any rust is cause 

for immediate grounding of the system until the hardware is replaced. 

k. Inspect all grommets. Grommets must not be bent, dented, loose or burred. Replace the riser if 

frayed webbing begins to show around the large No. 2 grommet. 

l. Properly reassemble the system ensuring it is done IAW this technical manual. To ensure the 

risers are not reversed, double-check them. 

SLACK CHECKER INSPECTION (AR2 Reserve Mounted ONLY)

After every jump and repack of the reserve parachute, the parachute rigger is to inspect cable extension 

length with the slack checker as follows: 

1. The MC-4 must have an AR2 and power cable assembly correctly installed and routed to the reserve 

parachute. Ensure that the position of the AR2 in the pocket is the same as when worn by a jumper. 

2. Open top flap of parachute to expose the reserve ripcord pins. 

3. Slide the metal head of the slack checker under the power cable from the right side so the cable slips 

into the curved groove between the metal head and plastic handle. Engage the two contact points on 

the hooked end of the slack checker with the mouth of the end fitting of the power cable housing. The 

slack checker should be held flat against the parachute pack. The two contact points must be 

engaged at all times to ensure proper inspection. (Refer to the illustration below). 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

 0011 00-7 Change 2 

4. Grasp the slack checker with the right hand, palm down, and with the thumb pressed into the curved 

recess. Grasp the swaged section of the ripcord pin with left hand. Simultaneously rotate the slack 

checker and ripcord pin in the directions shown by the arrows. Hold the ripcord pin with the left hand 

in a fixed position when it becomes horizontally aligned. (Refer to the illustration below.) 

5. Apply force as necessary to rotate the slack checker until all of the slack in the power cable has been 

taken up. Ensure that the pin does not slip out of the closing loop of the parachute. Note the position 

of the swaged end of the power cable eye with respect to the index surface on the slack checker. 

6. If the power cable assembly is correctly routed and installed, and has not been damaged, the end of 

the eye should not extend past the index surface. (Refer to the illustration below.) 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

Change 2 0011 00-8 

WARNING 

Any amount of extension past the index surface may mean the 

ripcord pins will not be pulled, which may result in death of 

parachutist. 

7. If the end of the eye does extend past the index surface, then something is wrong with the cable 

routing, or the power housing (conduit) may be damaged. The power cable assembly should be 

removed from service immediately. (Refer to the illustration below.) 

8. The rigger shall record satisfactory completion of inspection with the slack checker in the reserve 

parachute log record book (DA Form 3912). The slack checker test will be annotated in the JUMP, 

INSPECTION AND REPACK DATA section, in the area marked BAG NUMBER as follows: “SC Test 

PASS/FAIL”. 

IN-STORAGE INSPECTION 

An in-storage inspection is a physical check conducted on a random sample of air delivery equipment that 

is located in storage. The purpose of the inspection is to ensure that the equipment is ready for issue, 

that the item is properly identified and segregated from other types of equipment, that no damage or 

deterioration of equipment has been incurred, and that all modifications or similar action requirements 

have been completed. 

The inspection shall also concern the methods and procedures applied to the storage of air delivery items, the 

adequacy of storage facilities, efforts of pest and rodent control, and protection against unfavorable climatic 

conditions. Air delivery equipment that is in storage will be inspected at least semiannually and at more frequent 

intervals if prescribed by the local parachute maintenance officer. The frequency of inspection may vary according 

to the type of storage facilities and local climatic conditions. Only parachute rigger personnel designated by the 

local parachute maintenance officer will conduct in-storage inspections. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

 0011 00-9 Change 2 

EQUIPMENT DISPOSITION 

Air delivery equipment may be rendered unserviceable by either normal fair wear or by aging, and will be 

subsequently be repaired, modified, or condemned, as appropriate. Equipment that is uneconomically 

repairable (outdated) will be condemned. Disposition of air delivery equipment that is condemned, 

unserviceable, or for which the serviceability is questionable, will be accomplished using the following 

procedures, as applicable: 

1. Item requiring repair or modification. An air delivery item that requires repair or modification will 

be tagged in accordance with DA PAM 738-751. Subsequent work on the item will be performed 

at the maintenance level specified for the maintenance function in the applicable supporting 

technical publication. 

2. Parachutes with exhausted age or service life. Any parachute component or air delivery 

equipment whose age or service life has expired as specified in TB 43-0002-43 will be removed 

from service, condemned and tagged as prescribed by DA PAM 738-751. 

3. Disposition of condemned air deliver equipment. Condemned equipment, other than fatality 

parachutes, will be removed from service and disposed of in accordance with current directives 

listed in this WP. 

4. Rejected equipment. Equipment which, prior to use, is deemed unserviceable for use will be 

reported in an EIR in accordance with DA PAM 750-8, as authorized by AR 750-1. Each 

applicable item that is defective will be held and safeguarded pending receipt of disposition 

instructions from the National Maintenance Point (NMP). In all instances, EIR exhibit material will 

be handled as prescribed in DA PAM 750-8. If the quality or the serviceability of an item is 

questionable, clarification and assistance may be obtained by contacting Commander, U.S. Army 

Tank-automotive & Armament Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LC-R, Kansas Street, Natick, MA 

01760-5052. 

5. Equipment of doubtful serviceability. Equipment that has had previous use and has not exceeded 

normal fair wear or aging criteria, but of which further serviceability is doubtful, will be tagged as 

prescribed in DA PAM 738-751. In addition, the equipment will be reported in an EIR, in 

accordance with DA PAM 750-8 and AR 750-1. The item(s) in question will be held as EIR exhibit 

material as outlined in DA PAM 750-8 pending receipt of disposition instructions from the NMP. A 

maintenance activity holding EIR exhibit material will not tamper with the applicable item(s) or 

make any attempt to ascertain cause factors. Unnecessary handling of EIR exhibit material may 

disturb or alter peculiar aspects of the affected item(s) that might affect the judgment of 

engineering personnel who have the responsibility for final evaluation of EIR actions. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0011 00 

Change 2 0011 00-10 

6. Equipment immersed in salt-water. Any air delivery item constructed from cotton material that 

has been immersed in salt-water will be condemned. Cotton thread used for tacking and sewing 

on nylon parachute packs that have been immersed in salt-water will only be replaced when there 

is visible evidence or deterioration such as extreme discoloration or indications of broken thread. 

Any air delivery equipment constructed of nylon or rayon material that has been immersed in saltwater for a period less than 24-hours, but which cannot be rinsed within 48-hours after recovery 

will also be condemned, unless the following actions are performed. Upon removal from the salt 

water, the parachute is placed in a single heavy-duty plastic trash bag, the top of the bag secured 

closed and kept in a wet state until a rinse can be performed following normal rinse procedures. 

The bag must be doubled when outside temperatures exceed 85 degrees F. The bags must be 

inspected after transport and storage to ensure the bag did not get torn and the assembly was 

allowed to dry. Parachutes recovered using this method must be rinsed NLT than seven (7) days 

after the salt-water immersion or be condemned. However, if the cited time limitations can be 

met, then immediately upon recovery, suspend or elevate the recovered equipment in a shaded 

area and allow the item(s) to drain for at least 5-minutes. Do not attempt to wring the equipment 

fabric or the suspension lines. Within 48-hours after recovery, under the supervision of a 

qualified parachute rigger (92R), rinse the recovered equipment as indicated in WP 0012 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0012 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SALT/FRESH-WATER CONTAMINATION TEST 

0012 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Inspect 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition 

Laid out on packing table or other suitable area.

Personnel Required 

92R(10) Parachute Rigger

INSPECT

Look for a white crystalline residue. If evidence of salt-water/fresh-water contamination is found, refer to 

the procedures detailed below: 

Rinsing Parachute Assembly Immersed in Salt-Water. If the parachute, or any of its components, has 

been immersed in salt water in excess of 24-hours it will be condemned. Additionally, if the parachute, or 

any of its components, has been immersed in salt-water for a period less than 24-hours, but which cannot 

be rinsed within 48-hours after recovery, it will also be condemned, unless the following actions are 

performed. Upon removal from the salt-water, the parachute is placed in a single heavy-duty plastic trash 

bag, the top of the bag secured closed and kept in a wet state until a rinse can be performed following 

normal rinse procedures. The bag must be doubled when outside temperatures exceed 85 degrees F. 

The bags must be inspected after transport and storage to ensure the bag did not get torn and the 

assembly was allowed to dry. Parachutes recovered using this method must be rinsed NLT than seven 

(7) days after the salt-water immersion or be condemned. However, if the cited time limitations can be 

met, then immediately upon recover, suspend or elevate the parachute assembly in a shaded area and 

allow it to drain for at least 5-minutes. Do not attempt to wring the fabric or the suspension lines. Within 

48-hours after recover, under the supervision of a qualified parachute rigger (92R), rinse the recovered 

parachute assembly as follows: 

1. Place the parachute assembly in a large watertight container filled with a suitable amount of fresh, 

clean water to cover the assembly. 

CAUTION 

Equipment made of cotton fabric immersed in salt water is to be 

condemned. Refer to WP 0011 00, INSPECTION, for equipment 

disposition. 

NOTE

If the salt-water-soaked parachute assembly is too large to be 

placed into a rinsing container, then the rinsing process will be 

affected by applying fresh, clean water to the assembly using a 

hose.

2. Agitate the container contents by hand for 5-minutes. 

3. Remove the parachute assembly from the container and suspend or elevate it in a shaded area, 

allowing a 5-minute drainage period. Do not attempt to wring the fabric or the suspension lines. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0012 00 

0012 00-2 

4. Repeat the procedures in steps 1. through 3., above, twice, using fresh, clean water for each rinse. 

5. After the third rinse, allow the parachute assembly to drain thoroughly. Upon completion of draining, 

dry the assembly in accordance with the Drying Fabric Items procedures detailed below. 

6. When dried, perform a technical/rigger-type inspection of the parachute assembly. Corroded metal 

components, or corrosion-stained fabrics or suspension lines, will be either repaired or replaced as 

prescribed by the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) in WP 0063 00. 

7. Record any repair, immersion, and rinsing in the parachute log record as shown in WP 0004 00. 

Rinsing Parachute Assembly Immersed in Fresh-Water. Any parachute, or its components, that has 

been immersed in a fresh water lake, river, or stream will not require rinsing unless it has been 

ascertained that the water is dirty, oily, or otherwise contaminated. Procedures for handling a fresh water 

immersed parachute are as follows: 

1. Contaminated fresh-water. If the parachute, or its components, has been immersed in contaminated 

fresh water, rinse and dry (see Rinsing Parachute Assembly Immersed in Salt-Water, above), and, if 

applicable, repair. 

2. Uncontaminated fresh-water. If the parachute, or its components, has been immersed in 

uncontaminated fresh water, it will be cleaned and dried as outlined in Cleaning Fabric Items With a 

Solution of Hand Dishwashing Compound, Drying Fabric Items, and Cleaning Metal Items, in the 

detailed paragraphs above and below. Minor discoloration of fabric items, resulting from immersion in 

uncontaminated fresh water, may occur. 

NOTE

Fabric items will not be dried in direct sunlight or by laying an item 

on the ground. 

Drying Fabric Items. Dry fabric items as follows: 

1. Suspend or elevate the item in a well-ventilated room or in a heated drying room. 

2. Using electric circulating fans may reduce drying time. 

3. When heat is used, the heat temperature shall not exceed 160 degrees Fahrenheit (71 degrees 

Celsius). The preferred temperature is 140 degrees Fahrenheit (60 degrees Celsius). 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

PACKING PROCEDURES – RESERVE PARACHUTE 

 0013 00-1 Change 2 

This Task Covers: 

• Pack-In-Process Inspection 

• Layout and Line Check 

• Flaking Canopy 

• Folding Canopy 

• Stowing Canopy and Suspension Lines 

• Closing Container 

• Stoke Simulator Test 

• Attachment of the AR2 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools 

Pins, Temporary Locking (Item 31, WP 0063 00) 

Stroke Simulator (Item 41, WP 0063 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Lay reserve canopy and suspension lines out to their 

full length in packing area. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

92R (20) Parachute Rigger

Materials/Parts 

Band, Rubber Retainer (Item 4, WP 0076 00) 

Cord, Nylon, Type III (Item 13, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Cotton, 24/4 (Item 40, WP 0076 00)

WARNING 

Failure to detect areas of damage during packing, or failure to 

comply with the following procedures, may result in a malfunction of 

the parachute and injury or loss of life to personnel. 

WARNING 

The reserve parachute-closing loop will be replaced at each reserve 

parachute repack cycle (120-days). Failure to comply may result in 

a malfunction of the parachute and injury, or loss of life, to 

personnel. 

NOTE 

The parachute will be packed every 120-days. 

NOTE 

The power cable length of travel must be checked each time a 

power cable is installed on the harness/container, at reserve 

parachute re-pack, when an AR2 has actuated during a jump, and 

whenever the parachute system has been subjected to unusual 

stress during landing. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-2 

NOTE 

Inspect reserve parachute deployment bag, bridle, pilot parachute, 

and safety stow loop for damage. 

NOTE 

Remove reserve parachute ripcord handle and clean both the 

ripcord handle and ripcord handle pocket. Re-install reserve 

parachute ripcord handle. 

PACK-IN PROCESS INSPECTION 

A rigger supervisor other than the packer during the applicable packing process shall conduct the pack-inprocess inspection. This inspection is required to ensure that only authorized packing procedures are 

used. The prescribed intervals to conduct the pack-in-process inspection are as follows: 

1. Proper Layout 

a. Proper installation and serviceability of AR2 power cable 

b. Line Check 

c. Canopy flaking completed 

2. Slider Up 

a. Canopy S-folding complete 

b. Deployment brakes set and tacked 

c. Tail folding complete 

d. Slider pulled up and positioned 

3. Canopy Folding Complete – Nose Fold 

4. Suspension Lines Stowed 

a. Locking stows complete 

b. Suspension lines stowed 

5. Bridle Needle Fold Completed 

6. Container Side Flaps Closed 

a. Bottom 

b. Right 

c. Left 

7. Packing Completed 

a. Ripcord routed through static line pull ring and guide ring 

b. Top flap closed 

c. All Packing aids removed 

8. Automatic Opening Device Installed 

a. Slack checker test complete (AR2) 

b. Stroke simulator test complete (AR2) 

c. Log record book filled out 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-3 Change 2 

LAYOUT AND LINE CHECK 

Perform layout and line check as follows: 

1. Insert reserve ripcord cable through reserve ripcord housing. Insert reserve ripcord grip into ripcord 

grip pocket. If removed, clean and lubricate single point release cable IAW WP 0011 00. Insert 

single point release cable through cable housings. Mate hook tape on grip with pile tape on harness. 

Attach reserve static line to container with reserve static line pull ring facing top of container. Pass 

reserve ripcord cable through reserve static line pull ring and then through reserve static line guide 

ring. 

 

2. Lay out parachute on a clean dry surface with canopy on its left side. Leading edge (nose) will be to 

the right when viewed from riser end. Stretch lines full length with a helper at riser end to check 

continuity and hold lines taut. 

3. Grasp high points of each cell and, with high points in the left hand, flip canopy toward trailing edge. 

Canopy shall lie flat with trailing edge lines on left side when viewed from riser end. 

Leading Edge 

Lines 

Reserve Static 

Line Pull Ring 

Reserve 

Ripcord 

Reserve Static Line 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-4 

4. Remove any twists, turns, and tangles between suspension line groups. 

5. Raise lines 8A and 8B and walk them down (ensuring there are no twists) to see if line 8A runs free 

from canopy to outside of right front riser connector link. Line 1A should run free to outside of left 

front riser connector link. 

6. Raise lines 8C and 8D and walk them down (ensuring there are no twists) to see if line 8C runs free 

from canopy to outside of right rear connector link. Line 1C should run free to outside of left rear 

connector link. 

Line 8B 

Line 8A 

Line 8D Line 8C 

Control Lines 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-5 Change 2 

7. Raise control lines and walk them down (ensuring there are no twists) to ensure they run free from 

the A, B, C, and D lines. 

8. Ensure control lines run free through proper slider grommets, and then through proper control line 

guide ring. 

Control Lines 

D Lines 

C Lines 

A and B Lines 

Control 

Line 

Guide 

Ring 

Slider 

Control Grommet

Line
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-6 

FLAKING CANOPY 

Flake canopy as follows: 

1. Grasping tops of cells at high points, throw canopy toward risers. 

2. Starting with high points on cell 1, pull out seam and smooth cell from leading edge to trailing edge. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-7 Change 2 

3. Continue to flake canopy by pulling out seams one by one on each remaining cell. Smooth each cell 

until all cells are flaked and all line groups are clearly separated and tight. 

4. Rigger check number 1. 

FOLDING CANOPY 

Fold canopy as follows: 

1. Fold leading edge over canopy so cell openings are even with A lines. Keep lines taut. 

Control 

Lines 

D Lines B Lines A Lines 

Cell Openings 

A Lines 

C Lines
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-8 

2. Grasp the high point of cell 1 and extend outward, smoothing out cell. 

3. Continue to grasp high point of each cell and extend outward, smoothing out each cell and aligning all 

seven cell openings. 

4. Make a fold in line with the A line group and fold canopy nose under. 

High 

Point

Cell 1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-9 Change 2 

5. Holding all high points together directly in line with the B line group, make an S-fold so that the B line 

group is on top of the A line group. Ensure high points are kept taut. 

6. Holding all the high points together directly in line with the C line group, make an S-fold so that the C 

line group is on top of the A and B line groups. Ensure high points are kept taut. 

A and B Lines 

Control 

Lines 

A, B, and 

C Lines 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-10 

7. Holding all of the high points together directly in line with the D line group, make an S-fold so that the 

D line group is on top of the A, B, and C line groups. Ensure high points are kept taut. 

8. Clear the stabilizers by pulling them to the outside. Make sure that there are no lines wrapped 

around them. There are three stabilizer panels on each side. 

Control 

Lines 

Stabilizer 

Panels 

A, B, C, and D 

Line Groups
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-11 Change 2 

9. Set deployment breaks by opening excess line keeper on each rear riser and then pulling down on 

each toggle until each finger-trapped loop is through each control line guide ring. 

10. Insert stiffened top of each control line toggle through 1-inch loop Safety tack top center of control 

toggle to center of riser with one turn double of 24/4 cotton thread, encircling the control line. Tie off 

each tacking with a surgeon’s knot and a locking knot. Trim ends to 1⁄4-inch. Ensure each loop with a 

stiffened end of toggle is seated firmly against ring on riser. 

Control 

Line 

Loop 

Ring 

Excess 

Line 

Keepers 

Loop 

Tacking 

Control 

Toggle 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-12 

11. Using an S-fold, neatly stow excess line in excess line keeper alongside control line guide ring. 

Ensure that S-fold loops do not extend above or below excess line keeper. Ensure that excess line is 

to right (pile) side of keeper. 

12. Close excess line keepers. 

Excess 

Line

Excess 

Line 

Excess 

Line 

Keepers 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-13 Change 2 

13. Grasp uppermost control line and pull taut. Position seam on folded canopy so control line is on top 

of line groups A, B, C, and D. 

14. Continue to flake and smooth remaining tail seams. Lines should remain taut throughout the 

procedure. 

A, B, C, and D, 

Line Groups

Uppermost 

Control Line

Tip of Stabilizer 

Panel 

Control 

Lines 

A, B, C, and D, 

Line Groups 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-14 

15. When canopy is flaked, all control lines should be on top of line groups A, B, C, and D. Ensure that 

bottom tail seam remains even with control lines. 

16. Grasping the top tail fold, count and fold back seven tail folds towards trail edge of canopy. Tail of 

canopy should now be on top of folded canopy with seven folds on left and seven folds on right. 

Control lines should remain taut and in the center. 

Tail Folding 

Completed 

Bottom 

Tail Seam 

Control 

Lines and 

A, B, C, and 

D Lines 

Tail Folds 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-15 Change 2 

NOTE 

Count all lines. Ensure you have 10 lines for the tail, 8 A and B 

lines and 8 C and D lines. 

17. Kneel on canopy at suspension line end. Spread center of tail one full section left and right of center 

of tail. 

18. Wrap center tail panel around canopy, keeping control lines in center. Fold center tail panel around 

canopy until it is the width of deployment bag. Smooth out trapped air until canopy lies flat. 

Tape 

Control 

Lines 

Deployment Bag 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-16 

19. Place rear riser line groups to the outside of front riser line groups. Lay slider down flat between the 

line groups, with reinforcement tapes facing up. Each line group from the canopy enters slider 

grommet from the top and exits out underneath slider. 

20. Grasp slider by top center, ensuring that the reinforcement tapes appear on top side toward canopy. 

Bring slider up to the bottom of the canopy, forming four distinct line groups. Ensure free movement 

along suspension lines. 

21. Rigger check number 2. 

22. Fold left stabilizer panels, then right stabilizer panels on slider at 45-degree angles. 

Slider 

Four Distinct 

Line Groups 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-17 Change 2 

23. Place hand on canopy approximately 10-inches from suspension lines. Grasp canopy at suspension 

lines in preparation for making the first fold. 

24. S-fold bottom of canopy approximately 10-inches so that slider grommets are on top of canopy. 

Ensure all suspension lines remain taut. 

 10-IN. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-18 

25. Pull center of tail section up and over S-fold so that it is positioned over slider and stabilizers. Dress 

the canopy. 

26. Place left hand one deployment bag length up from base of canopy. Grasp upper portion with the 

right hand. Fold upper canopy over lower canopy. 

Deployment 

Bag 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-19 Change 2 

27. Locate the seven high points of the nose. Ensure each cell opening is completely exposed. Place 

three cell openings on each side with center cell split. 

28. Rigger check number 3. 

29. Fold the top portion of canopy over approximately 10-inches. This fold should be even with base of 

canopy. 

Base of Canopy Pull Out and 

Smooth Cell 

Openings 

10-IN. 

Top 

Portion

Base of 

Canopy 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-20 

30. Roll the top fold toward nose of canopy an additional 10-inches. Position deployment bag over one 

corner. 

31. Insert folded canopy into deployment bag. Work canopy into corners and fill outside edges of bag. 

Insert deployment bag bridle through left elastic loop. 

Canopy Nose 

10-IN. 

Fold 

Deployment 

Bag Bridle 

Elastic 

Loop 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-21 Change 2 

STOW CANOPY AND SUSPENSION LINES 

Stow canopy and suspension lines as follows: 

NOTE 

Ensure slider grommets are not exposed past the tail of the base of 

the fold. 

1. Make first locking stow on the right by pulling elastic loop through right grommet and locking in place 

with first suspension line stow. Stow will not protrude more than 1 3⁄4-inch through elastic loop. 

NOTE 

The sewn portion of the elastic stow loop will not be exposed. 

First Stow 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-22 

2. Make second locking stow on the left and remove bridle. Stow will not protrude more than 1 3⁄4-inch 

through elastic loop. 

3. Rotate deployment bag up and open suspension line retaining pocket. 

Second Stow 

Suspension Line 

Retaining Pocket 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-23 Change 2 

4. S-fold suspension lines into pocket from bottom to top, taking care not to put twists into the lines. 

5. Mate hook and pile tape on bag pocket with lines exiting center. Leave approximately 8-inches 

between bag and risers. 

S-Fold 

Bottom to Top 

8-Inches 

(Approximate) Lines Exit 

Center of Bag 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-24 

6. Rigger check number 4. 

CLOSING CONTAINER 

Close Container as follows: 

WARNING 

The reserve parachute-closing loop will be replaced at each reserve 

parachute repack cycle (120-days). Failure to comply may result in 

a malfunction of the parachute and injury, or loss of life, to 

personnel. 

1. Rotate deployment bag up and over main parachute compartment. Line stowage pocket will face up. 

Position risers in reserve container. Insert pull-up cords through ends of reserve closing loop and 

elastic locking loop. Measure length of elastic locking loop from washer to end of loop. Measurement 

must be no longer than 1-inch. 

1-IN. 

Pull-Up 

Cords 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-25 Change 2 

2. Rotate deployment bag into reserve compartment. Line stowage pocket will face down and bridle line 

will exit top of container. Suspension line locking stow faces toward main parachute compartment. 

3. Route pull-up cord with closing loop through inside grommet on bridle line. Route pull-up cord with 

elastic loop through outside grommet on bridle line. 

Locking Stow 

Bridle Line 

Main Parachute 

Compartment 

Inside 

Grommet 

Outside 

Grommet 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-26 

4. Prepare to form a needle fold in bridle line by first folding bridle back over itself approximately 4-

inches above bag. 

5. Continue to make needle fold by folding first 4-inch fold at a 45-degree angle. 

45-Degree 

Angle 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-27 Change 2 

6. Fold previous 45-degree angle fold in half. 

7. Insert needle fold through elastic locking loop with aid of pull-up cord. Fold will not extend no more 

than 1-inch through loop. Remove pull-up cord. 

Needle Fold 

No More 

Than 1-IN.
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-28 

8. Rigger check number 5. 

9. S-fold bridle line on top of deployment bag. 

10. Center pilot chute on S-folds and then route pull-up cords through lower pilot chute grommet tabs. 

Insert properly flagged temporary locking pins. 

Bridle Line 

Lower Grommet Tab 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-29 Change 2 

11. Route pull-up cords through upper pilot chute grommet tabs. Compress pilot chute, ensuring that 

canopy fabric is clear of spring, grommets and closing loops. Canopy fabric will be distributed to left 

and right sides of pilot chute. Pull closing loops up through tabs and insert temporary locking pins. 

12. Route pull-up cord through grommet in bottom flap. Pull up closing loop and reinsert temporary 

locking pin. 

Temporary 

Locking Pins 

Temporary Locking Pin 

Pull-Up 

Cord 

Bottom Flap 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-30 

13. Route pull-up cords through grommets in right side flap. Pull closing loops and reinsert temporary 

locking pins. 

14. Route pull-up cords through grommets in left side flap. Pull up closing loops and reinsert temporary 

locking pins. 

15. Rigger check number 6. 

Right Side Flap 

Left Side Flap 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-31 Change 2 

16. Ensure reserve ripcord is through ripcord housing and insert ripcord grip in ripcord pocket. Insert 

reserve ripcord cable through reserve static line pull ring, then through reserve static line guide ring. 

Mate static line and container hook and pile tapes. 

17. Route pull-up cords through grommets in top flap, pull up closing loops, and reinsert temporary 

locking pins. 

18. Pull up top pull-up cord, remove temporary locking pin, and inset top ripcord pin into closing loop. 

Top Flat 

Reserve Static 

Line Guide Ring 

Reserve 

Static 

Line Pull 

Ring 

Reserve Static 

Line 

Reserve 

Ripcord 

Cable 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-32 

19. Pull up bottom pull up cord, remove temporary locking pin, and insert bottom ripcord pin into closing 

loop. 

20. For reserve mounted AR2s, pull up top pull up cord and remove locking pin. Thread eye of power 

cable over top pin of ripcord. Insert top ripcord pin into closing loop (detail A). Axis of ripcord pin will 

follow the angled hole in the eye of the power cable (detail B). Center straight portion of ripcord pins 

in closing loops and ensure that shoulders of pins remain outside of grommets. 

21. Conduct a Slack Checker Inspection Test as indicated in WP 0011 00. 

NOTE 

The following ripcord pull tests are performed on all MC-4 systems 

on a one-time only basis. 

22. Place parachute in test fixture or anthropometrical device (torso) simulating the 5-to-95 percentile 

person or live subject. The device shall hold parachute securely in a position with the mouth of the 

ripcord pocket facing down (along the vertical axis). 

DETAIL A DETAIL B

Power 

Cable Eye 

Ripcord 

Pin 

Power 

Cable Eye 

Ripcord 

Pin 

Pull-Up 

Cord 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-33 Change 2 

23. Rotate harness/container so that open end of ripcord housing faces down with ripcord cable in a 

vertical position. 

24. Secure ripcord handle by hand to prevent ripcord pin withdrawal when weight is applied. 

25. A 20-pound weight attached to the center of the ripcord grip (care shall be exercised not to impose an 

impact load) shall readily withdraw ripcord grip from pocket. 

26. When ripcord grip has been removed from pocket, carefully remove the 20-pound weight. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-34 

NOTE 

The following ripcord pull test and stroke simulator test are 

performed on all MC-4 systems each time the reserve parachute is 

packed. 

27. Remove the ripcord from the ripcord grip pocket. 

28. Attach a 27-pound weight to ripcord grip. Slowly remove your hand. The weight shall readily activate 

the parachute by withdrawing the ripcord pins from locking loops. 

NOTE 

It is not necessary to start the pack process over again if the same 

initial packer is conducting the Ripcord Pull Tests. If a different 

Parachute Rigger has taken over any of the tasks associated with 

the Ripcord Pull Tests, then a complete re-pack of the reserve 

parachute is required. 

NOTE 

Re-closing the container after the ripcord pull test does not 

constitute a repack toward the normal repack cycle (120-days). 

Repack and replace the reserve closing loop at the specified repack 

interval. 

29. Close the container IAW the procedures detailed above. Reinsert the ripcord pin(s) threading top pin 

through eye of power cable (detail A above). 

STROKE SIMULATOR TEST (Reserve Mounted AR2) 

Conduct a Stroke Simulator Test as follows: 

NOTE 

The Stroke Simulator Test (power cable length of travel) will be 

performed each time a power cable is installed on the 

harness/container, each time the reserve parachute is packed, and 

when the AR2 has actuated during a jump. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-35 Change 2 

WARNING 

The Stroke Simulator must be able to pull both reserve ripcord pins 

positively and completely to ensure adequate travel of the AR2 

power cable. Inadequate travel of the AR2 power cable may cause 

the parachute to not deploy, resulting in serious injury or death of 

the parachutist. 

NOTE 

If ripcord pins fail to pull completely, check the length of the reserve 

closing loop, the condition of the backing plate, power cable housing 

and routing of power cable assembly. 

1. Test routing and installation of the power cable assembly in the parachute harness/container while 

the harness/container is being worn in the normal fashion. 

2. Connect stroke simulator to power cable assembly in place of the AR2. 

3. Firmly hold stroke simulator adjacent to the AR2 pocket in a vertical orientation (i.e. stroke simulator 

plunger pointing down). 

4. With assistance from another individual, carefully attach a 33-pound weight to the stroke simulator 

plunger and very slowly remove your hand from under the weight to allow the weight to be slowly 

transferred to the stroke simulator. 

5. The weight must completely withdraw the ripcord pins within the available stroke. 

6. Maintain control of the reserve pilot chute in an effort to prevent the entire contents of the reserve 

parachute from falling to the floor. 

7. If the 33-pound weight hesitates or fails to pull the ripcord pins, remove and inspect the entire power 

cable assembly IAW this technical manual, WP 0047 00 and TM 10-1670-305-23&P, WP 0019 00. If 

unserviceable, replace with a new item from stock, then repeat Slack Checker Test and Stroke 

Simulator Test above. If the system fails a second time, it must be tagged and removed from service 

IAW WP 0011 00. 

8. Detach stroke simulator from power cable. 

NOTE 

It is not necessary to start the pack process over again if the same 

initial packer is conducting the Stroke Simulator Test. If a different 

Parachute Rigger has taken over any of the tasks associated with 

the Stroke Simulator Test, then a complete re-pack of the reserve 

parachute is required. 

NOTE 

Re-closing the container after the stroke simulator test does not 

constitute a repack toward the normal repack cycle (120-days). 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-36 

Repack and replace the reserve closing loop at the specified repack 

interval. 

NOTE 

Parachute systems that do not pass the inspection will be removed 

from service. 

9. Close the container IAW the CLOSING CONTAINER procedure above. Reinsert the ripcord pin(s) 

threading top pin through eye of power cable (detail A above). 

10. At the completion of stroke simulator test, remove pull-up cords by routing underneath ripcord pins. 

NOTE 

Due to the continuous entries into the Parachute Log Record Book, 

authorization is granted to locally produce an internal tracking 

document that captures these required entries. If no such document 

exists, entries must be made into the Parachute Log Record Book. 

11. After testing has been completed and the specified requirements are met, remove Parachute Log 

Record from log record pocket on underside of ripcord pin protector flap and make required entries. 

Reinsert log record into log record pocket. Close ripcord pin protector flap. Dress the container. 

12. Rigger check number 7. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

0013 00-37 Change 2 

ATTACHMENT OF THE AR2 (Reserve Mounted AR2) 

Attach the AR2 as follows: 

WARNING 

When attaching the power cable assembly to the AR2, always verify 

proper engagement of ball end of power cable with piston rod of 

AR2 by looking through transparent plastic cable seal retainer. 

Cable seal retainer and power cable seal must be present to ensure 

correct seating of power cable ball. If ball is not engaged with piston 

rod or if cable seal retainer is missing, actuation of AR2 will fail to 

pull ripcord pins, which may result in death of parachutist. 

CAUTION 

Finger tighten the power-housing retainer. Do not use pliers or 

other tools that will over tighten power-housing retainer. 

CAUTION 

Ensure container is handled with care when transporting container 

with the AR2 installed. Failure to do so may result in damage to 

equipment. 

NOTE 

Make sure the AR2 is cocked, and the JUMP/OFF switch is set to 

OFF. 

NOTE 

Prior to installing the AR2 in the ripcord release pocket, remove 

the storage cable and piston rod cap, if present. Save these 

components for future use. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

Change 2 0013 00-38 

1. Ensure that the AR2 JUMP/OFF switch is OFF. 

OFF

2. Verify that the ball of the power cable is correctly engaged with the piston rod. 

JUMP/OFF 

Switch 

Power 

Cable Ball 

Piston Rod 

Power Cable 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0013 00 

 0013 00-39/(40 Blank) Change 2 

3. Attach power housing retainer to the AR2 finger tight. Verify that the ball of the power cable is 

correctly engaged with the piston rod by looking through transparent cable seal retainer. 

4. Ensure that the cable seal retainer is present. 

5. Install the AR2 in the ripcord release pocket and close flap. 

6. Rigger check number 8. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

PACKING PROCEDURES – MAIN PARACHUTE 

 0014 00-1 Change 2 

THIS TASK COVERS

• Pack-In-Process Inspection 

• Attaching Risers to Harness 

• Layout and Line Check 

• Flaking Canopy 

• Folding Canopy 

• Setting Deployment Brakes 

• Stowing Canopy in Deployment Bag 

• Stowing Suspension Lines 

• Closing Container 

• Installing Automatic Opening Device 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools 

Pins, Temporary Locking (Item 31, WP 006300) 

Stroke Simulator (Item 41, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Band, Rubber Retainer (Item 4, WP 0076 00) 

Cord, Nylon, Type III (Item 13, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Cotton, Size 24/4 (Item 40, WP 0076 00)

Equipment Condition 

Lay canopy and suspension lines out to 

their full length in packing area. Position 

container at risers with main and reserve 

compartments up and reserve compartment 

facing toward canopy and risers. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

92R (20) Parachute Rigger

WARNING 

Failure to detect areas of damage during packing, or failure to 

comply with the following procedure, may result in a malfunction of 

the parachute and injury or loss of life to personnel. 

NOTE 

The parachute will be packed every 120-days. 

NOTE 

Inspect main parachute deployment bag, bridle and pilot parachute 

for damage. 

NOTE 

Remove main parachute ripcord handle and clean with a clean, dry, 

lint free cloth. In addition, clean the ripcord handle pocket by 

removing any debris. Re-install main parachute ripcord handle. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-2 

PACK-IN PROCESS INSPECTION 

A rigger supervisor other than the packer during the applicable packing process shall conduct the pack-inprocess inspection. This inspection is required to ensure that only authorized packing procedures are 

used. The prescribed intervals to conduct the pack-in-process inspection are as follows: 

1. Proper Layout 

a. Main canopy release ripcord installed 

b. Risers attached to harness 

c. Line check complete 

d. Canopy flaking complete 

2. Slider Up 

a. Canopy folding complete 

b. Deployment brakes set 

c. Tail folding complete 

d. Slider pulled up and positioned 

3. Four Locking Stows 

a. Canopy stowing complete 

b. Deployment bag locking stows complete 

4. Suspension Lines Stowed 

5. Packing Complete 

a. Container closed (bottom, left, right, top) 

b. All packing aids removed 

c. Log record book filled out 

6. Automatic Opening Device Installed 

ATTACHING RISERS TO HARNESS 

Attach risers to harness as follows: 

1. Insert main ripcord cable through main ripcord housing. Insert main ripcord grip into ripcord grip 

pocket. If removed, clean and lubricate single point release IAW WP 0011 00. Insert single point 

release cable through cable housings. Mate hook tape on grip with pile tape on harness. Attach 

reserve static line to container with reserve static line pull ring facing top of container. Pass reserve 

ripcord cable through reserve static line pull ring and then through reserve static line guide ring. 

Reserve Static 

Line Pull Ring Main Canopy 

Release Ripcord 

Housing 

Main Ripcord Release 

Ripcords

Reserve 

Ripcord 

Ripcord Main 

Release 

Reserve 

Static 

Line 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-3 Change 2 

2. Position right riser on harness above main ripcord and pass large ring on riser through base ring on 

harness. 

3. Pass small riser ring through large riser ring. Position small riser ring over riser grommet. 

Base Ring 

Large Riser 

Ring 

Large Riser 

Ring 

Small Riser Ring 

Positioned Over 

Grommet 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-4 

4. Pass locking loop over small riser ring and down through riser grommet. Ensure riser-locking loop is 

not twisted. Insert locking loop through eye on end of cable housing. 

NOTE 

Ensure riser locking loop is not twisted. 

5. Pass main canopy release cable through locking loop and insert main canopy release cable in riser 

stowage flute. 

Riser Locking 

Loop 

Cable 

Housing 

Eye 

Stowage 

Flute 

Release Cable 

Riser 

Locking 

Loop 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-5 Change 2 

6. Attach left riser to harness in same manner as in step 2. through 5. 

7. Connect reserve static line ring to reserve static line release shackle. 

8. Mate snap on reserve static line release lanyard to riser snap. 

Reserve Static 

Line Release 

Shackle 

Reserve 

Static 

Line 

Snap 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-6 

LAYOUT AND LINE CHECK 

Perform layout and line check as follows: 

1. Lay out parachute on a clean dry surface with canopy on its left side. Leading edge (nose) will be to 

the right when viewed from riser end. Stretch lines full length with a helper at riser end to check 

continuity and hold lines taut. 

2. Grasp high points of each cell and, with high points in the left hand, flip canopy toward trailing edge. 

Canopy shall lie flat with trailing edge lines on left side when viewed from riser end. 

3. Remove any twists, turns, and tangles between suspension line groups. 

4. Raise lines 8A and 8B and walk them down (ensuring there are no twists) to see if line 8A runs free 

from canopy to outside of right front riser connector link. Line 1A should run free to outside of left 

front riser connector link. 

Leading 

Edge 

Lines 

Line 8B 

Line 8A 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-7 Change 2 

5. Raise lines 8C and 8D and walk them down (ensuring there are no twists) to see if line 8C runs free 

from canopy to outside of right rear connector link. Line 1C should run free to outside of left rear 

connector link. 

6. Raise control lines and walk them down (ensuring there are no twists) to ensure they run free from 

the A, B, C, and D lines. 

Line 8D Line 8C 

Control 

Lines 

Control 

Lines

D Lines 

C Lines 

A and B 

Lines 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-8 

7. Ensure control lines pass through correct slider grommets, and then through correct control line guide 

rings. 

FLAKING CANOPY 

Flake canopy as follows: 

1. Grasp tops of cells at high points. Throw canopy toward risers. 

Control 

Line 

Guide 

Ring 

Slider 

Grommet 

Control 

Line 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-9 Change 2 

2. Starting with high points on cell 1, pull out seam and smooth cell from leading edge to trailing edge. 

3. Continue to flake canopy by pulling out seams, one by one, on each remaining cell. Smooth each cell 

until all cells are flaked and all line groups are clearly separated and tight. 

Control 

Lines 

D Lines 

C Lines

A Lines 

B Lines
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-10 

FOLDING CANOPY 

Fold canopy as follows: 

1. Fold leading edge over canopy so cell openings are even with A lines. Keep lines taut. 

2. Grasp the high point of cell 1 and extend outward, smoothing out cell. 

Cell Openings 

A Lines 

High 

Point

Cell 1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-11 Change 2 

3. Continue to grasp high point of each cell and extend outward, smoothing out each cell and aligning all 

cell openings. 

4. Rigger check number 1. 

5. Grasp all cells at nose of canopy and form a fold line two-thirds of the way back between A and B 

lines. Keep lines taut. 

High 

Point 

Align Cell 

Opening 

Fold Line 

A Lines 

B Lines 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-12 

6. Rotate nose of canopy over on top of remainder of canopy placing the A lines just past the B lines. 

Keep lines taut. 

7. Make another fold towards front of canopy so that A lines are directly in line with B lines. Keep lines 

taut. 

Canopy Nose 

A and B 

Lines 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-13 Change 2 

8. Fold nose of canopy back to edge of previous fold. Ensure A lines remain in line with B lines, and 

that lines are kept taut. 

9. Holding all high points together in line with C line group, make an S-fold placing C line group on top of 

A and B line groups. Ensure high points are kept taut. 

Nose of 

Canopy 

A and B 

Lines 

A and B Line 

Groups 

C Line 

Group 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-14 

10. Holding all high points together in line with D line group, make an S-fold placing D line group on top of 

A, B, and C line groups. Ensure high points are kept taut. 

11. With right hand on top of all folds, reach under and pull slack out of D lines. 

A, B, and C 

Line Groups 

D Line 

Group 

Right Hand On 

Top of All Folds 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-15 Change 2 

12. Holding line groups together, pull out and straighten the three stabilizer panels on the right side. The 

third stabilizer is inside the second stabilizer. Ensure tape is visible and no stabilizer panel is in a line 

group. 

13. Holding line groups together, pull out and straighten the three stabilizer panels on the left side; the 

third stabilizer is inside the second stabilizer. Ensure tape is visible and no stabilizer panel is in a line 

group. 

Stabilizer 

Panels
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-16 

SETTING DEPLOYMENT BREAKS: 

Set deployment breaks as follows: 

1. Open control line keeper. Pull control line down until finger-trapped loop is through control line guide 

ring. 

2. Insert top of control toggle through loop 1-inch. 

Control Line 

Keeper

Control Line 

Guide Ring 

Finger Trapped Loop 

Toggle Keeper 

Toggle Thong 

Finger Trapped Loop 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-17 Change 2 

3. S-fold control line and neatly stow excess line along side each ring, ensuring that no folded loops 

extend above or below excess control line keepers. Ensure that excess line is to the right (pile) side 

of the keeper. Close excess control line keepers. 

4. Close toggle keepers, enclosing only bottom portion of each toggle. 

Control Line 

Control Line 

Keeper

Control Line 

Keeper 

Control Line 

Toggle Keeper Control 

Line Toggle 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-18 

NOTE 

Steps 5. through 12. provide installation instructions for optional 

toggle extenders. 

5. Thread attaching loop end of toggle extender down through keeper attaching loop. 

6. Thread hand loop end of toggle extender through toggle extender attaching loop and pull tight, 

forming a girth hitch. Ensure a smooth, flat knot is achieved. 

Toggle 

Extender 

Attaching 

Loop 

Toggle 

Extender 

Keeper

Girth Hitch 

Hand Loop 

End 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-19 Change 2 

7. Ensuring that there are no twists, fold hand loop end of toggle extender towards locking end of toggle, 

aligning bartack number 1 with bottom edge of toggle keeper. 

#3 #2 #1

8. Make another fold by folding hand loop in half towards bartack number 1. 

FOLD LINE

#3 #2 #1

Hand End 

Loop Bartack 

Number 1 

Loop

Toggle Keeper
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-20 

9. Make third fold towards bartack number 3, ensuring fold line is even with bottom edge of toggle 

keeper. 

FOLD LINE

#3 #2 #1

10. Fold other loop end of toggle extender on top of previous folds. 

FOLD LINE
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-21 Change 2 

11. Ensure that all folds are tight and without twists. Close hook and pile fastener tapes of toggle 

extender keeper. Tack top and bottom of keeper closed with one turn cotton 24/4-cord, double. Tack 

through both thicknesses of keeper and one layer of the folded toggle extender. 

12. Stow the installed toggle extenders in the same manner as the control toggles are installed in steps 1. 

through 4. 

TAIL FOLDING 

Fold tail as follows: 

1. Grasp uppermost control line and pull taut. Place control line on top of line groups A, B, C, and D. 

Fold tip portion of stabilizer panel to the right. 

A, B, C, and 

D Line 

Uppermost 

Control Line 

Tip of Stabilizer 

Panel

Tacking 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-22 

2. Continue to place each control line in this group on top of line groups A, B, C, and D. Fold the panel 

between each control line to the outside. Keep lines taut. 

3. Continue folding center of tail by placing seams to the center of canopy and folding panels to the 

outside. 

Control Line 

Panel 

Seam 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-23 Change 2 

4. Place control lines on other side of canopy on top of suspension lines and fold panels to the outside 

in the same manner as first control line group. Keep control lines taut at all times. 

5. When opposite side is reached, pull stabilizer panel to the outside and pull slack out of control lines. 

Control Lines 

Panels

Stabilizer 

Panel

Control 

Lines 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-24 

6. Find center tab on trailing edge. This tab indicates center of canopy. Fold half of folded tail back. 

7. Gather and count the ten control lines and the two groups of eight each A and B and C and D lines. 

Situate them neatly in the center of the canopy. 

8. Keep tab in center of canopy. Check that control lines are taut and in the center of canopy. Spread 

center of tail one full section left and right of center tail. 

Center Tab 

Control Tab

Lines 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-25 Change 2 

9. Fold center tail panel around canopy until it is the approximate width of deployment bag. Smooth out 

trapped air until canopy lies flat. Keep control lines in the center. 

10. Place rear riser line groups to the outside of front riser line groups. Lay slider down flat between line 

groups, with reinforcement tape facing up. Ensure each line group from the canopy enters slider 

grommet from the top and exits out underneath slider. 

11. Grasp slider by top center, ensuring that reinforcement tape appears on the topside toward the 

canopy. Bring slider up to bottom of canopy, ensuring free movement along suspension lines. 

12. Rigger check number 2. 

Deployment 

Bag 

Tail Panel

Reinforcement 

Tapes 

Slider 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-26 

13. Fold left stabilizer panels, then right stabilizer panels over slider. 

14. Place hand on canopy approximately 10-inches from suspension lines. Grasp canopy at suspension 

lines in preparation for making the first fold. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-27 Change 2 

15. S-fold suspension line end toward deployment bag end. Maintain an approximate 10-inch fold. 

16. Place hand firmly on canopy at suspension line end. Place other hand under canopy approximately 

10-inches from end of first S-fold. 

Deployment Bag 

S-Fold 

10-IN. 

10-IN. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-28 

17. S-fold deployment bag end toward suspension line end. The top of the canopy must be rolled/folded 

under to clear the bridle loop attaching point (metal ring). 

18. Maintain a finished fold approximately the width of the deployment bag. 

STOWING CANOPY IN DEPLOYMENT BAG 

Stow canopy in deployment bag as follows: 

1. Place one knee on folded canopy. Smooth out canopy removing all trapped air. Begin to pull 

deployment bag over canopy. 

Width of 

Deployment 

Bag 

Deployment Bag 

Deployment Bag 

Canopy 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-29 Change 2 

2. Fully insert canopy into deployment bag. Work canopy into corners of bag. Remove slack in bridle 

line until attachment ring on canopy is flush with grommet on bag. Clear any visible canopy material 

from bridle. 

STOWING SUSPENSION LINES 

Stow suspension lines as follows: 

1. Starting with center two grommets, close locking flap by passing heavy-duty retainer bands through 

grommets. Make first suspension line locking stow on right side. Lines will extend through retainer 

band 1-inch at each stow. 

Deployment Bag 

Bridle Ring Visible 

Through Grommet 

Bridle Line 

First Stow 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-30 

2. Make second suspension line locking stow in retainer band opposite first stow on the left stow. 

3. Finish locking deployment bag by passing retainer bands through the two outboard grommets, then 

make third and fourth suspension line locking stows. 

4. Rigger check number 3. 

Second Stow 

Third Stow 

Fourth Stow 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-31 Change 2 

5. Continue to stow suspension lines, alternating stows in right and left retainer bands until 

approximately 12-inches of lines remain. 

6. Rigger check number 4. 

CLOSING CONTAINER 

Close container as follows: 

1. Insert pull-up cord through loop in main closing loop. 

12-IN. 

Pull-Up Cord 

Main Closing 

Loop 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-32 

2. Rotate deployment bag and suspension lines over container. Position risers along sides of reserve 

parachute container, continuing along sides of main container, with control toggles facing inward. 

3. Position deployment bag and suspension lines into container. Position suspension lines so they face 

bottom of main parachute container. Route bridle line out over reserve chute. 

Risers 

Deployment Bag 

Bridle Line 

Deployment Bag 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-33 Change 2 

4. Fold bridle line on top of deployment bag no wider than spring of pilot chute. 

5. Position pilot chute on center of deployment bag over folded bridle. Grasp pilot chute and gather in 

canopy material. 

Bridle Line 

Deployment 

Bag 

Pilot Chute 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-34 

6. Compress pilot chute. Place knee on compressed pilot chute and route pull-up cord over pilot chute 

crown and through grommet on bottom flap. Using pull up cord, pull main closing loop up through 

grommet and insert temporary locking pin. 

7. Route pull-up cord through grommet in left side flap, right side flap, and top flap. Use temporary 

locking pin after securing each flap. 

Bottom Flap 

Grommet 

Pull-Up Cord 

Temporary 

Locking Pin 

Pull-Up Cord 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-35 Change 2 

8. For main mounted AR2s, pull up and remove temporary locking pin and thread eye of power cable 

over ripcord locking pin. Insert ripcord pin into main closing loop (detail A). Axis of ripcord pin will 

follow the angled hole in the eye of the power cable (detail B). Center straight portion of ripcord pin in 

closing loop and ensure that shoulder of pin remains outside of grommet. 

NOTE 

The following Ripcord Pull Tests are performed on all MC-4 systems 

on a one-time-only basis. 

9. Place parachute in test fixture or anthropometrical device (torso) simulating the 5-to-95 percentile 

person or live subject. The device shall hold parachute securely in a position with the mouth of the 

ripcord pocket facing down (along vertical axis). 

10. Rotate harness/container so that open end of ripcord housing faces down with ripcord cable in a 

vertical position. 

11. Secure ripcord handle by hand to prevent ripcord pin withdrawal when weight is applied. 

DETAIL A DETAIL B

Power 

Cable Eye 

Ripcord 

Pin 

Power 

Cable Eye 

Ripcord 

Pin 

Pull-Up 

Cord 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-36 

12. A 20-pound weight attached to the center of the ripcord grip (care shall be exercised not to impose an 

impact load) shall readily withdraw ripcord grip from pocket. 

13. When ripcord grip has been removed from pocket, carefully remove the 20-pound weight. 

NOTE 

The following ripcord pull test and the stroke simulator test are 

performed on all MC-4 systems each time the main parachute is 

initially placed in service and when the main closing loop is 

replaced. 

14. Attach a 27-pound weight to ripcord grip. Slowly remove your hand. The weight shall readily activate 

the parachute by withdrawing the ripcord pin from locking loop. 

NOTE 

It is not necessary to start the pack process over again if the same 

initial packer is conducting the Ripcord Pull Tests. If a different 

Parachute Rigger has taken over any of the tasks associated with 

the Ripcord Pull Tests, then a complete re-pack of the main 

parachute is required. 

NOTE 

Re-closing the container after the ripcord pull test does not 

constitute a repack toward the normal repack cycle (120-days). 

15. Re-close the container IAW the procedures detailed above. Reinsert the ripcord pin-threading pin 

through eye of power cable. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-37 Change 2 

STROKE SIMULATOR TEST 

Conduct a Stroke Simulator Test for the MC-4 with a Main Mounted AR2 as follows: 

WARNING 

The Stroke Simulator must be able to pull the main ripcord pin 

positively and completely to ensure adequate travel of the AR2 

power cable. Inadequate travel of the AR2 power cable may cause 

the parachute to not deploy, resulting in serious injury or death of 

the parachutist.

NOTE 

The Stroke Simulator Test (power cable length of travel) will be 

performed each time the main parachute is initially placed in 

service, each time the main parachute is packed, each time a power 

cable is installed on the harness/container, when the AR2 has 

actuated during a jump, and whenever the main closing loop has 

been replaced. 

NOTE 

If ripcord pin fails to pull completely, check the length of the main 

closing loop, condition of the Navy stiffener, power cable housing 

and routing of power cable assembly. 

1. Test routing and installation of the power cable assembly in the parachute harness/container while 

the harness/container is being worn in the normal fashion. 

2. Connect stroke simulator to power cable assembly in place of the AR2. 

3. Firmly hold stroke simulator adjacent to the AR2 pocket in a vertical orientation (i.e. stroke simulator 

plunger pointing down). 

4. With assistance from another individual, carefully attach a 33-pound weight to the stroke simulator 

plunger and very slowly remove your hand from under the weight to allow the weight to be slowly 

transferred to the stroke simulator. 

5. The weight must completely withdraw the ripcord pin within the available stroke. 

6. Maintain control of the main pilot chute in an effort to prevent the entire contents of the main 

parachute from falling to the floor. 

7. If the 33-pound weight hesitates or fails to pull the ripcord pins, remove and inspect the entire power 

cable assembly IAW WP 0046 00 of this technical manual, and TM 10-1670-305-23&P, WP 0019 00. 

If unserviceable, replace with a new item from stock, then repeat Stroke Simulator Test above. If the 

system fails a second time, it must be tagged and removed from service IAW WP 0011 00. 

8. Detach stroke simulator from power cable. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-38 

NOTE 

It is not necessary to start the pack process over again if the same 

initial packer is conducting the Stroke Simulator Test. If a different 

Parachute Rigger has taken over any of the tasks associated with 

the Stroke Simulator Test, then a complete re-pack of the main 

parachute is required. 

NOTE 

Re-closing the container after the stroke simulator test does not 

constitute a repack toward the normal repack cycle (120 days). 

9. Reclose the container IAW the CLOSING CONTAINER procedures detailed above. Reinsert the 

ripcord pin-threading pin through eye of power cable. 

10. At the completion of stroke simulator test, (if applicable) remove pull-up cord by routing underneath 

ripcord pin. 

NOTE 

Due to the continuous entries into the Parachute Log Record Book, 

authorization is granted to locally produce an internal tracking 

document that captures these required entries. If no such document 

exists, entries must be made into the Parachute Log Record Book. 

11. After testing has been completed and the specified requirements are met, remove Parachute Log 

Record from log record pocket on underside of ripcord pin protector flap and make required entries. 

Reinsert log record into log record pocket. Close ripcord pin protector flap. Dress the container. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-39 Change 2 

Conduct a Ripcord Pin Test for the MC-4 with a Main Mounted FF-2 as follows: 

WARNING 

The FF-2 must be able to pull the main ripcord pin positively and 

completely to ensure adequate travel of the FF-2 power cable. 

Inadequate travel of the FF-2 power cable may cause the parachute 

to not deploy, resulting in serious injury or death of the parachutist.

NOTE 

The FF-2 Test (power cable length of travel) will be performed each 

time the main parachute is initially placed in service and whenever 

the main closing loop has been replaced. It is recommended that a 

“shop” FF-2 be utilized to withdraw the ripcord pins thus eliminating 

the over use of existing FF-2s. 

1. Test routing and installation of the FF-2 in the parachute harness/container while the 

harness/container is being worn in the normal fashion. 

2. Properly attach and secure an FF-2 by aligning rectangular key on end of power cable housing and 

insert in corresponding slot in base plate. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-40 

3. Turn housing 90 degrees counterclockwise and lock in place. 

4. Insert FF-2 into FF-2 pocket. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-41 Change 2 

5. Mate snap fasteners on securing straps to fasteners on pocket. 

6. Unscrew the knurled locking nut on the power cable. 

7. Place withdrawal hook around ripcord locking pin. 

8. Place withdrawal hook in withdrawal hook retainer. 

9. Tighten knurled locking nut finger tight. 

Securing 

Straps

Ripcord 

Locking 

Pin 

Power Cable 

Withdrawal Hook 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-42 

10. Activate the FF-2. 

11. If the FF-2 fails to pull the ripcord pin, remove and inspect the length of the main closing loop and the 

entire FF-2 power cable assembly IAW TM 10-1670-300-20&P. Check to ensure the cable assembly 

is mounted properly to the base plate. 

12. If unserviceable, replace with new items from stock, then repeat TEST procedures detailed above. 

13. If the system fails a second time, it must be tagged and removed from service IAW WP 0011 00. 

NOTE 

It is not necessary to start the pack process over again if the same 

initial packer is conducting the FF-2 test. If a different Parachute 

Rigger has taken over any of the tasks associated with the FF-2 

test, then a complete re-pack of the main parachute is required. 

NOTE 

Re-closing the container after the ripcord pin test does not constitute 

a repack toward the normal repack cycle (120-days). 

14. Close the container IAW the CLOSING CONTAINER procedures detailed above. Reinsert the 

ripcord pin-threading pin through eye of power cable. 

15. At the completion of ripcord pin test, remove pull-up cords by routing underneath ripcord pins. 

NOTE 

Due to the continuous entries into the Parachute Log Record Book, 

authorization is granted to locally produce an internal tracking 

document that captures these required entries. If no such document 

exists, entries must be made into the Parachute Log Record Book. 

16. After testing has been completed and the specified requirements are met, remove Parachute Log 

Record from log record pocket on underside of ripcord pin protector flap and make required entries. 

Reinsert log record into log record pocket. Close ripcord pin protector flap. Dress the container. 

Riser 

Protective 

Covers 

Ripcord Protective 

Flap 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-43 Change 2 

16. Rigger check number 5. 

INSTALLING THE AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION DEVICE 

Install the automatic opening device as follows: 

1. Install the Automatic Ripcord Release (AR2) as follows: 

WARNING 

When attaching the power cable assembly to the AR2, always verify 

proper engagement of ball end of power cable with piston rod of 

AR2 by looking through transparent plastic cable seal retainer. 

Cable seal retainer and power cable seal must be present to ensure 

correct seating of power cable ball. If ball is not engaged with piston 

rod or if cable seal retainer is missing, actuation of AR2 will fail to 

pull ripcord pins, which may result in death of parachutist. 

CAUTION 

Finger tighten the power-housing retainer. Do not use pliers or 

other tools that will over tighten power-housing retainer. 

CAUTION 

Ensure container is handled with care when transporting container 

with the AR2 installed. Failure to do so may result in damage to 

equipment. 

NOTE 

Make sure the AR2 is cocked, and the JUMP/OFF switch is set to 

OFF. 

NOTE 

Prior to installing the AR2 in the ripcord release pocket, remove 

the storage cable and piston rod cap, if present. Save these 

components for future use. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-44 

a. Ensure that the AR2 JUMP/OFF switch is OFF. 

OFF

b. Verify that the ball of the power cable is correctly engaged with the piston rod. 

JUMP/OFF 

Switch 

Power Cable 

Ball 

Piston Rod

Power Cable 

Power Housing 

Retainer 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-45 Change 2 

c. Attach power-housing retainer to the AR2 finger tight. Verify that the ball of the power cable is 

correctly engaged with the piston rod by looking through transparent cable seal retainer. 

d. Ensure that the cable seal retainer is present (located just above the power housing retainer). 

e. Install the AR2 in the ripcord release pocket and close flap. 

2. For units utilizing the Automatic Ripcord Release (FF-2), install as follows: 

a. Align rectangular key on end of power cable housing and insert in corresponding slot in base 

plate. 

b. Turn housing 90 degrees counterclockwise and lock in place. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

Change 2 0014 00-46 

c. Insert ripcord grip into ripcord release pocket. 

d. Mate snap fasteners on securing straps to fasteners on pocket. 

e. Unscrew the knurled locking nut on the power cable. 

Securing 

Straps 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0014 00 

 0014 00-47/(48 Blank) Change 2 

f. Place withdrawal hook around ripcord locking pin. 

g. Place withdrawal hook in withdrawal hook retainer. 

h. Tighten knurled locking nut finger tight. 

i. Rigger check number 6. 

j. Close ripcord pin protective flap, cable housing protective flap, and riser protective covers. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Ripcord 

Locking 

Pin 

Power Cable 

Withdrawal Hook 

Riser Protective 

Covers 

Ripcord 

Protective 

Flap 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

GENERAL REPAIR PROCEDURES 

0015 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Basting and Temporary Tacking 

• Stitching and Restitching

• Darning

• Zig-Zag Sewing 

• Patching

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition

Unpacked. Canopy with defects recorded. Clean. 

Tools

Specified in paragraph applicable to the item being 

repaired.

Personnel Required 

92R(10) Parachute Rigger 

Materials/ Parts 

Specified in paragraph applicable to the 

item being repaired.

NOTE

Sewing requirements will vary according to the type of item being 

repaired and the type of repair being made. The type of sewing 

machine, type of thread, the stitch range, and the stitch pattern (if 

applicable) required to accomplish a sewing procedure will be 

specified in the paragraph applicable to the item being repaired. 

Immediately after the accomplishment of a machine sewing 

procedure, trim thread ends to a point as close as possible to the 

material that has been sewn. 

NOTE

Repair and replacement of parachute components is performed in 

accordance with the repair instruction in this section and in specific 

paragraphs applicable to the item being repaired. 

BASTING AND TEMPORARY TACKING 

Basting and temporary tacking are hand-sewing methods used to temporarily hold layers of cloth fabric 

together while a repair is being performed. The following is a list of procedures that apply to basting and 

temporary tacking actions: 

1. Basting and temporary tacking should be made using thread that is of a contrasting color to the 

material being worked. 

2. Basting and temporary tacking will be performed using a single strand of size A, nylon thread, or 

ticket No. 24/4 cotton thread. 

3. When basting, do not tie knots at any point in the thread length. Also, the sewing should be made 

with two stitches per inch. 

4. Immediately upon completion of a repair, remove previously made basting or temporary tacking. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

Change 1 0015 00-2 

STITCHING AND RESTITCHING 

Perform stitching and re-stitching as follows, refer to Tables 1 and 2. 

1. Parachute canopy assemblies. The stitching and re-stitching made on parachute canopies should be 

accomplished with thread that is contrasting in color to the fabric being re-stitched. If contrasting 

color thread is not available, thread of matching color may be used, providing all other specifications 

are met. Straight stitching and re-stitching on parachute canopy assemblies should be locked by at 

least 2-inches at each end of a stitch row, when possible. Zig-Zag stitching does not require locking; 

however, zig-zag re-stitching should extend at least 1⁄4-inch into undamaged stitching at each end, 

when possible. When re-stitching parachute canopy assemblies, stitch directly over the original 

stitching and follow the original stitch pattern as closely as possible. 

Table 1. Sewing Machine Code Symbols 

CODE SYMBOL SEWING MACHINE 

LD SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: General Sewing; 301 Stitch; Light-Duty; NSN 

350-01-177-8590. 

MD ZZ SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: Zig-Zag; 308 Stitch; Medium-Duty; NSN 

3530-01-181-1421. 

LD ZZ SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: Zig-Zag; 308 Stitch; Light-Duty; NSN 3530-

01-181-1420. 

HD SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: General Sewing; 301 Stitch; Heavy-Duty; 

NSN 3530-01-177-8588. 

MD SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: General Sewing; 301 Stitch; Medium-Duty; 

NSN 3530-01-177-8591. 

DN SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: Darning; Lock Stitch; NSN 3530-01-177-8589.

LHD SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: 301 Stitch; Light-Heavy Duty; NSN 3530-01-

186-3079. 

ND SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: 301 Stitch; Double-Needle; NSN 3530-01-

182-2873. 

BT SEWING MACHINE, AUTOMATIC: Box-X; (Local purchase, Herbert Jaffe/JF PN 

HJ1615X1X56, Model Number 3334) 

BT SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: Bartack, 42 stitch (Local purchase, 

Recommended PN HJ1466-1X42) 

Table 2. Stitching and Re-stitching Specifications 

COMPONENT RECOMMENDED SEWING MACHINE 

(Code Symbol) 

STITCHES

PER INCH 

THREAD 

SIZE

Harness/Container 

Panels/Closing Flaps LD, DN 7 to 11 E 

Binding Tape, 3⁄4-in. LD, MD, ZZ, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Tape, Hook and Pile LD, MD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Pocket, ARR (FF-2) LD, ZZ 7 to 11 E 

Pocket, ARR (AR2) LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

 

 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

0015 00-3 Change 1 

Table 2. Stitching and Re-stitching Specifications -continued

COMPONENT RECOMMENDED SEWING MACHINE 

(Code Symbol) 

STITCHES

PER INCH 

THREAD 

SIZE

Binding Tape LD 7 to 11 E 

Flap, Main, Top Closing LD 7 to 11 E 

Binding Tape LD 7 to 11 E 

Ripcord Pocket, Main LD, ZZ 7 to 11/42 E 

Binding Tape LD, ZZ 7 to 11 E 

Ripcord Pocket, Reserve LD, ZZ 7 to 11/42 E 

Binding Tape LD, ZZ 7 to 11 E 

Protective Cover, ARR, Power 

Cable MD 6 to 9 FF 

Binding Tape LD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Tape, Hook, and Pile LD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Protective Cover, Reserve MD 7 to 11 E 

Binding Tape LD 7 to 11 E 

Tape, Hook, and Pile LD 7 to 11 E 

Pocket, Log Record LD 7 to 11 E 

Flap, Reserve, Top Closing LD 7 to 11 E 

Tape, Hook, and Pilot LD 7 to 11 E 

Carrying Handle ZZ, BT 42 E 

Loops, Weapon, Tie Down ZZ 7 to 11 E 

Pilot Chute Bridle Line BT, LD 7 to 11/42 E 

Deployment Bag, Main LD, MD, DN 7 to 11 E 

Canopy, Main DN A 

Panel, Top/Bottom LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Panel, Stabilizer LD, MD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Panel, Cotton Cloth LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Ribs LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Binding Tape LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Slider Stop Reinforcement LD, MD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Line, Suspension BT, ZZ 42 E 

Line, Control BT, ZZ 42 E 

Tape, Reinforcement LD, DN 7 to 11 E

Nylon Reinforcement, Pilot Chute LD 7 to 11 E 

Suspension Line Attaching Loop DBL BT Pre-set E 

Deployment Bag, Reserve LD, MD, DN 7 to 11 E 

Canopy, Reserve DN A 

Conversion LD 7 to 11 E 

Panel, Top/Bottom LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Panel, Stabilizer LD, MD, BT 7 to 11/42 E

 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

Change 1 0015 00-4 

Table 2. Stitching and Restitching Specifications - continued

COMPONENT RECOMMENDED SEWING MACHINE 

(Code Symbol) 

STITCHES

PER INCH 

THREAD 

SIZE

Panel, Cotton Cloth LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Ribs LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Binding Tape LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Slider Stop Reinforcement LD, MD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Line, Suspension BT, ZZ 42 E 

Line, Control BT, ZZ 42 E 

Panel, Top/Bottom LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Crossports D 7 to 11 E 

Slider LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Binding Tape LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Cloth, Nylon, Type I DN, LD 7 to 11 A/E 

Suspension Line Attaching Loop DBL BT Pre-set E 

Risers (re-stitch as req’d) LD, ZZ, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Keeper, Guide Ring BT, ZZ 42 E 

Tape, Trim Tab LD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Channel, Release Cable LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Keeper, Toggle LD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Cover, Control Line LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Tape, Hook and Pile LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

2. Other parachute items. Stitching and re-stitching on other parachute items constructed from cloth, 

canvas, and webbing should be accomplished with thread that matches the color of the original 

stitching, when possible. All straight stitching should be locked by backstitching at least 1⁄2-inch. Restitching should be locked by overstitching each end of the stitch formation by 1⁄2-inch. Zig-zag 

stitching does not require locking; however, zig-zag re-stitching should extend at least 1⁄4-inch into 

undamaged stitching at each end, when possible. Re-stitching should be made directly over the 

original stitching; follow the original stitch pattern as closely as possible. 

DARNING 

(Refer to Tables 1 and 2). Darning is a sewing procedure used to repair limited size holes, rips, and 

tears. A darning repair may be made either by hand or by sewing machine, depending upon the method 

preferred and the availability of equipment. However, a darning machine should be used to darn small 

holes and tears where fabric is missing. A darning repair will be preformed using the following 

procedures, as appropriate: 

1. Machine darning. Proceed as follows: 

a. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark a square around the damaged area 

and ensure the marking is at least 1⁄4-inch back from each edge of the damaged area. 

b. Darn the damaged area by sewing the material in a back and forth manner, using size A or E 

nylon thread. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

0015 00-5 Change 1 

c. Turn material and stitch back and forth across stitching made in step b., above, until hole or tear 

is completely darned. 

d. If applicable, restencil informational data or identification marks using the criteria in WP 0017 00. 

2. Hand darning. When repair of a hole or tear is made by hand darning, the darn should match the 

original weave of the damaged material as closely as possible. Hand darning is performed as 

follows: 

a. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark a square around the damaged area 

and ensure that the marking is at least 1⁄4-inch back from each edge of the damaged area. 

b. Using darning needle and a length of size A or E nylon thread, begin darning at one corner of 

marked area. Working parallel with the marking, pass needle and thread back and forth through 

material until opposite diagonal corner of marked area is reached as shown in A below. 

A STITCHING B HAND DARNING

Back and Forth

Stitching in Both

Directions

Hole

Marking

Finish Marking Start

Start

Hole

Finish
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

Change 1 0015 00-6 

c. Turn material and weave needle and thread back and forth across stitching made in step b., 

above, until hole is completely darned as shown in step b., above. 

d. If applicable, restencil informational data or identification marks as outlined in WP 0017 00. 

3. Zig-zag Sewing. (Refer to tables 1 and 2) Components of the MC-4, except parachute canopy, that 

have sustained cut or tear damage may be repaired by zig-zag sewing provided the applicable 

damaged area does not have any material missing and the cut or tear is straight or L-shaped. Should 

the damaged area be irregular shaped or have material missing, the repair will be achieved by either 

darning or patching, as required. A zig-zag sewing repair is accomplished using a zig-zag sewing 

machine as follows: 

a. Set sewing machine to maximum stitch width. 

b. Beginning at a point 1

/4-inch beyond one end of cut or tear, stitch lengthwise along damaged area 

to a point 1

/4-inch beyond opposite end of cut or tear. 

c. The cited stitching procedure also applies to an L-shaped cut or tear. 

1⁄4-IN 1⁄4-IN

1⁄4-IN

1⁄4-IN

A STRAIGHT CUT OR TEAR STITCHING 

B L-SHAPED CUT OR TEAR STITCHING 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

0015 00-7 Change 1 

d. If applicable, restencil information data or identification marks as prescribed in WP 0017 00. 

4. Patching Procedures. Patching is a procedure used to repair holes that cannot be darned. 

a. Patching limitations for the parachute canopy and container. The following is a list of patching 

limitations for the MC-4 parachute canopy and container. 

(1) A patch will not be applied to a damaged area that has been previously patched. 

(2) There will be no more than two darns and three patches per section, rib, or stabilizer, not to 

exceed 50 percent. A canopy section is defined as an area between loaded ribs (on the left 

and right side rigger view) and from seam to seam from nose to tail. 

(3) A rib and a stabilizer are each considered as one section. A finished basic patch shall not be 

closer than one-inch from a sewn seam. However, determination should be made as to the 

lowest economical method to be used (i.e., two or more patches verses one large patch or 

one large patch verses a section replacement). 

NOTE

Patches must be cut with their edges parallel to the warp and weft of 

the fabric and are to be applied with the warp and weft threads 

parallel to those of the material under repair. 

Canopy damage chart. A canopy damage chart is provided for local reproduction. The canopy damage 

chart is used to record canopy damage and repair action. 

TOP SKIN 

Nose

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

Change 1 0015 00-8 

BOTTOM SKIN 

RIBS

Nose

 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

0015 00-9 Change 1 

LEGEND AMT HRS INSPECTION

DATA 

REPAIR

DATA 

D Darn .8 X TYPE

PARACHUTE 

CANOPY 

REPAIR

RS Resew .8 X MC-4 NAME DATE

BR Burn .4 X SERIAL # 

SRT

Splice

Reinforcement

Tape

.4 X 

RV Replace Velcro .4 X DOM

RE Restencil .4 X LINE REPAIR 

RR Replace Riser .5 X PIS NAME DATE

RSL Replace Slider .5 X 

SP Sewn Patch .8 X WOD 

RLS Replace Line 

Single .8 X 

RCL Replace Control 

Lines 1.0 X DATE

INSPECTED

FINAL

INSPECTION

SLS Sew Line Set 1.5 X NAME DATE

RSB Replace Stabilizer 2.0 X INSPECTED

BY

RRH Replace Rib Half 3.0 X 

RPS Replace Panel 

Single 4.0 X REPAIR HRS 

LS Replace Line Set 3.5 X 

RPD Replace Panel 

Double 7.0 X INSPECTION

HRS

RRC Replace Rib 

Complete 5.0 X 3.00

RPM Replace Panel 

Multi X TOTAL HRS 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

Change 1 0015 00-10 

Chest Strap

Leg Strap 

Equipment

D-Ring 

Reserve 

Ripcord

Cable

Housing

Waistband 

Reserve 

Ripcord

Pocket

Base Ring 

of Three 

Ring

Release 

Assembly 

Static Line 

Guide Ring Reserve Risers 

Main

Canopy 

Release 

Cable

Housing

Main Canopy

Release Ripcord

Pocket

Main Ripcord

Cable Housing

Main

Ripcord

Pocket

Waistband 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

0015 00-11 Change 1 

SYM MC-4 REPAIRS TIME

ALLOW AMT HRS SYSTEM NUMBER 

RP Replace FF-2/AR2 Pocket .5 

SP Sew Patch On Container 1.0 

INSPECTED BY 

RR Replace Ripcord Housing Cover 3.5 REPAIR HOURS 

RC Replace Chest Strap 2.0 

RB Replace Waistband 4.0 

INSPECTION TIME 

RE Replace Elastic Strap .4 

RSL Replace Pack Stiffener (LG) 1.0 

TOTAL REPAIR 

HOURS 

RSS Replace Pack Stiffener (SM) .5 

RSR Replace Pack Stiffener (RES) 3.0 

DATE INSPECTED 

RG Replace Grommet Only .4 

RV Replace Velcro-Reserve Flap .5 

RT Re-tack .4 

REPAIRS

COMPLETED BY 

RW Replace 3-IN. Wide Webbing .5 

II Initial Inspection .5 

FI Final Inspection .5 

DATE COMPLETED 

5. Making a basic patch. A basic patch is used to repair damaged cloth when the finished patch is no 

closer than 1-inch from a stitched seam or stitched tape. Should a damaged area be closer than 1-

inch to the cited areas, a miscellaneous patch will be made as detailed in paragraph 6, below. The 

basic patch is applied by sewing. The patch is applied to the inside of the canopy. The deployment 

bag is patched on the outside. The basic patch is shown below. Apply a basic patch as follows: 

1⁄2-IN

1

/16-IN

1⁄2-IN

1

/16-IN

SECTION A-A 3⁄4-IN

Preferred

Rounded

Corners

INSIDE VIEW OUTSIDE VIEW 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

Change 1 0015 00-12 

NOTE

A basic patch applied to the parachute canopy will be square or 

rectangular in shape. ADHESIVE NYLON PARACHUTE 

MENDING CLOTH WILL NOT BE USED. Ensure proper thread 

tension is used to prevent distortion of the canopy. 

a. Place repairable item on repair table, smooth the fabric around the damaged area, and secure 

item to table with push-up pins. Do not pin damaged area. 

b. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark a square or rectangle around area to 

be patched. 

c. Cut damaged area fabric along the lines made in step b., above. Further cut the fabric diagonally 

at each corner to allow a 1⁄2-inch fold back in the raw edges. 

d. Make a 1⁄2-inch fold back at each raw edge. Pin and baste each foldback to complete the 

prepared hole. Basting is performed using procedures on page 0015 00. 

e. Using same type material as in original construction, mark and cut a patch 2 1⁄2-inches wider and 

longer than the inside measurements of prepared hole. 

f. Center patch material over prepared hole. 

g. Make a 1⁄2-inch fold under on each edge of patch material and pin in position. Baste patch to 

prepared area. Basting is performed using procedures on page 0015 00. 

h. Remove pushpins securing canopy to repair table and secure patch by stitching, using the 

applicable details in the illustration above and page 0015 00. Make the first row of stitching 

completely around patch. It is not necessary for the stitch pattern to exactly follow the angles of 

the patch. It is preferred to round the corners of the patch, to stitch at a 45-degree angle, rather 

than a 90-degree angle. For corners less than or greater than 90-degrees, adjust accordingly. 

i. Turn canopy over and make second row of stitching, ensuring that locking stitches are on 

opposite sides of patch. Stitching is performed in accordance with page 0015 00. 

j. If applicable, restencil informational data according to procedures in WP 0017 00. 

6. Applying miscellaneous canopy patch. A miscellaneous canopy patch, which may be irregularly 

shaped, is used to repair damaged canopy material when the location of the damaged area requires 

the patch to extend into or over a seam or a reinforced seam. Ascertain the type of patch required for 

the canopy using the details in the illustrations on the following page. A canopy section that cannot 

be patched with a basic patch as outlined in paragraph 5., above, is patched with a miscellaneous 

patch. Apply a miscellaneous patch to a section as follows: 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

0015 00-13 Change 1 

INSIDE VIEW 

INSIDE VIEW 

1⁄2-IN

1⁄2-IN

1⁄2-IN

1⁄2-IN

1⁄2-IN

3⁄4-IN 3⁄4 -IN

1

/16-IN 1

/16-IN 1 1

/16-IN /16-IN

SECTION A-A SECTION B-B SECTION A-A 

A. OUTSIDE VIEW B. OUTSIDE VIEW 

NOTE: FOR TWO OUTMOST RIBS, THE 

PATCH WILL BE APPLIED OVER THE 

REINFORCING TAPE. 

A. RECTANGULAR PATCH AT REINFORCING 

TAPE OF LEADING EDGE (UPPER AND 

LOWER) FOR DAMAGE NOT CLOSER 

THAN 2-INCHES TO RIB SEAMS. 

NOTE: FOR AN OUTSIDE RIB OVER A 

REINFORCING TAPE, 

1. REMOVE STITCHING FROM 

REINFORCING TAPE. 

2. APPLY A BASIC PATCH. 

3. RE-STITCH THE REINFORCING TAPE. 

B. RECTANGULAR PATCH CROSSING A 

REINFORCING TAPE. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

Change 1 0015 00-14 

NOTE

Adhesive nylon parachute mending cloth will not be used in the 

construction or application of a miscellaneous canopy patch. 

a. Place canopy inside out on a repair table, smooth fabric around damaged area, and secure 

damaged section to table with pushup pins. Do not pin damaged area of section. 

b. As required, cut applicable stitching to remove or lay aside items that may interfere with patching 

process. 

c. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark damaged area. Mark the 1⁄2-inch from 

any adjacent seam or reinforced seam, except where the width of the foldback is limited by the 

width of the reinforced seam. 

d. Prepare damaged area hole by cutting along marks made in step c., above. Also make a 

diagonal cut at each corner of formed hole to permit a foldback of each raw edge. 

e. To complete hole preparation, make a 1

/2-inch foldback of each raw edge. Pin and baste each 

edge foldback using procedures detailed in WP 0015 00. 

f. Using same type material as in original canopy construction, mark and cut a patch 2 1

/2-inches 

wider and longer than inside measurements of prepared hole. 

g. Center patch material over prepared hole. 

h. Make a 1

/2-inch foldunder on each edge of patch material and pin patch material in position. 

Baste patch to prepared area. Basting is performed using procedures detailed in WP 0015 00. 

i. Remove pushpins securing canopy to repair table and secure patch by stitching according to the 

details in the illustrations above and below, using stitching specifics outlined in tables 1 and 2. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

0015 00-15 Change 1 

INSIDE VIEW INSIDE VIEW 

C. OUTSIDE VIEW D. OUTSIDE VIEW 

C. TRIANGULAR PATCH AT FRONT 

LEADING EDGE OF RIBS. 

D. FOUR-SIDED PATCH AT 

FORWARD LEADING EDGE OF 

RIBS.

SECTION A-A SECTION B-B SECTION A-A SECTION B-B 

1⁄2-IN

1⁄2 -IN 

1⁄2-IN

1⁄2-IN 1⁄2-IN

1-IN 1-IN 3⁄4-IN

1 1 /16-IN /16-IN 1

/16-IN

3⁄4-IN 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0015 00 

Change 1 0015 00-16 

j. Make the first row of stitching completely around the edges of the patch. Turn canopy right side 

out and make a second row of stitching, ensuring that locking stitches are on opposite sides of 

patch. Stitching is performed in accordance with WP 0015 00. 

k. Reposition canopy items removed or laid aside in step b., above, in the original location and 

secure each item to canopy by restitching according to original construction details and WP 0015 

00.

l. If applicable, restencil informational data according to procedures in WP 0017 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0016 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SEARING AND WAXING 

0016 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Searing 

x Waxing

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Knife, Hot, Metal (Item 24, WP 0063 00) 

Pot, Melting Electric (Item 34, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Beeswax (Item 5, WP 0076 00) 

Wax, Paraffin (Item 46, WP 0076 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Unpacked. 

CAUTION 

Cotton tape, webbing, or cord will not be seared. 

NOTE

Fabric materials such as cord, tape, and webbing that is cut for use 

in the maintenance of the MC-4 parachute will normally be heatseared or dipped in a melted wax mixture, as applicable, to prevent 

the material from fraying or unraveling. However, in some instances 

the preparation of the material may not be necessary and will be 

specified accordingly. 

SEARING 

The cut ends of nylon tape, webbing, and cord lengths may be prepared by heat-searing, which is 

performed by pressing the raw end of the material against a hot metal surface (knife) until the nylon has 

melted sufficiently. 

CAUTION 

Avoid forming a sharp edge or lumped effect on the melted end. 

Sharp edges may cut other components 

WAXING 

Fraying or unraveling of cotton or nylon tape, webbing, and cord length ends may be prevented by 

dipping 1⁄2-inch of the raw end of the material into a thoroughly melted mixture of half beeswax and half 

paraffin in an electric melting pot. The wax temperature should be substantial enough to ensure the wax 

completely penetrates the material rather than just coating the exterior fabric. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0017 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MARKING AND RESTENCILING 

0017 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Marking

x Re-stenciling 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Brush, Stenciling (Item 5, WP 0063 00) 

Machine, Stencil Cutting (Item 26, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Ink, Marking, Parachute (Item 25/26, WP 0076 00) 

Marker, Felt Tip, Permanent, Black (Item 28, WP 0076 00) 

Pen, Ball Point (Item 29, WP 0076 00) 

Stencil Board, Oiled (Item 31, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area.

NOTE

Stenciling should be used whenever possible. A ballpoint pen or 

permanent felt tip marker should be used only where stenciling is 

not possible, or when stenciling devices are not available. Any type 

bail point pen using black or blue ink may be used for marking on 

labels only. 

Original stenciled data or marking that becomes faded, illegible, 

obliterated, or are removed as a result of performing a repair 

procedure will be remarked with a ballpoint pen, felt tip marker, or 

re-stenciled. All marking or re-stenciling will be done on or as near 

as possible to the original location and should conform to the 

original lettering type and size. 

MARKING

Using marking devices such as ballpoint pen or permanent felt tip marker, mark on, or as near as 

possible to, original location and conform to original lettering type and size. 

RESTENCILING

Proceed as follows: 

1. Cut oiled stencil board to original lettering type and size of data to be re-stenciled. 

2. Place cut stencil board over, or as near as possible to, original marking to be re-stenciled. 

3. Place additional sheet or stencilboard beneath area to be re-stenciled to prevent marking ink from 

penetrating to other areas. 

4. Hold stencilboard in place and, using stenciling brush filled with parachute marking ink, re-stencil 

original marking. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0018 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN PILOT CHUTE BRIDLE LINE OR DEPLOYMENT BAG 

0018 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Remove 

x Install

INITIAL SETUP: 

Materials/Parts 

Bag, Deployment (Item 7, WP 0065 00) 

Bridle Assembly, Pilot Chute (Item 2, WP 0065 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable area.

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

REMOVE

Remove main pilot chute bridle line or deployment bag as follows: 

1. Loosen bridle line girth hitch enough so that pilot chute can be passed through loop in end of bridle 

line.

2. Remove bridle line from loop at bottom end of pilot chute. 

Pilot Chute 

Bridle Line Loop 

Bridle Line 

Pilot Chute Loop

Girth Hitch
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0018 00 

0018 00-2 

3. Loosen bridle line girth hitch at canopy attachment ring. 

4. Pass deployment bag and opposite end of bridle line through bridle line loop. 

5. Remove bridle line from canopy attachment ring and deployment bag. 

INSTALL

Install main pilot chute bridle line or deployment bag as follows: 

1. Pass bridle line loop at ring end through deployment bag from outside to inside. 

Bridle Line Loop 

Canopy Attachment Ring 

Deployment Bag 

Deployment Bag 

Canopy Attachment Ring

Bridle Line 

Loop 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0018 00 

0018 00-3/(4 Blank) 

2. Pass bridle line loop at ring end completely through canopy attachment ring. 

3. Pass opposite end of bridle line and deployment bag through bridle line loop and pull tight, forming a 

girth hitch. 

4. Pass bridle line through loop at bottom end of pilot chute.

5. Pass pilot chute through loop at end of bridle line and pull tight, forming a girth hitch. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

Pilot Chute 

Bridle Line Loop 

Bridle Line 

Pilot Chute Loop

Girth Hitch

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0019 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN PILOT CHUTE 

0019 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

x Replace

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Basting (Item 28, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Pilot Chute, Main (Item 1, WP 0065 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size A (Item 45, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area.

REPAIR

Repair damaged pilot chute canopy material by hand darning holes no larger than 1⁄2-inch in diameter and 

limited to four (4) darns per material for a total of eight (8). Hand darn IAW WP 0015 00. 

REPLACE

Replace main pilot chute as follows: 

1. Loosen bridle line girth hitch enough so that pilot chute can be passed through loop in end of bridle 

line.

2. Remove bridle line from loop at bottom end of pilot chute. 

3. Pass bridle line through loop at bottom end of replacement pilot chute. 

4. Pass pilot chute through loop at end of bridle line and pull tight forming a girth hitch. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Pilot Chute 

Bridle Line Loop 

Pilot Chute Loop Bridle Line 

Girth Hitch

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0020 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN AND RESERVE PILOT CHUTE ATTACHMENT 

0020 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Knife (Item 23, WP 0063 00) 

Pliers, Large, Diagonal Cut (Item 32, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Automatic Box-X (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Double Needle (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Material/Parts

Tape, Nylon, 1-Inch Wide, Gray (Item 34, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Style Force 9,1.9-oz Ripstop Weave, 2-IN. Wide (Item 32, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or 

other suitable area. 

REPLACE PILOT CHUTE ATTACHING RING 

1. Carefully cut and remove damaged pilot parachute ring and strap. 

2. Obtain a 9-inch length of 1-inch wide nylon tape from supply stock and fabricate a new strap IAW the 

original construction. 

3. Using an automatic box-X sewing machine, and size E nylon thread, re-sew ring and strap to the 

canopy as close to the original position as possible ensuring it is sewn to the nylon tape on the rib. 

REPLACE PILOT CHUTE ATTACHING RING NYLON REINFORCEMENT 

1. Remove pilot chute ring as stated in “Replace Pilot Chute Attaching Ring”, step 1., above. 

2. Beginning at a point approximately 6-inches out from the edge of the nylon reinforcement, carefully 

cut and remove stitching that secures the rib to the top skin through the nylon reinforcement, and 6-

inches beyond the nylon reinforcement (approximately 12-inches of stitching should be removed). 

3. Carefully cut and remove stitching which secures the nylon reinforcement to the top skin. 

4. Remove the nylon reinforcement. 

5. Obtain from supply stock a 7-inch by 7-inch piece of Style-Force 9 fabric. 

6. Install the nylon to the top skin using the old one as a guide and sew as close to the original position 

as possible. 

7. Using a light-duty sewing machine and size E nylon thread, sew a double row of stitching. 

8. Re-sew the rib previously removed in step 2., above, using original construction and stitch formation. 

9. Re-sew the pilot parachute-attaching ring removed in step 1., above, using procedures in step 3. in 

the REPLACE PILOT CHUTE ATTACHING RING paragraph detailed above. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0020 00 

0020 00-2 

NOTE

When making repairs to the canopy material where the cotton 

material and the No. 8 grommet must be removed to expose the 

damaged area; it is not necessary to replace the cotton material and 

the No. 8 grommet after the canopy repairs have been completed. 

REPAIR COTTON REINFORCEMENT AROUND PILOT PARACHTUE ATTACHING RING 

1. Repairs to the cotton reinforcement are limited to re-stitching and darning only. 

2. Holes that do not exceed 3⁄4-inch can be darned. 

3. Darns are permitted to penetrate the cotton material as well as the top skin. 

4. Darns are not permitted in the nylon reinforcement material. 

5. Darn IAW procedures listed in WP 0015 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0021 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN DEPLOYMENT BAG 

0021 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Die Set, Spur Grommet No. 5 (Item 12, WP 0063 00) 

Mallet, Rawhide (Item 27, WP 0063 00) 

Pliers, Large, Diagonal Cut (Item 32, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

Materials/Parts 

Cloth, Nylon, Type III, Class 3, Black (Item 10, 

WP 0076 00) 

Grommet, Metallic, No. 5, Type III, Class 2 (Item 

22, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable area. 

Bridle line removed from deployment bag.

REPAIR

1. Restitching. Sew over loose or broken stitching on original stitch line with size E nylon thread. New 

stitching shall extend 3⁄4-inch beyond affected area in both directions. 

NOTE

For stitching, use stitch type 301, FED-STD-751, 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

2. Patching. Apply a basic or miscellaneous patch, as required, in accordance with WP 0015 00. 

3. Bridle Grommet Replacement. Replace bridle grommet as follows: 

a. Cut crimped edge of damaged grommet at three or four points. 

b. Remove grommet and washer. 

c. Cover hole in deployment bag with square patch of nylon cloth that is 3

/8-inch larger than 

grommet washer.

A A

SECTION A-A 

Grommet Square

Patch

Grommet 

Patch

Grommet 

Washer

Patch

1⁄4-IN

3/16-IN 1/16-IN 

3/8-IN 

Stitching 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0021 00 

0021 00-2 

d. Turn edges under 1⁄4-inch and sew to deployment bag with size E nylon thread, 7 to 11 stitches 

per inch, type 301. Stitch patch on all four (4) sides with two (2) rows of stitching. 

e. Cut a 5

/8-inch diameter hole (Size 5 punch) in center of patch. 

f. Place grommet washer on inside of patch. Place grommet on outside of patch. 

g. Lock grommet and grommet washer in place with die set. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0022 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

RESERVE PILOT CHUTE OR RESERVE DEPLOYMENT BAG AND BRIDLE LINE 

0022 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Remove 

x Install

INITIAL SETUP: 

Materials/Parts 

Deployment Bag and Bridle Assembly (Item 2, WP 0067 00) 

Pilot Chute, Reserve (Item 1, WP 0067 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable area.

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

REMOVE

Remove reserve pilot chute or deployment bag and bridle assembly as follows: 

1. Loosen reserve deployment bag bridle line girth hitch enough so that the bridle line and deployment 

bag can be passed through loop in end of bridle line. 

2. Remove reserve deployment bag bridle line at bottom end of pilot chute. 

INSTALL

Install reserve pilot chute or deployment bag and bridle line as follows: 

1. Pass the bridle line through loop at bottom end of pilot chute. 

2. Pass deployment bag through loop at end of bridle line and pull tight, forming a girth hitch. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

Pilot Chute 

Bridle Line Loop 

Bridle Line 

Pilot Chute Loop

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0023 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SAFETY STOW LOOP 

0023 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Remove 

x Install

INITIAL SETUP: 

Materials/Parts 

Loop, Safety Stow (Item 3, WP 0067 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable area.

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

REMOVE

Remove safety stow loop as follows: 

1. Pull both ends of safety stow loop down through grommets on reserve deployment bag. 

2. Pull safety stow loop completely through guide channel. Cut safety stow loop before discarding. This 

will prevent inadvertent re-use. 

Grommet 

Safety Stow Loop 

Reserve 

Deployment Bag 

Guide Channel

Safety Stow Loop 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0023 00 

0023 00-2 

INSTALL

Install safety stow loop as follows: 

1. Insert safety stow loop through guide channel in reserve deployment bag, centering splice on loop 

between grommets. 

2. Thread both ends of loop up through corresponding grommets. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Guide Channel

Safety Stow Loops 

Grommets
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0024 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

GENERAL CANOPY REPAIR (MAIN AND RESERVE) 

0024 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Darning and Patching 

x Seam Repair 

x Reinforcement Tape Replacement 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Darning (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Double Needle (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Medium-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

Materials/Parts 

Cloth, Nylon Ripstop, Type I (Item 9, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Textile and Webbing, 3

/8-IN. Wide (Item 39, 

WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size A (Item 45, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable area.

1. Darning and Patching. Repair canopy by darning, patching, or restenciling (as required) in 

accordance with WP 0015 00 and WP 0017 00. Stitching and darning is specified in Table 2. 

2. Seam Repair. Repair seams by restitching in accordance with WP 0015 00, using a light-duty sewing 

machine. Use the illustrations below as a guide for construction of the applicable seam. 

3. Reinforcement Tape Replace. Repair damaged reinforcement tape as follows: 

a. Carefully remove stitches and remove damaged tape. 

b. If adjacent canopy material is damaged, patch in accordance with WP 0015 00. 

c. Cut new reinforcement tape 4-inches longer than damaged area. Center new reinforcement tape 

over damaged area. Using a light-duty sewing machine, sew in place with size E nylon thread 

using original stitch pattern. 

Top

Skin

LOADED RIB TOP SEAM LOADED RIB BOTTOM SEAM 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0024 00 

0024 00-2 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

3

/8-IN. Type III Tape 

TOP NOSE SEAM 

TAIL SEAM 

1⁄2-IN.

Type III

Tape

NON-LOADED RIB SEAM 

CROSS SEAM 

BOTTOM NOSE SEAM 

1-IN. Type III 

Tape
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0025 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN CANOPY REPLACEMENT 

0025 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, 7

/16-IN., Open End (Item 45, WP 0063 00) 

Material/Parts

Parachute (Canopy), Main (Item 9, WP 0065 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00)

Equipment Condition

Lay out on packing table or other suitable 

area. Remove pilot chute, deployment 

bag, bridle bag, and bridle line.

Follow-Up Procedure 

Pack Parachute (WP 0006 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

1. Remove risers from canopy as follows: 

a. Remove control lines from toggle rings by untying overhand knots. 

Upper Guide

Ring

Control Line

Lower Guide Ring

Toggle Ring

Overhand 

Knots
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0025 00 

0025 00-2 

b. Remove control lines from guide rings on rear risers. 

c. Cut and remove tacking on risers below connector links. 

d. Loosen barrel nuts on connector links with 7

/16-inch open-end wrench. 

e. Remove connector links from risers. 

2. Attach canopy to risers as follows: 

a. Position the connector links. 

NOTE

Connector link barrel nuts must face inboard and tighten upward. 

Tacking 

Connector Link 

Barrel Nut 

Riser
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0025 00 

0025 00-3/(4 Blank) 

b. Remove connector links and control lines from line organizing card and loosely connect 

connector links and control lines to proper riser. 

c. Using 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, tighten barrel nut on connector links 1⁄4 turn past hand tight. 

d. Hand tack each riser at connector link with one turn double tape lacing and tying below the 

connector link with an overhand knot. 

3. Perform follow-up procedures IAW WP 0006 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

Connector Link 

Tacking 

Riser

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0026 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

RESERVE CANOPY REPLACEMENT 

0026 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, 7

/16-IN., Open End (Item 45, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Canopy, Reserve (Item 10, WP 0065 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Cotton, 24/4 (Item 40, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition

Lay out on packing table or 

other suitable area.

REPLACE

1. Remove canopy from risers as follows: 

a. Cut and remove tacking securing toggles and control lines to risers. 

b. Remove control lines from toggle rings by untying overhand knots. 

Control Line

Guide Ring 

Riser

Overhand

Knot

Toggle Ring 

Tacking 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0026 00 

0026 00-2 

c. Remove control lines from guide rings on rear risers. 

d. Cut and remove tacking on risers below connector links. 

e. Loosen barrel nuts on connector links with 7

/16-inch open-end wrench. 

f. Remove connector links from risers. 

2. Attach canopy to risers as follows: 

a. Position the connector links. 

NOTE

Connector link barrel nuts must face inboard and tighten upward. 

Tacking

Connector Link 

Barrel Nut 

Riser
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0026 00 

0026 00-3/(4 Blank) 

b. Remove connector links and control lines from line organizing card and loosely connect 

connector links and control lines to proper riser. 

c. Using 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, tighten barrel nut on connector links 1⁄4 turn past hand tight. 

d. Hand tack each riser at connector link with one turn double tape lacing and tying below the 

connector link with an overhand knot. 

3. Perform follow-up procedures IAW WP 0005 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

Connector Link 

Tacking 

Riser

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0027 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

CROSSPORT MAIN OR RESERVE CANOPY 

0027 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Patching

x Searing 

x Replacing

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Knife, Hot Metal (Item 24, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Double Needle (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Template, Crossport, Oversized (Item 43, WP 0063 00) 

Template, Crossport, Standard (Item 44, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Cloth, Nylon, Ripstop, Type I (Item 9, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size A (Item 45, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition

Layout on packing table or 

other suitable area. 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Continuity check and canopy 

trim check

PATCHING CROSSPORTS 

1. Lay the rib area out on a worktable. 

2. Using basic patching procedures outlined in WP 0015 00, apply the patch to the crossport as 

required. 

3. Let the new fabric overhang the crossport on the fourth side of the patch. 

4. Using a light-duty sewing machine, sew the patch with two (2) rows of size E nylon thread, 7 to 11 

stitches per inch. 

5. Sew a lock stitch on the raw edge side of the patch a minimum of 2-inches on each row. 

Crossport

Fourth Side of 

Patch
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0027 00 

0027 00-2 

6. Position a standard template over the crossport aligning the template as close to the original cut out 

as possible. 

7. Remove the overhanging fabric from the crossport by searing the fourth side of the patch with a hot 

knife. 

SEARING CROSSPORTS 

Searing with a hot knife can repair crossports. Sear crossports as follows: 

1. The maximum rip cannot exceed 1⁄2-inch. 

2. Frayed crossports cannot exceed the oversized template. 

3. Lay the rib area on a non-burn surface such as a piece of tempered glass. 

4. Center the template and trace the inside with a hot knife. 

Standard

Template

Patched

Crossport
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0027 00 

0027 00-3/(4 Blank) 

5. Remove the rib from the tempered glass being careful not to pull the rib causing additional damage. 

REPLACING CROSSPORT 

1. Carefully cut and remove the rib from the bottom skin exposing the damaged crossport. 

2. Apply a basic patch as outlined in WP 0015 00. 

3. The patch must extend from the bottom of the rib to the top. 

NOTE

For replacing a crossport, a 1⁄4-inch needle gauge and a double 

needle sewing machine with cloth/fabric puller attachment is 

recommended. 

4. Using either a light-duty single needle sewing machine or a double needle light/medium-duty sewing 

machine with cloth/fabric puller attachment, re-sew the rib to the top and bottom skin using size E 

nylon thread, and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

5. Using a standard size template and hot knife, carefully cut a new crossport into the new fabric as 

close to the original construction as possible. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Seared

Crossport 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0028 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

STABILIZER LEFT OR RIGHT, MAIN OR RESERVE CANOPY 

0028 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Double Needle (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Stabilizer, Left (Item 13, WP 0068 00) 

Stabilizer, Right (Item 12, WP 0068 00) 

Tape, Nylon, 2-IN. Wide (Item 35, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or other 

suitable area.

REPLACE

1. Carefully cut and remove the bartack securing the suspension lines to the stabilizer. 

2. Carefully cut and remove the bartack securing the stabilizer. 

3. Remove the stabilizer. 

4. Obtain a replacement stabilizer from supply. 

5. If the new stabilizer does not have the 2-inch nylon tape on both sides, apply the tape on the two (2) 

most forward slider stops (B & C line only) using the following procedures: 

a. Cut a 9-inch piece of 2-inch nylon tape. Measure and fold webbing under 2 1⁄2-inches from each 

end forming a 4-inch length. 

4-INCHES
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0028 00 

0028 00-2 

b. Using a light-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch, sew the 2-

inch nylon tape to the inside of the stabilizer directly over the 2-inch tape on the outside. 

6. Using a double needle sewing machine with cloth puller, size E nylon thread, and 7 to 11 stitches per 

inch, re-sew the stabilizer to the canopy. 

7. Using a 42-stitch bartack sewing machine and size E nylon thread, bartack the stabilizer as close to 

the original construction and stitch formation as possible. 

8. Using a 42-stitch bartack sewing machine and size E nylon thread, bartack the suspension line and 

slider stops as close to the original construction and stitch formation as possible. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Nylon Tape Sewn Over 

Original Slider Stop 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0029 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

TAIL SEAM MAIN OR RESERVE CANOPY 

0029 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Material/Parts

Cloth, Nylon, Ripstop, Type I (Item 9, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44 WP 0076 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

REPAIR

CAUTION 

If needed, only one pleat between ribs is authorized on the 

top seam to align the ribs (pleat should be centered 

between two (2) ribs, with a maximum size of 1-inch). 

1. Patch the top skin or bottom skin as required using miscellaneous canopy patching 

procedures outlined in WP 0015 00. 

2. Carefully cut stitching securing the tail seam together. 

3. If required, carefully cut stitching securing the rib to the tail seam. 

4. If required, carefully cut the control line-attaching loop and lay aside. 

5. Re-sew items removed above, in reverse order, using a light-duty sewing machine, size E 

nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0030 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SLIDER MAIN AND RESERVE CANOPY 

0030 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Repair 

• Replace

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Die Set, Spur Grommet No. 8 (Item 13, WP 0063 00) 

Mallet, Rawhide (Item 27, WP 0063 00) 

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Pliers, Large, Diagonal Cut (Item 32, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Darning (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Medium-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00)

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, 7

/16-IN., Open End (Item 45, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Cloth, Nylon, Ripstop, Type I (Item 9, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size A (Item 45, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or 

other suitable area. Control 

lines removed from riser 

guide rings. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Initial receipt (WP 0004 00) 

REPAIR

Slider repair is limited to restitching, darning, patching (basic patch only), and grommet 

replacement. 

Restitching, darning, and patching. Repair slider by restitching, darning, or patching (basic patch 

only) in accordance with WP 0015 00. Darning is limited to two darns per slider; patching is 

limited to one basic patch per slider. 

REPLACE

1. Grommet replace. Replace damaged grommets as follows: 

NOTE

No reinforcement of fabric around grommet hole is 

permitted. If a grommet cannot be replaced without 

reinforcement, slider replacement is required. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0030 00 

Change 1 0030 00-2 

a. Cut crimped edge of damaged grommet at three or four points. 

b. Remove grommet and washer. 

c. Lock replacement grommet and grommet washers in place with die set. 

2. Replace unserviceable slider as follows: 

a. Cut and remove tacking from risers. 

b. Using a 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, loosen barrel nuts on connector links and remove 

risers. 

c. Remove connector links and control lines from risers. 

d. Remove slider from suspension lines and control lines. 

NOTE

Ensure 28-inch side of slider faces to front or leading edge of canopy. 

Connector Link 

Barrel Nut 

Riser

Tacking
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0030 00 

0030 00-3 Change 1 

Right Left “A” Group “A” Group

e. Insert suspension lines, control lines, and connector links through corresponding 

grommets on slider. Slider is installed with reinforcement tapes facing toward canopy. 

f. Position connector links so that barrels face inboard and tighten upward. 

Reinforcement Tapes 

Toward Canopy

Right “C” 

Group and Right 

Control Line

Left “C” 

Group and Left 

Control Line

NOTE: Left Front Riser Link Shown Inboard 

Barrel Nut

28-IN.

27-IN.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0030 00 

Change 1 0030 00-4 

g. Install risers onto applicable connector links. 

h. Using a 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, tighten barrel nuts on connector links 1⁄4 turn past 

hand tight. 

i. Hand-tack each riser at connector link with one turn double nylon lacing tape. 

j. Perform follow-up procedure (WPs 0005 00 and 0006 00). 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Connector Link

Barrel Nut 

Riser

Tacking
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0031 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SLIDER STOP MAIN AND RESERVE CANOPY 

0031 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Materials

Tape, Nylon, 2-IN. Wide (Item 35, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Textile & Webbing, 3

/8-IN. Wide (Item 39, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or other 

suitable area.

REPAIR

NOTE

Mark a line at the bottom edge of the stabilizer before removing. 

This will aid in the re-attachment of the stabilizer. 

1. Carefully cut and remove bartack stitching securing suspension line to stabilizer. Should the 

suspension line sustain damage during removal, it must be replaced IAW WP 0055 00. 

2. Remove the 2-inch nylon tape. 

3. Remove enough of the horizontal and vertical 3

/8-inch nylon tape to expose the damaged area and 

allow for patching. 

4. Patch the stabilizer using procedures outlined in WP 0015 00 applying a basic or miscellaneous 

patch.

5. Ensure the patch is sewn to the inside of the stabilizer panel (the side the suspension line is sewn to). 

6. Re-sew the vertical 3

/8-inch nylon tape back into place, using a light-duty sewing machine, size E 

nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

7. Re-sew the horizontal 3

/8-inch nylon tape back into place using a light-duty sewing machine, size E 

nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0031 00 

0031 00-2 

8. Cut a 9-inch piece of 2-inch nylon tape. Measure and fold webbing under 2 1⁄2-inches from each end 

forming a 4-inch length. 

9. Position the plastic slider stop between the top two layers of the 2-inch webbing. 

10. Using a light-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to11 stitches per inch, sew the slider 

stop to the previously patched area on the outside of stabilizer ensuring the slider stop is positioned 

on the correct side of the vertical 3

/8-inch nylon tape (the first two plastic slider stops are on the rear of 

the vertical 3

/8-inch nylon tape, the last plastic slider stop is to the front of the vertical 3/8-inch nylon 

tape). Ensure the 2-inch nylon tape is of equal distance on each side of the vertical 3

/8-inch nylon 

tape.

11. Obtain an additional 9-inch piece of 2-inch nylon tape from supply stock and fold it in the same 

manner as stated in step 8., above. 

12. Using a light-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch, sew the 2-inch 

nylon tape to the inside of the stabilizer, directly over the 2-inch tape on the outside of the stabilizer. 

4-INCHES
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0031 00 

0031 00-3/(4 Blank) 

13. Using a 42-stitch bartack sewing machine and size E nylon thread, bartack the suspension 

line back into place in accordance with original construction and stitch formation. 

NOTE

Stabilizer float is 1⁄2-inch on B line, 1-inch on C line and 1 1⁄2-

inches on D line. 

14. Using a 42-stitch bartack sewing machine and size E nylon thread, bartack the slider stop on 

the three sides of the 2-inch nylon tape in accordance with original construction and stitch 

formation.

END OF WORK PACKAGE

Suspension Line 

Bartack

Slider Stop 

(Inside) 

Bartacks

REAR SLIDER 

STOP 

MIDDLE

SLIDER STOP

FRONT SLIDER 

STOP 

Bartacks

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0032 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

CONNECTOR LINKS MAIN AND RESERVE CANOPY 

0032 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, 7

/16-IN., Open End (Item 45, WP 0063 00)

Materials/Parts 

Link, Connector (Item 7, WP 0069 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00)

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Initial receipt (WPs 0005 00 and 

0006 00)

REPLACE

1. Cut and remove tacking from risers. 

2. Using a 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, loosen barrel nuts on connector links and remove risers. 

3. Remove suspension lines from connector links and discard unserviceable links. 

Connector Link 

Barrel Nut 

Riser

Tacking
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0032 00 

0032 00-2 

4. Position replacement links so that barrels face Inboard and tighten upward. Attach suspension lines 

to their corresponding connector links without crossing. 

5. Install risers onto applicable connector links. 

6. Using a 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, tighten barrel nuts on connector links 1⁄4 turn past hand tight. 

7. Hand tack each riser at connector link with one turn double, tape, lacing and tying. 

8. Perform follow-up procedure (WPs 0005 00 and 0006 00). 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

NOTE: Left Front Riser Link Shown Inboard 

Barrel

Connector Link 

Barrel Nut 

Riser

Tacking
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0033 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN RISERS 

0033 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, Open End, 7

/16-IN. (Item 45, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Riser Set, Main, 3-Ring (Item 11, WP 0065 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Initial receipt (WP 0006 00)

REPLACE

NOTE

Risers will be replaced in pairs. 

1. Remove overhand knots on rear riser control toggles. 

Guide Ring

Control Line

Toggle Ring

Control Toggle

Overhand 

Knots 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0033 00 

Change 1 0033 00-2 

2. Pull control lines up through toggle rings and guide rings. 

3. Cut and remove tacking from unserviceable risers. 

4. Using a 7

/16-inch open end wrench, loosen barrel nuts on connector links and remove risers. 

5. Open snap fastener on reserve static line shackle. 

Connector Link

Barrel Nut 

Riser

Tacking

Snap Fastener

Reserve Static

Line Shackle

Static Line
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0033 00 

0033 00-3 Change 1 

6. Remove static line from shackle. 

7. Pull main canopy release ripcord. This allows the two rings on the risers to disengage from base ring 

and complete removal of risers. 

8. Test replacement risers in accordance with WP 0011 00. 

9. Compare replacement risers, ensuring there is not more than 1

/2-inch difference in length. 

CAUTION

Ensure Clearslip #2TM Silicone Lubricant does not come in contact 

with any textile surface of the MC-4 RAPPS. 

10. Apply a small amount of Clearslip #2TM silicone lubricant to a clean dry rag and wipe each single point 

release cable several times. Allow a few moments for evaporation. Route main canopy release 

cables through appropriate housings. Mate hook fastener on main canopy release ripcord to pile 

fastener on main ripcord pocket. 

Main Canopy 

Release Cables 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0033 00 

Change 1 0033 00-4 

11. Position left riser on left side of harness and right riser on right side of harness. 

12. Position medium sized ring on riser behind and through base ring on harness; then rotate upward. 

13. Position small ring on riser behind and through medium sized ring on riser; then rotate upward. 

Medium-Size

Riser Ring

Base Ring

Small Riser Ring

Medium Riser Ring
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0033 00 

0033 00-5 Change 1 

14. Route locking loop over and through small ring, then down through grommet on riser. 

15. Route locking loop through end fitting of main canopy release housing. Ensure flat portion of end 

fitting is against riser. Route main canopy release cable through locking loop. 

Locking Loop

Small Ring

Grommet

Main Canopy 

Release Cable 

Locking Loop

Main Canopy 

Release Housing

End Fitting
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0033 00 

Change 1 0033 00-6 

NOTE

Ensure riser locking loop is not twisted. 

16. Pull main canopy release cable completely through locking loop and stow in channel provided on 

riser. 

17. Repeat steps 9. through 16. to attach the other riser. 

18. Install static line in shackle and close snap fastener. 

Main Canopy Release 

Locking Loop 

Channel

Snap Fastener

Reserve Static

Line Shackle

Static Line
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0033 00 

0033 00-7/(8 Blank) Change 1 

19. Attach main risers to the main canopy IAW WP 0006 00. 

20. Perform follow-up procedure (WP 0006 00). 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0034 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN CANOPY RELEASE CABLE CHANNEL 

0034 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Tape, Nylon, Type III, Class I, 3

/4-IN. Wide (Item 37, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or 

other suitable area.

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

REPAIR

If loose or broken threads are present, restitch with size E nylon thread in accordance with WP 0015 00. 

REPLACE

Replace damaged release cable channel as follows: 

1. Remove damaged nylon tape by carefully removing stitching securing it to riser. 

Nylon Tape 

Nylon Tape 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0034 00 

0034 00-2 

2. Using a 7-inch length of nylon tape, locate replacement tape directly over location where 

previously removed. 

3. Fold ends of tape under 1⁄2-inch and sew in place using a light-duty sewing machine, size E 

nylon thread, 7 to 11 stitches per inch. Stitch over edge; then backstitch 1⁄2-inch. 

A A

SECTION A-A

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Riser

Tape

1⁄2-IN. Riser 1⁄2-IN.

6-IN.

Connector Link End 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0035 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

RISER HOOK AND PILE TAPES 

0035 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Fastener Tape, Hook, 1-IN. Wide, Type II, Class 1 (Item 15, WP 0076 00) 

Fastener Tape, Pile, 1-IN. Wide, Type II, Class 1 (Item 16, WP 0076 00) 

Fastener Tape, Pile, 2-IN. Wide, Type II, Class 1 (Item 17, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute 

Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing 

table or other suitable 

area.

REPAIR

If loose or broken threads are present, restitch with size E nylon thread in accordance with WP 0015 00. 

REPLACE

Replace damaged hook and pile tapes as follows: 

NOTE

Damaged hook and pile tapes must be replaced in complete lengths. 

1. Remove damaged tape by carefully removing stitching securing it to keeper. 

2. Locate replacement tape directly over location where previously removed. 

3. Sew in place with a light-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch using 

original stitch pattern. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0036 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SUSPENSION LINE ATTACHING LOOP 

0036 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

INITIAL SETUP:

Tools

Sewing Machine, Double Box-X (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Ink, Marking (Item 25/26, WP 0076 00)

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or 

other suitable area. 

REPAIR

1. If loose or broken threads are present, restitch with size E nylon thread in accordance with WP 

0015 00. 

2. The suspension line-attaching loop may need to be removed and reattached in order to repair a 

portion of the damaged canopy. Remove and reattach the suspension line attaching loop as 

follows: 

a. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark the original location of the 

suspension line-attaching loop using the adjoining loaded rib as a guide to determine where to 

reattach the suspension line-attaching loop. 

b. Using the stitch removal tool, carefully remove the suspension line attachment loop from the 

canopy. 

c. Repair canopy damage as outlined in the applicable WP. 

d. Using a double box-X pattern sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 56 stitches per inch, 

reattach the suspension line-attaching loop over the original stitch pattern location previously 

marked.

e. Perform continuity check IAW WP 0005 00 or WP 0006 00 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Double Box-X

Stitch Pattern

Suspension Line 

Attaching Loop 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

HARNESS/CONTAINER 

0037 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Repair 

• Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Bit, Drill, 5

/8-IN., Countersink (Item 3, WP 0063 00) 

Drill, Electric, 3

/8-IN. Drive (Item 14, WP 0063 00) 

Grommet Setting, Stainless Steel (Item 17/18, WP 0063 00) 

Knife (Item 23, WP 0063 00) 

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Darning (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Double Needle (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Medium-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Medium-Duty Zig-zag (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Zig-zag (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

AAD Junction Plate (Item 15, WP 0071 00) 

Cloth, Duck, Textured Nylon, CG (Item 7, WP 0076 00) 

Fastener Tape, Hook, 1-IN. Wide (Item 15, WP 0076 00) 

Fastener Tape, Pile, 1-IN. Wide (Item 16, WP 0076 00) 

Flap Assembly Reserve (Item 26, WP 0071 00) 

Stiffener, Left Flap (Item 18, WP 0071 00) 

Stiffener, Main Bottom Flap (Item 13, WP 0071 00) 

Stiffener, Main Top Flap (Item 14, WP 0071 00) 

Stiffener, Main, Right Flap (Item 17, WP 0071 00) 

Stiffener, Reserve (Item 25, WP 0071 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Nylon (Binding), 3⁄4-IN. (Item 37, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size FF (Item 42, WP 0076 00) 

Webbing, Elastic, 1-IN. (Item 47, WP 0076 00)

Webbing, Textile, Nylon, Type VII (Item 49, WP 0076 00)

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area. Canopy deployed. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Service upon receipt (WP 0004 00) 

REPAIR

Repair. Patching harness/container. 

1. Small holes that are too large for darns can be patched using basic patching procedures as stated in 

WP 0015 00. 

2. All patches are to be applied to the outside of the container. 

3. Container fabric to be darned will be in areas of double nylon duck fabric. The damaged area may 

not exceed 1⁄2-inch and stitching will extend 1⁄4-inch beyond the damage. A maximum of two (2) darns 

per flap/panel, not closer than 4-inches to each other, is authorized. Accomplish machine darning 

IAW WP 0015 00 and the above limitations. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

Change 1 0037 00-2 

REPLACE

1. Replace unserviceable components of the harness/container as follows: 

a. Remove unserviceable harness/container as follows: 

(1) Open snap fastener on reserve static line shackle and remove static line from 

shackle. 

(2) Pull main canopy release ripcord. This allows the two rings on the risers to 

disengage from base ring, completing removal of main risers. 

Shackle

Snap Fastener

Static Line

Riser Rings

Base Ring

Main Canopy 

Release Ripcord 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

0037 00-3 Change 1 

(3) On reserve risers, remove control lines from toggle rings by untying overhand knots. 

(4) Pull control lines through guide rings on rear risers. 

(5) Cut and remove tacking from risers. 

Control Line 

Guide Ring 

Riser

Toggle Ring

Overhand Knot

Tacking

Connector Link 

Barrel Nut

Riser
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

Change 1 0037 00-4 

(6) Using a 7/16-inch open-end wrench, loosen barrel nuts on connector links. 

(7) Remove connector links from risers. 

(8) Reattach a serviceable harness/container IAW WP 0005 00 and WP 0006 00. 

b. Main Parachute Compartment. Replace top flap, bottom flap, left flap and right flap pack 

stiffeners as follows: 

(1) Replace the top flap pack stiffener as follows: 

(a) Cut stitching and remove plastic pack stiffener from container. 

(b) Obtain a new pack stiffener from supply stock. 

(c) Reattach the new pack stiffener to the container using a medium-duty zigzag 

sewing machine, size FF thread, and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

(2) Replace bottom and left flap pack stiffeners as follows: 

(a) Remove the No. 0 grommet IAW WP 0038 00. 

(b) Cut the single row of straight stitching on the inside of the container exposing 

the plastic pack stiffener. 

(c) Remove broken stiffener. 

(d) Obtain a new stiffener from supply stock. 

(e) Replace the grommet IAW WP 0038 00. 

NOTE

Ensure the pre-cut hole for the grommet is large enough to 

accommodate a new grommet. If not, enlarge the hole 

using a 5

/8-inch countersink drill and 5/8-inch drill bit as 

required. 

(f) Replace stiffener and set a new grommet ensuring the grommet is rolled over 

washer and the washer is on the inside of the container. 

(g) Using a medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches 

per inch, replace the single row of straight stitching removed in step (b), above. 

(3) Replace right flap pack stiffener as follows: 

(a) Remove lacing tape on base plate. 

(b) Remove the No. 2 grommet. 

(c) Cut the single row of straight stitching on the inside of the container exposing 

the clear plastic. 

(d) Remove broken plastic stiffener. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

0037 00-5 Change 1 

(e) Obtain a new stiffener from supply stock. 

NOTE

Ensure the pre-cut hole for the grommet is large enough to 

accommodate a new grommet. If not, enlarge the hole 

using a 5

/8-inch countersink drill and 5/8-inch drill bit as 

required. 

(f) Replace stiffener and re-sew straight stitches removed in step (c) above, using a 

medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

(g) Replace AAD Junction plate grommet and washer. Set the grommet ensuring 

the grommet is rolled over washer and that the washer is to the inside of the 

container. 

(h) Align the AAD Junction plate with the tacking holes on the container. 

(i) Hand tack AAD Junction plate to the container using procedures outlined in WP 

0045 00. 

c. Reserve Parachute Compartment. Replace top flap, bottom flap, left flap and right flap 

pack stiffeners as follows: 

(1) Replace the top flap pack stiffener as follows: 

(a) Remove approximately 2-inches of stitching that secures the hook and pile 

fastener tape on each side of the container. 

(b) Carefully cut and remove only the upper tacking securing the reserve ripcord 

housing to the container. 

(c) Carefully cut and remove the tacking securing the main canopy release ripcord 

housings. 

(d) Remove the short housing and set aside, remove only the 3⁄4-inch keepers and 

set aside. 

(e) Cut stitching and remove the ripcord protector flap. 

(f) Carefully cut stitching on the 3⁄4-inch binding tape, which secures the pack 

stiffener to the container. 

(g) Remove plastic stiffener from container. 

(h) Using a medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches 

per inch, re-sew the main cable-housing keeper to the center of the container 

with one row of stitching. 

(i) Obtain a new stiffener from supply stock. 

(j) Using a medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches 

per inch, re-sew the new stiffener to the top of the container. 

(k) Remove all excess thread from the 3⁄4-inch binding tape and re-sew the tape 

back into place using a medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 

to 11 stitches per inch. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

Change 1 0037 00-6 

(l) If the binding tape was damaged during removal, replace the damaged area as 

required using a double needle sewing machine with 3⁄4-inch binding attachment, 

size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

(m) Using a medium-duty zig-zag sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 

stitches per inch, reattach the protector flap to the container in accordance with 

the original stitch formation. 

(n) Using a medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches 

per inch, re-sew the hook and pile fastener tape removed in step (a) above. 

(o) Reroute the long and short housings and tack back into place using procedures 

outlined in WP 0042 00. 

(p) Re-tack reserve ripcord housing IAW WP 0043 00. 

d. Replacing Ripcord Protector Flap. Replace the ripcord protector flap as follows: 

(1) Remove approximately 2-inches of stitching that secures the hook and pile 

fastener tape on each side of the container. 

(2) Carefully cut and remove only the upper tacking securing the reserve ripcord 

housing to the container. 

(3) Carefully cut and remove the tacking securing the main canopy release ripcord 

housings. 

(4) Remove the short housing and set aside, remove only the 3⁄4-inch keepers and set 

aside. 

(5) Cut stitching and remove the ripcord protector flap. 

(6) Obtain a new protector flap from supply stock. 

(7) Using a medium-duty zig-zag sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 

stitches per inch, reattach the protector flap to the container in accordance with 

the original and stitch formation. 

(8) Using a medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches 

per inch, re-sew the hook and pile fastener tape removed in step (1) above. 

(9) Reroute the long and short housings and tack back into place using procedures 

outlined in WP 0042 00. 

(10) Re-tack reserve ripcord housing IAW WP 0043 00. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

0037 00-7 Change 1 

e. Replace Waistband. Replace waistband as follows: 

(1) Carefully cut the stitching at the bottom of the container securing the back pad to 

the container exposing the waistband. 

(2) Carefully cut the zig-zag stitching securing the back straps to the container. 

(3) Carefully cut the zig-zag stitching on the left flap, which secures the waistband 

end adjuster. 

(4) Carefully cut the boxed stitch formation, which secures the waistband to the 

container. 

(5) Remove the type VIII nylon from the friction adapter located on the FF-2 pocket 

flap and remove the waistband. 

(6) Obtain an appropriate length of type VII nylon webbing from supply stock. 

(7) Using the old waistband, mark the new waistband where it is to be sewn to the 

container. 

(8) Using a medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to11 stitches per 

inch, sew the box stitch formation securing the waistband to the container. 

(9) Using a medium-duty zig-zag sewing machine, size FF nylon thread and 7 to 11 

stitches per inch, sew the back straps back into place. 

(10) Using a medium-duty zig-zag sewing machine, size FF nylon thread and 7 to 11 

stitches per inch, secure the waistband end adjuster to the left flap. 

(11) Replace the type VIII nylon removed in item (5) above. 

(12) Using a medium-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches 

per inch, re-sew the back pad to the container. 

(13) Using a medium-duty zig-zag sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 

stitches per inch, re-sew the zig-zag stitching on both sides of each back strap. 

f. Replace Slack Retainer. Replace slack retainer as follows: 

NOTE

If the waistband extension (02 pocket) slack retainer is 

unserviceable, the use of a retainer band may be used to 

secure the waistband extension temporarily in lieu of the 02 

slack retainer until such time as the slack retainer can be 

replaced. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

Change 1 0037 00-8 

(1) Carefully cut and remove damaged slack retainer. 

(2) Cut a 2 1⁄2-inch length of 1-inch elastic webbing. Using a searing device, sear 

running ends of tape. 

(3) Using a double needle sewing machine with a binding attachment, size E nylon 

thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch, bind the raw edge of the elastic webbing with 

3⁄4-inch binding tape. 

(4) Using a medium-duty zig-zag sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 

stitches per inch, sew the new slack retainer to the flap of the container as close 

to the original position, construction and stitch formation as possible. 

g. Harness/Container Hook and Pile Tapes. Repair/replace harness/container hook and 

pile tapes as follows: 

(1) Repair. If loose or broken threads are present, restitch with size E nylon thread in 

accordance with WP 0015 00. 

(2) Replacement. Replace damaged hook and pile tapes as follows: 

NOTE

Damaged hook and pile tapes must be replaced in complete 

lengths. 

(a) Remove damaged tape by carefully removing stitching securing it to container. 

(b) Locate replacement tape directly over location where previously removed. 

(c) Sew in place with light-duty sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 

stitches per inch using original stitch pattern. 

h. Hook and Pile Tape on Ripcord Protector Flap. Replace hook and pile tape on ripcord 

protector flap as follows: 

NOTE

Stitching will be visible on the flap after the hook and pile 

tape is replaced on the pack stiffener. 

(1) Remove unserviceable hook and pile tape as required. 

(2) Replace hook and pile tape as required and sew using a medium-duty sewing 

machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

i. Hook and Pile Tape on the Pack Stiffener. Replace hook and pile tape on the pack 

stiffener as follows: 

(1) Remove unserviceable hook and pile tape as required. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

0037 00-9 Change 1 

(2) Replace hook and pile tape as required and sew using a medium-duty sewing 

machine, size E nylon thread, and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

j. AR2 Power Cable Sleeve. Replace AR2 Power Cable Sleeve as follows: 

(1) Cut a 18 inch length of Tape, Nylon, Type III, OD, 3⁄4-inch wide binding tape. 

(2) Cut and sear an 16 1⁄2-inch x 3-inch piece of green, textured nylon duck cloth. 

(3) On the 3-inch length, fold ends under 1⁄2-inch and sew with a light-duty sewing 

machine, type 301, and size E nylon thread, 7 to 11 stitches per inch. Backstitch 

not less than 1

/2-inch.

(4) With raw edges inside, fold in half, lengthwise. Join folded fabric together using 

3⁄4-inch green nylon binding tape. Equal the excess length of binding tape on both 

ends of the sleeve. Sew one (1) row with a light-duty sewing machine, type 301, 

and size E nylon thread, 7 to 11 stitches per inch. Backstitch not less than 1

/2-

inch.

(5) Pre-mark sleeve on both sides of binding tape. Starting from one end, measure 

1-inch, 7 1⁄2-inches and 8 1⁄2-inches. From the other end, measure 1-inch. 

3-IN

16 1⁄2-IN 

15 1⁄2-IN 

1/2-IN
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

Change 1 0037 00-10 

NOTE

Prior to installing the AR2 power cable sleeve, the main and 

reserve parachutes must be completely unpacked. 

(6) Position harness/container assembly on work surface with pack tray facing down 

and AR2 padded pocket at the bottom right. 

(7) Stitch AR2 power cable sleeve to harness/container assembly seam that secures 

the reserve compartment side panel and top to back panel as follows: 

NOTE

Ensure reserve container flap is clear of sewing area. 

(8) Measure and mark 2-inches from center of the power cable opening located at the 

top of the harness/container assembly between the risers. 

(9) Align the TOP end of the AR2 power cable sleeve end with the harness/container 

assembly’s 2-inch mark. 

(10) Fold under the excess binding tape and stitch AR2 power cable sleeve to the 

container with three (3) continuous rows of backstitching from the end of the 

sleeve to the 1-inch mark with a medium-duty sewing machine, type 301, and size 

FF thread, 6 to 9 stitches per inch. 

(11) The portion of the sleeve (approximately 6 1⁄2-inches) to the 7 1⁄2-inch location 

mark, as identified in the illustration below, is not attached to the container. 

(12) Align the 7 1⁄2-inch location mark on the AR2 power cable sleeve with the top of 

the harness/container assembly weapon tie down loop. 

(13) At this location, stitch remainder of AR2 power cable sleeve to harness/container 

assembly with three (3) continuous rows of backstitching for 1-inch. 

(14) Fold under excess binding tape. Sew remainder of the sleeve (approximately 8 

inches) to the container and finish with a total of three (3) continuous rows of 1-

inch backstitching. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0037 00 

0037 00-11/(12 Blank) Change 1 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0038 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

GROMMETS 

0038 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Die Sets, Spur Grommet, Size 0 (Items 17, WP 0063 00) 

Die Sets, Spur Grommet, Size 2 (Items 18, WP 0063 00) 

Die Sets, Spur Grommet, Size 5 (Items 12, WP 0063 00) 

File, Flat, 1-IN. (Item 15, WP 0063 00) 

Knife, Hot, Metal (Item 24, WP 0063 00) 

Mallet, Rawhide (Item 27, WP 0063 00) 

Pliers, Large, Diagonal Cut (Item 32, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Medium-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or 

other suitable area.

Materials/Parts 

Cloth, Abrasive (Item 6, WP 0076 00) 

Grommets, Rolled Rim, Spur Washer, No. 0, 305 Stainless Steel (Items 23, WP 0076 00) 

Grommets, Rolled Rim, Spur Washer, No. 2, 305 Stainless Steel (Items 24, WP 0076 00) 

Grommets, Rolled Rim, Spur Washer, No. 5,Type III, Class 2 (Items 22, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Webbing, Nylon, Type II (Item 48, WP 0076 00)

REPAIR

Repair grommets as follows: 

1. Remove burrs, rough spots, rust, or corrosion from an installed grommet by filing with a file or 

by buffing with an abrasive cloth. 

2. Reseat a loose grommet using procedures listed in the REPLACE procedures detailed below. 

3. If fabric area around original grommet has been damaged, repair area by applying a 

reinforcement patch to outside of flap. Use a 1-inch square of seared type II nylon webbing. 

NOTE

Reinforcement is allowed only on the bottom, left, and right 

closing flaps of the reserve parachute container. 

REPLACE

Replace grommets as follows: 

1. Remove original grommet as follows: 

a. Using suitable type tool, lift edge of original washer at one point. 

b. Grip lifted washer edge with diagonal cutters and roll washer edge back to lift washer 

from original grommet. Remove original grommet from material. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0038 00 

0038 00-2 

2. Insert barrel of replacement grommet through accommodating hole in material and ensure 

grommet flange is located on same side of material as original grommet. 

3. Position the grommet on the die with barrel facing up and place washer over grommet barrel. 

Ensure grommet barrel and washer are aligned to prevent off-center setting of grommet. 

4. Using a punch and rawhide mallet or other non-steel impact device, spread grommet barrel 

by hammering until barrel collar is rolled down smooth on washer. If grommet barrel splits 

during hammering, remove and replace installed grommet with a serviceable item from stock. 

Repeat the procedure in steps 2. and 3., above. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0039 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SNAP FASTENERS 

0039 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Anvil, Chuck Fastener (Item 1, WP 0063 00) 

Chuck (Items 6/7, WP 0063 00) 

Die (Items 8/9, WP 0063 00) 

Holder, Die Fastener (Item 20, WP 0063 00) 

Key, Socket Head Set (Item 22, WP 0063 00) 

Knife, Hot Metal (Item 24, WP 0063 00) 

Mallet, Rawhide (Item 27, WP 0063 00) 

Pliers, Large, Diagonal Cut (Item 32, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Medium-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Fastener, Snap, Button (Item 18, WP 0076 00) 

Fastener, Snap, Eyelet (Item 19, WP 0076 00) 

Fastener, Snap, Socket (Item 20, WP 0076 00) 

Fastener, Snap, Stud (Item 21, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Webbing, Nylon, Type II (Item 48, WP 0076 00)

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

REPAIR

Snap fastener repair is limited to reseating which will be accomplished using the applicable procedures 

and tools prescribed in the replace procedures detailed below. 

REPLACE

A snap fastener that is defective or cannot be reseated will be replaced with a serviceable item from 

stock. However, if only one part of a fastener is defective, such as the socket or stud, just that particular 

portion of the fastener assembly requires replacement. Replace a damaged snap fastener as follows: 

1. Original snap fastener removal. 

a. Cut crimped edge of applicable snap fastener assembly part at three or four points with diagonal 

cutters. 

b. Using a suitable type tool, pry back fastener crimped edges and remove applicable defective 

fastener parts. 

NOTE

Reinforcement is not authorized on the inner top main container 

closing flap or in the area of the left riser static line snap fastener. 

2. Reinforcement of original snap fastener area. If fabric area around original snap fastener is damaged, 

repair area by applying a reinforcement patch to the outside of the material. Use a 1-inch square of 

seared type II nylon webbing. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0039 00 

0039 00-2 

3. Hand-held method. Proceed as follows: 

a. Place selected chuck in open end of holder and secure chuck in place using locking screw 

located on one side of holder. Then place the die into anvil. 

NOTE

In most instances, a chuck will be installed in the hand held holder 

and a die will be placed in the anvil. However, there may be some 

occasions that require the location of the chuck and die to be 

reversed. This situation may also apply to the hand or foot operated 

press. 

b. Fit socket or stud, as applicable, on chuck lower end. Place cap or post, as applicable, on die 

with barrel facing up. 

c. Position material over barrel of cap or post. Ensure that fastener socket or stud is located on 

proper side of material for subsequent fastener engagement. 

d. Place socket or stud on barrel of cap or post. With a mallet, strike holder, clinching the two snap 

fastener components to material. 

e. Remove clinched snap fastener components from chuck and die set and check seating of joined 

components. If applicable components are not properly seated, repeat procedures in step d., 

above.

Holder

Socket

Die

Anvil 

Locking Screw

Chuck

Cap
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0039 00 

0039 00-3/(4 Blank) 

f. Check engagement of installed snap fastener components with opposite mating components to 

ensure open and closed snapping process without hindrance. If snap engaging process cannot 

be accomplished without difficulty, replace opposite mating snap fastener components using 

procedures in steps a. through e., above. As required, remove chuck and die from applicable 

snap fastener tools by reversing procedures in step 1., above. 

4. Hand or foot operated press method. Installation of a snap fastener assembly by hand or foot 

operated press may be accomplished using the procedures in step 3., above, except one uses the 

hand or foot to press the two pieces together, and the chuck and die will be secured within the 

applicable press assembly using the available locking screws. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Hand-operated Press 

Locking Screw

Chuck

Die

Locking Screw

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0040 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN RIPCORD POCKET 

0040 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Zig-Zag (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Pocket, Main Ripcord (Item 23, WP 0071 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable 

area. Main ripcord and main canopy release 

ripcord removed. 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Ripcord Pin Pull-Force Check (WP 0014 00).

REPAIR

Main ripcord pocket repair is limited to restitching. Restitch over original stitch pattern using size E nylon 

thread, and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

REPLACE

Replace an unserviceable main ripcord pocket as follows: 

1. Carefully remove stitching (straight and zig-zag) attaching main ripcord pocket to container. Remove 

unserviceable pocket. 

Zig-Zag or Bartack 

Stitching 

Straight

Stitching
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0040 00 

0040 00-2 

2. Place replacement ripcord pocket in position on container directly over position of removed pocket. 

Pocket is installed under tape on outside edge of container. 

3. Using a light-duty sewing machine and size E nylon thread, sew in place on inside and outside edges 

of container using two (2) rows of stitching, 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

4. Reinforce the four (4) corners with either a zig-zag or bartack sewing machine (type 308 stitching), 

size E nylon thread, 8 to12 stitches per inch. 

5. Perform follow-up procedure (WP 0014 00). 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0041 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

RESERVE RIPCORD POCKET 

0041 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Repair 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Zig-Zag (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Pocket, Reserve Ripcord (Item 21, WP 0071 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable area. 

Reserve ripcord removed. 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Ripcord Pin Pull-Force Check (WP 0013 00).

REPAIR

Reserve ripcord pocket repair is limited to restitching. Restitch over original stitch pattern using nylon thread, 

size E, 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

REPLACE

Replace an unserviceable reserve ripcord pocket as follows: 

1. Carefully remove stitching (straight and zig-zag) attaching reserve ripcord pocket to container. Remove 

unserviceable pocket. 

Zig-Zag or Bartack 

Stitching 

Straight

Stitching
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0041 00 

0041 00-2 

2. Place replacement ripcord pocket in position on container directly over position of removed pocket. Pocket 

is installed under tape on outside edge of container. 

3. Using a light-duty sewing machine and size E nylon thread, sew in place on inside and outside edges of 

container using two rows of stitching, 7 to11 stitches per inch. 

4. Reinforce the four corners with either a zig-zag or bartack sewing machine (type 308 stitching), size E nylon 

thread, 8 to12 stitches per inch. 

5. Perform follow-up procedure (WP 0013 00). 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0042 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN CANOPY RELEASE RIPCORD AND HOUSING 

0042 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Housing, Main Release, Long (Item 20 WP 0071 00) 

Housing, Main Release, Short (Item 24, WP 0071 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

REPLACE

1. Pull main release ripcord from its keeper and remove ripcord from housings. 

2. Carefully cut and remove tacking securing housings in harness keeper. 

3. Remove short housing from keeper. 

Riser Rings 

Base Ring 

Main Canopy 

Release Ripcord
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0042 00 

0042 00-2 

4. Open hook and pile tapes to expose long housing. 

5. Carefully cut and remove tacking securing long housing to upper harness diagonal. 

6. Pull long housing through keepers and remove from harness. 

7. Route replacement long housing through four harness keepers and behind attachment point of upper 

harness diagonal and container. 

8. Position housing so that 5 1⁄4-inches exists between center of terminal fitting and inside edge of upper 

harness diagonal. 

9. Tack housing in position from underside of upper harness diagonal strap. Use two (2) turns of nylon 

tape, lacing and tying, doubled. Secure with a surgeon’s knot and locking knot. Trim free ends 3⁄4-

inch from knot. 

Upper

Harness

Diagonal 

Tacking 

Long 

Housing 

Short

Housing 

Keeper

Harness

Keeper
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0042 00 

0042 00-3/(4 Blank) 

Tacking 

Long 

Housing

5 1⁄4-IN. 

10. Position replacement short housing and opposite end of long housing in keeper next to main ripcord 

pocket. Tack housings in place from rear of keeper. Use tape, lacing and tying, doubled. Make one 

turn around short housing, three turns around both housings, then one turn around long housing. 

Secure with surgeon’s knot and locking knot. Trim free ends 3⁄4-inch from knot. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

Tacking

Keeper

Short

Housing

Keeper

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0043 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

RESERVE RIPCORD HOUSING 

0043 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Housing, Ripcord, Reserve, 11-IN. (Item 19, WP 0071 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area.

REPLACE

1. Remove reserve ripcord grip from pocket and pull, removing ripcord cable from housing. 

2. Carefully cut and remove two (2) tackings securing housing to container and remove housing. 

Housing

Tacking 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0043 00 

0043 00-2 

3. Insert replacement ripcord housing through cover on container. 

4. Tack lower end of housing in position from underside of container. Use five, turns of nylon lacing 

tape, doubled. Fifth turn is placed over fourth turn around groove in ferrule. Secure with surgeon’s 

knot and locking knot. Trim free ends 3⁄4-inch from knot. 

5. Leaving 1-inch of housing free to flex, tack other end of housing in position from underside of 

container. Use five (5) turns of nylon lacing tape, doubled. Fifth turn is placed over fourth turn at 

ferrule end. Secure with surgeon’s knot and locking nut. Trim free ends 3⁄4-inch from knot. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Tacking 

Cover 

Tacking

1-IN.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0044 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAIN RIPCORD HOUSING 

0044 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Housing, Ripcord, 33-IN. (Item 12, WP 0071 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00)

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable 

area.

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

REPLACE

1. Remove main ripcord grip from pocket and pull, removing ripcord cable from housing. 

2. Carefully cut and remove tacking at upper end of housing. 

Tacking 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0044 00 

0044 00-2 

3. At lower end of housing, carefully cut and remove tacking from housing and housing cover. Remove 

housing from cover. 

4. Insert replacement ripcord housing through cover on container. Align upper end of housing with end 

of housing cover and tack in place from underside of cover. Use four turns of tape, lacing and tying, 

doubled. Secure with surgeon’s knot and locking knot. Trim free ends 3⁄4-inch from knot. 

Tacking 

Four Turns Tape, Lacing

and Tying, Doubled
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0044 00 

0044 00-3/(4 Blank) 

5. Tack other end of cover around housing with one turn of tape, lacing and tying, doubled. Secure with 

surgeon’s knot and locking knot. Trim free ends 3⁄4-inch from knot. Tack lower end of housing to 

container with four turns of tape, lacing and tying, doubled. Secure with surgeon’s knot and locking 

knot. Trim free ends 3⁄4-inch from knot. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

Four Turns Tape, Lacing 

and Tying, Doubled 

One Turn Tape, Lacing

and Tying, Doubled

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0045 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

AAD JUNCTION PLATE 

0045 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Die Sets, Spur Grommet, No. 2 (Item 18, WP 0063 00) 

Knife, Hot Metal (Item 24, WP 0063 00) 

Mallet, Rawhide (Item 27, WP 0063 00) 

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Pliers, Large, Diagonal Cut (Item 32, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Main canopy removed from 

container. Lay out on packing table 

or other suitable area. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

Materials/Parts 

AAD Junction Plate (Item 15, WP 0071 00) 

Cloth, Abrasive (Item 6, WP 0076 00) 

Grommet, Rolled Rim, Spur Washer, 305 Stainless Steel, No. 2 (Item 24, WP 0076 00)

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00)

REPLACE

1. Carefully cut and remove tacking securing base plate to container side flap. 

Tacking
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0045 00 

0045 00-2 

2. Remove original grommet as follows: 

a. Using diagonal cut/lineman pliers, lift edge of original washer at one point. 

b. Grip lifted washer edge with pliers and roll washer edge back to lift washer from original grommet. 

Remove original grommet from material. 

c. Remove AAD Junction plate. 

NOTE

If replacing the AAD Junction Plate ONLY, due to an unserviceable 

AAD Junction Plate, follow the mounting instructions IAW paragraph 

3., below. 

If replacing the AAD Junction Plate due to an unserviceable right 

flap plastic stiffener, drill holes may not be present in the stiffener 

preventing the entire AAD Junction plate from being tacked down. 

Follow the mounting instructions IAW step 7., detailed on the 

following page. 

3. Position replacement AAD Junction plate in same location as unserviceable AAD Junction plate. 

4. Tack AAD Junction plate to side flap using tape, lacing and tying, single. Starting on inside of side 

flap, pass lacing tape up through one of the large round holes on wide end of AAD Junction plate. 

Continue to stitch through holes on that side of AAD Junction plate until opposite end is reached, then 

return stitching through holes back to starting point. Secure with surgeon’s knot and locking knot. 

Trim free ends 3⁄4-inch from knot. 

5. Repeat step 4., on other side of AAD Junction plate. 

6. Replace grommet as follows: 

a. Insert barrel of replacement grommet through accommodating hole in material and ensure 

grommet flange is located on same side of material as original grommet. 

b. Position grommet on die with barrel facing up and place washer over grommet barrel. Ensure 

grommet barrel and washer are aligned to prevent off-center setting of grommet. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0045 00 

0045 00-3/(4 Blank) 

c. Using a punch and rawhide mallet or other non-steel impact device, spread grommet barrel by 

hammering until barrel collar is rolled down smooth on washer. If grommet barrel splits during 

hammering, remove and replace installed grommet with a serviceable item from stock. Repeat 

the procedure in steps b. and c., above. 

7. Tack AAD Junction plate to side flap using tape, lacing and tying, single. Starting on inside of side 

flap, pass lacing tape up through one of the large round holes on wide end of AAD Junction plate. 

Continue to tack through holes on that side of AAD Junction plate until reaching the stitching securing 

the stiffener (6th small hole), then return stitching through holes back to starting point. Secure with 

surgeon’s knot and locking knot. Trim free ends 3⁄4-inch from knot. 

8. Repeat step 7., on other side of AAD Junction plate. 

9. Replace grommet IAW step 6., above. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

Tacking

Grommet

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0046 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

AR2 RIPCORD RELEASE POCKET (PADDED) 

0046 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace (Mounting) 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Medium-Duty (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, Zig-Zag (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Material/Parts

Pocket, Assembly (Padded), AR2 (Item 15, WP 0065 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Thread, Nylon, Size FF (Item 42, WP0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

REPLACE (Mounting) 

1. Remove the stitching that secures the waistband end adjuster to the left wing flap. 

2. Place a mark 1

/8-inch from the flap/container seam. Place an additional mark on the lower edge 

binding 2 1⁄2-inches from the flap/container seam. 

3. Position the AR2 Pocket on the outside of the left wing flap. 

1/8-IN.

9 1⁄2-IN. 

2 1⁄2-IN. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0046 00 

0046 00-2 

4. After aligning the upper and lower right corners of the pocket, the pocket may overhang in other 

places. If this occurs, do not change the angular orientation of the pocket, just capture as much of 

the pocket boarder when attaching to the wing flap. Also, if the attaching stitching cannot be 

continuous, backstitch where appropriate in order to lock the stitch. 

5. Using a medium-duty sewing machine and size FF nylon thread, 5 to 8 stitches per inch, or two (2) 

rows of size E nylon thread, 7 to 11 stitches per inch, secure the pocket to the flap. 

6. Using a medium-duty zig-zag sewing machine, and size E nylon thread, re-secure the waistband 

adjuster to the left wing flap with two (2) rows of stitching. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

AR2 POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION/MOUNTING 

0047 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Repair 

• Replace 

• Installation of AR2 Power Cable Assembly, Reserve 

• Installation of AR2 Power Cable Assembly, Main 

• Removal of AR2 Power Cable Assembly, Reserve 

• Removal of AR2 Power Cable Assembly, Main 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Bit, Drill, 5

/32-IN. (Item 2, WP 0063 00) 

Drill, Electric, 3

/8-IN. (Item 14, WP 0063 00) 

Punch, Center (Item 36, WP 0063 00) 

Screwdriver, Phillips (Item 38, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Bartack, (42 stitch) (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, LD (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, MD (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Sewing Machine, MD Zig-Zag (Table 1, WP 0015 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, Adjustable, 6-IN. (Item 46, WP 0063 00) 

Material Parts 

AAD Junction Plate, Main (Item 15, WP 0071 00) 

Alcohol, Isopropyl (Anhydrous) (Item 3, WP 0076 00) 

Clamp (Item 10, WP 0071 00) 

Cloth, Lint Free, Cleaning (Item 8, WP 0076 00) 

Cloth, Duck, Textured Nylon, CG (Item 7, WP 0076 00) 

Nut (Item 11, WP 0071 00) 

Plate, Backing (Item 9, WP 0071 00) 

Screw (Item 2, WP 0071 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Nylon, Type III, 3⁄4-IN. Wide (Item 37, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size FF (Item 42, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or other 

suitable area.

REPAIR

If loose or broken threads are present, restitch with size FF thread in accordance with this WP and WP 

0015 00. 

REPLACE

Replace damaged power cable sleeve as follows: 

NOTE

If packed, unpack both main and reserve parachutes. Disconnect 

main parachute. It is not required to disconnect reserve parachute. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

Change 1 0047 00-2 

1. Cut and sear an 18 1⁄2-inch length of Tape, Nylon, Type III, OD, 3⁄4-inch wide binding tape. 

2. Cut and sear a 16 1⁄2-inch x 3-inch piece of green textured nylon duck cloth. 

3. On the 3-inch length, fold ends under 1⁄2-inch and sew with a light-duty sewing machine, type 301, 

and size E nylon thread, 7 to 11 stitches per inch. Backstitch not less than 1

/2-inch.

4. With raw edges inside, fold in half, lengthwise. Join folded fabric together using 3⁄4-inch green nylon 

binding tape. Equal the excess length of binding tape on both ends of the sleeve. Sew one (1) row 

with a light-duty sewing machine, type 301, and size E nylon thread, 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

Backstitch not less than 1

/2-inch.

5. Pre-mark sleeve on both sides of binding tape. Starting from one end, measure 1-inch, 7 1⁄2-inches, 

and 8 1⁄2-inches. From other end, measure 1-inch. 

3-IN

16 1⁄2-IN 

15 1⁄2-IN 

1/2-IN
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

0047 00-3 Change 1 

INSTALLATION OF AR2 POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY, RESERVE 

1. Install AR2 power cable sleeve as follows: 

NOTE

Prior to installing the AR2 power cable sleeve, the main and reserve 

parachutes must be completely unpacked. 

a. Position harness/container assembly on work surface with pack tray facing down and AR2 

padded pocket at the bottom right. 

b. Measure and mark 2-inches from center of the power cable opening located at the top of the 

harness/container assembly between the risers. 

c. Align the TOP end of the AR2 power cable sleeve end with the harness/container assembly’s 2-

inch mark. 

d. Make a mark approximately 2-inches long, parallel to top of the weapon tie-down loop. 

e. Fold under the excess binding tape and stitch AR2 power cable sleeve to the container with three 

(3) continuous rows of backstitching from the end of the sleeve to the 1-inch mark with a mediumduty sewing machine, type 301, and size FF thread, 6 to 9 stitches per inch. 

f. The portion of the sleeve (approximately 6 1⁄2-inches) to the 7 1⁄2-inch location mark, as identified 

in the illustration, is not attached to the container. 

g. Align the 7 1⁄2-inch location mark on the AR2 power cable sleeve with the top of the 

harness/container assembly weapon tie down loop. 

h. At this location, stitch remainder of AR2 power cable sleeve to harness/container assembly with 

three (3) continuous rows of backstitching for 1-inch. 

i. Fold under excess binding tape. Sew remainder of the sleeve (approximately 8-inches) to the 

container and finish with a total of three (3) continuous rows of 1-inch backstitching. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

Change 1 0047 00-4 

2. Install AR2 Power Cable Assembly, Reserve as follows: 

a. Place container on work surface with pack tray facing down and AR2 pocket at the bottom right. 

NOTE

Periodic maintenance of the power cable assembly is required to 

insure proper operation. As a guide, follow the interval periods 

contained in TM 10-1670-305-23&P, WP 0018 00. If required, 

removal, disassembly, cleaning, inspection and assembly 

instructions are also contained in TM 10-1670-305-23&P, WP 0019 

00.

b. Clean exterior of power housing by wiping with a clean, lint-free cloth moistened with anhydrous 

isopropyl alcohol. 

c. Clean all metal parts (except power housing) by washing in anhydrous isopropyl alcohol and dry 

thoroughly. 

d. Visually inspect all components for wear or damage. 

e. Discard worn or damaged parts. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

0047 00-5 Change 1 

f. Visually inspect entire power cable for fraying of cable or broken strands of wire. Discard if worn 

or damaged. 

g. Route the AR2 power cable through the lower open end of the AR2 power cable sleeve located 

above the AR2 padded pocket. 

h. Continue routing the AR2 power cable from bottom of AR2 power cable sleeve to top of AR2 

power cable sleeve opening. Route AR2 power cable between the reserve parachute top flap 

and the reserve ripcord pin protector flap. 

i. Secure the end of the AR2 power cable to the reserve base plate assembly, using the clamp, 

screws and locking nuts. 

j. Pack main and reserve parachute assemblies. 

k. Conduct the Slack Checker Test (WP 0011 00) and Stroke Simulator Test (WP 0013 00). 

INSTALLATION OF AR2 POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY, MAIN 

1. Prepare the AR2 Power Cable Assembly, Main as follows: 

NOTE

The following Harness/Container modification procedures are 

applicable for MC-4s or Harness/Containers (spare parts) that were 

purchased prior to June 2002. All MC-4s and Harness/Containers 

purchased after June 2002 have been manufactured with a modified 

Automatic Activation Device (AAD) Junction Plate and an existing 

hole above the left wing flap to accommodate the mounting of the 

AR2 Power Cable, Main. 

a. Remove reserve parachute from container. 

b. Place container on work surface with pack tray facing down and AR2 pocket at the bottom right. 

c. Measure up 9 1⁄2-inches from the bottom edge of the left wing flap and mark. 

d. From the 9 1⁄2-inch mark, measure up 1 3⁄4-inches and mark. Remove the stitching to construct an 

opening 1 3⁄4-inches in length. 

e. Make a one-inch stitch (backstitch) on both sides of the 1 3⁄4-inch hole utilizing either a bartack or 

zig-zag sewing machine. If a Bartack sewing machine is used, use thread, nylon, size E, 42 to 48 

stitches per inch. If a zig-zag sewing machine is used, use thread, nylon, size FF, 20 stitches per 

inch leaving a 1 3⁄4-inch power cable opening. 

f. Measure up 5 1⁄2-inches up from the bottom edge of the right wing flap, along the seam where the 

flap is sewn to the container and mark. 

g. From the 5 1⁄2-inch mark, measure up 1 3⁄4-inches and mark. Remove the stitching to construct an 

opening 1 3⁄4-inches in length. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

Change 1 0047 00-6 

h. Make a one-inch stitch (backstitch) on both sides of the 1 3⁄4-inch hole utilizing either a bartack or 

zig-zag sewing machine. If a bartack sewing machine is used, use thread, nylon, size E, 42 to 48 

stitches per inch. If a zig-zag sewing machine is used, use thread, nylon, size FF, 6 to 9 stitches 

per inch leaving a 1 3⁄4-inch power cable opening. 

NOTE

If possible, use NEW component parts (AAD Junction plate, clamp, 

screws and nuts) to mount the AR2 Power Cable Assembly to the 

MC-4 main parachute. However, if the clamp has been removed 

from the reserve flap, replace the screws and nuts. 

2. Modify the AAD Junction Plate as follows: 

NOTE

If modifying an existing junction plate manually, the user MUST 

ensure that an accurate measuring device (metal scale) is used to 

establish the critical dimensions as shown below. 

a. Carefully measure and pre-mark the junction plate. Measurements are to the center of the holes. 

b. Using a 5

/32-inch drill bit, drill two holes to accommodate placement of the clamp as shown. 

c. Place backing plate on the backside of the junction plate and install clamp using two screws and 

two nuts. Hand-tighten at this time. 

11/16 -IN. 

5

/32-IN. 

1-IN.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

0047 00-7 Change 1 

3. Install AR2 Power Cable Assembly, Main follows: 

a. Starting at the left wing flap, route the power cable housing through the 1 3⁄4-inch hole located 

above the AR2 pocket. 

b. Pass the power cable through the inside of the container, ensuring the power cable passes over 

the diagonal back straps, and out through the 1 3⁄4-inch hole on the right side of the container. 

AR2 Main Power 

Cable Assembly 

Left Wing Flap 

Right Wing 

Flap

AR2 Main Power 

Cable Assembly 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

Change 1 0047 00-8 

c. Using the adjustable wrench and a Phillips head screwdriver, secure the end of the power cable 

to the AAD junction plate utilizing the clamp previously installed. Wrench tight approximately 1⁄4 

turn.

d. Conduct the Stroke Simulator Test (WP 0014 00). 

REMOVAL OF AR2 AND POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY, RESERVE 

1. Ensure that the AR2 JUMP/OFF switch is in the OFF position. 

NOTE

If AR2 has not actuated, go to step 6. 

2. If the AR2 has actuated, remove the AR2 and its power cable assembly from the reserve base plate 

assembly by removing the two screws, nuts and clamp. These parts (hardware) are accessories 

attached to the reserve base plate. 

3. Remove the power cable from between the reserve parachute top flap and the reserve ripcord pin 

protector flap. 

4. Remove the AR2 from the pocket and slowly pull down on the AR2 and power cable removing the 

cable through the lower open end of the power cable sleeve. 

5. Insert a screwdriver or other suitable tool through eye of power cable to form a T-handle. Secure 

AR2. Pull eye of power cable until the AR2 mechanism reaches the cocked position and power cable 

remains extended from power housing (requires approximately 70-pounds pull). 

Power Cable 

Secured
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

0047 00-9 Change 1 

6. Remove the AR2 and Power Cable Assembly as follows: 

a. Remove AR2 from pocket and unscrew power-housing retainer from spring housing and remove 

the AR2 from power cable assembly by disengaging ball of power cable from piston rod. Attach 

storage cable and piston rod cap to AR2. 

b. Remove the power cable assembly from the parachute by removing the two (2) screws, nuts and 

clamp. These parts (hardware) are accessories attached to the reserve base plate. 

c. Remove the power cable from between the reserve parachute top flap and the reserve ripcord pin 

protector flap. 

d. Slowly pull down on the power cable removing it through the lower open end of the power cable 

sleeve.

REMOVAL OF AR2 AND POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY, MAIN 

1. Ensure that the AR2 JUMP/OFF switch is in the OFF position. 

NOTE

If AR2 has not actuated, go to step 5. 

2. If the AR2 has actuated, remove the AR2 and its power cable assembly from the AAD Junction plate 

by removing the two screws, nuts, backing plate and clamp. These parts (hardware) are accessories 

attached to the AAD Junction plate. 

3. Remove the AR2 from the pocket and slowly pull the AR2 and power cable through the 1 3⁄4-inch hole 

on the right side of the container, through the inside of the container and out through the 1 3⁄4-inch 

hole located above the AR2 pocket. 

Power Housing 

Retainer

Power Cable Ball 

Piston Rod
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0047 00 

Change 1 0047 00-10 

4. Insert a screwdriver or other suitable tool through eye of power cable to form a T-handle. Secure 

AR2. Pull eye of power cable until the AR2 mechanism reaches the cocked position and power cable 

remains extended from power housing (requires approximately 70-pounds pull). 

5. Remove the AR2 and Power Cable Assembly as follows: 

a. Remove AR2 from pocket and unscrew power-housing retainer from spring housing and remove 

the AR2 from power cable assembly by disengaging ball of power cable from piston rod. Attach 

storage cable and piston rod cap to AR2. 

b. Remove the power cable assembly from the AAD Junction plate by removing the two (2) screws, 

nuts, backing plate and clamp. These parts (hardware) are accessories attached to the AAD 

Junction plate. 

c. Remove the power cable through the 1 3⁄4-inch hole on the right side of the container, through the 

inside of the container and out through the 1 3⁄4-inch hole located above the AR2 pocket. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

Power Housing Retainer 

Power Cable Ball 

Piston Rod
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0048 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

POROSITY PROCEDURES 

0048 00-1 Change 1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• Inspection 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Porosity Machine (Item 33, WP 0063 00) 

Equipment Condition

Layout on packing table or other suitable area. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

POROSITY INSPECTION CRITERIA 

1. The following techniques and standards have been provided to summarize and/or clarify the desired 

design characteristics regarding factors deemed important to the inflation reliability of military ram air 

canopies. These standards are intended to assist military riggers responsible for the inspection and 

maintenance of ram air personnel parachutes in the identification of canopies, which possess 

characteristics, which have been associated with non-airworthy canopies. 

2. Where none had previously existed, tolerances are added to standards, which are intended to define 

the maximum acceptable limits of deviation from these desired characteristics. A point system was 

devised which will be used to determine the degree of compliance of a particular canopy to the 

desired design characteristics. This point scoring system appropriately prioritizes and emphasizes 

the issues affecting inflation reliability and general canopy airworthiness. Although a canopy may not 

exceed any of the established tolerances, the cumulative effect of multiple minor deviations may also 

condemn a canopy.

3. These procedures are intended to assist the inspecting rigger in identifying canopies, which may 

exhibit non-airworthy characteristics. The below procedures will be added to the current standard 

inspection criteria and be conducted during in-servicing, every year for land rigs, every five (5) jumps 

or one year for water rigs (whichever comes first), and when canopies exhibit poor performance 

characteristics during deployment, flight, and/or landing. When a canopy exhibits non-airworthy 

characteristics and a permeability-testing machine is not available, the canopy will be removed from 

service regardless of the remaining service life. 

4. These procedures apply exclusively to the MC-4, however, the MTl-X, and MTl-S model canopies are 

also considered within the family of Ram-Air Personnel Parachute Systems (RAPPS). The 

procedures, techniques and parameters are as follows: 

a. Procedure number 1. Fabric Permeability Test: 

(1) This procedure requires use of a permeability-testing machine. The machine should be 

calibrated and operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications. Record 

permeability measurements at a 0.5-inch (water) pressure head (vacuum) differential. 

NOTE

Testing the fabric along the nose of the top surface is intended to 

characterize a canopy’s ability to inflate in a reasonable period of 

time. Users are encouraged to test other areas of the canopy to 

identify sources of other flight performance problems. For example, 

high permeability readings in the tail section may be indicative of a 

reduction in flair maneuver performance. If certain sections have 

unusually high readings, the rigger should use his/her judgment as 

to what corrective action needs to be taken.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0048 00 

Change 1 0048 00-2 

NOTE

Personnel conducting permeability tests should be alert to 

anomalies in the color of the canopy fabric. Localized discolorations 

are evidence of exposure to environmental contaminants. A change 

in color shade from one (1) canopy section/surface to another is an 

indication that the canopy may have been manufactured from 

different lots of fabric. In either case, a permeability check should 

be made on these areas of concern. 

(2) For best results, the canopy should lie in an unpacked, unstressed condition for 24-hours 

prior to testing. Care should be taken not to physically stress the canopy fabric during 

handling and testing. 

(3) Take a permeability reading in each cell of the canopy on the top surface (i.e. the MC-4 is a 

seven (7) cell canopy so seven readings will be taken). Readings can be taken from either 

sub cell. Readings should be taken approximately 18-inches aft of the leading edge nose 

tape and should be roughly centered within the sub cell. 

(4) If it is necessary to take a second reading within a cell, move to an untested area of fabric at 

least 6-inches away (in any direction) from the location of the previous measurement. 

(5) Calculate the average permeability of all readings recorded along the top surface nose 

section of the canopy. Record this value. 

(6) The desired average permeability for a new canopy manufactured with PIA-C-44378 (1.1 oz.) 

fabric should be in the range of 0-5 ft.3/min./ft.2 (cfm).

(7) The maximum limit for a new, unused canopy is 6.0-cfm. Any new, unused canopy having a 

permeability value of 6.0-cfm or greater will not be placed in service since its useful life can 

be expected to be shorter than that of a properly manufactured canopy. 

(8) During the service life of a canopy, if the average permeability along the top surface nose is 

12.0-cfm or greater, the canopy will be immediately and permanently removed from service. 

b. Procedure number 2. Measurement of Top Surface Cell Widths: 

(1) This procedure requires use of a tape measure. Lay the canopy out spanwise on a clean 

surface. Using approximately two pounds of tension, measure the nose tape span of each 

cell along the top surface of the canopy, from loaded rib to loaded rib (see illustration below). 

Loaded ribs are those which have V-tapes and line attachment points. 

CELL 1 CELL 2 CELL 3 CELL 4 CELL 5 CELL 6 CELL 7 

CELL

SPAN

TOTAL TOP SURFACE SPAN

TOTAL BOTTOM SURFACE SPAN
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0048 00 

0048 00-3 Change 1 

(2) Record the span measurement for each cell along with the corresponding cell identifier (i.e. 

Cell 1, 2, 3, etc.). 

(3) Calculate the average cell span for the canopy. Record this value. 

(4) The relevant cell span measurements are: 

CANOPY MODEL LOWER LIMIT DESIRED RANGE UPPER LIMIT 

MC-4 47-inches 48 to 50-inches 50-inches 

MTl-X 45-inches 46 to 48-inches 48-inches 

MTl-S 47-inches 48 to 50-inches 50-inches 

(5) Any canopy, that has a cell span, that falls below the corresponding lower limit or exceeds 

the upper limit, will be deemed unacceptable and will be immediately and permanently 

removed from service. 

c. Procedure number 3. Measurement of Top/Bottom Surface Span Differential: 

(1) This procedure requires use of a tape measure. In the same manner as above, measure and 

record the nose tape span for each cell along the bottom surface of the canopy from loaded 

rib to loaded rib. 

(2) Calculate the sum of all top surface nose tape span measurements to determine the total top 

surface span. Record this value. 

(3) Calculate the sum of all bottom surface nose tape span measurements to determine the total 

bottom surface span. Record this value. 

(4) Subtract the total bottom surface span from the total top surface span to obtain a top/bottom 

surface span differential. Record this value. 

(5) Top/bottom surface span differentials should fall within the following ranges: 

CANOPY MODEL LOWER LIMIT DESIRED RANGE UPPER LIMIT 

MC-4 5-inches 6 1/8 to 17 1⁄2-inches 19-inches 

MTl-X 5-inches 6 to15-inches 17-inches 

MTl-S 3-inches 4 to13-inches 15-inches 

CELL 1 CELL 2 CELL 3 CELL 4 CELL 5 CELL 6 CELL 7 

CELL

SPAN

TOTAL TOP SURFACE SPAN

TOTAL BOTTOM SURFACE SPAN
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0048 00 

Change 1 0048 00-4 

(6) Any canopy which has a span differential that falls below the corresponding lower limit or 

exceeds the upper limit should be deemed unacceptable and will be immediately and 

permanently removed from service. 

NOTE

This canopy scoring technique is intended to determine 

airworthiness/non-airworthiness of RAPPS canopies. In general, 

this technique will alert the unit level rigger to the existence of traits 

that have been observed in non-airworthy canopies. Armed with 

this information, the rigger can decide to closely monitor the 

performance of such canopies or remove them from service 

altogether. This will reduce the number of reserve activations 

necessitated by failure of the main to inflate. 

d. Procedure number 4. Rating the Canopy’s Airworthiness: 

(1) Conduct the following scoring procedure to obtain an overall rating for the canopy’s 

airworthiness. This scoring procedure is intended only for canopies that successfully met the 

criteria in procedures a. through c., above. 

CRITERIA SCORE 

1. The average top surface nose permeability is: 

a. 12.0 cfm or greater 0 points (Not Airworthy) 

b. 10.0 cfm to 11.99 cfm 1 point 

c. 8.0 cfm to 9.99 cfm 2 points 

d. 0.0 cfm to 7.99 cfm 3 points 

2. Top/bottom surface span differential is within the 

“Desired Range”? (procedure #3) 3 points 

3. For each cell, the top surface span is within the 

“Desired Range”? (procedure #2) 1⁄2 point/cell 

4. For each end cell, the top surface span is within 

the “Desired Range”? (procedure #2) 1⁄2 point/end cell 

5. Average top surface cell span is within the 

“Desired Range”? (procedure #2) 1 point 

6. Total the number of points, which the canopy has received. Locate the canopy’s score on 

the appropriate canopy-scoring chart (Figs. 2,3) to determine its degree of airworthiness. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0048 00 

0048 00-5 Change 1 

CANOPY MODEL SCORE ACTION 

MC-4 and MT1-X 11.5-9.5 

Nose of canopy is dimensionally well 

constructed. Permeability is good. 

Airworthiness should not be a concern unless 

users report problems. 

9.0-7.5

Nose of canopy has a few dimensional 

problems or degraded permeability. 

Airworthiness should not be a concern unless 

users report problems. Document any 

anomalies in the canopy’s performance. 

7.0-6.0

Nose of canopy has some of the characteristics 

that have been observed in non-air worthy 

canopies. Canopy should be fully inspected by 

a qualified rigger. Document any anomalies in 

the canopy’s performance. Removal from 

service may be necessary. 

Less than 6.0 Nose of canopy has many of the characteristics 

that have been observed in non-air worthy 

canopies. Remove from service. 

CANOPY MODEL SCORE ACTION 

MT1-S 10.5-9.5 

Nose of canopy is dimensionally well 

constructed. Permeability is good. 

Airworthiness should not be a concern unless 

users report problems. 

 9.0-7.5 

Nose of canopy has a few dimensional 

problems or degraded permeability. 

Airworthiness should not be a concern unless 

users report problems. Document any 

anomalies in the canopy’s performance. 

 7.0-6.0 

Nose of canopy has some of the characteristics 

that have been observed in non-air worthy 

canopies. Canopy should be fully inspected by 

a qualified rigger. Document any anomalies in 

the canopy’s performance. Removal from 

service may be necessary. 

Less than 6.0 

Nose of canopy has many of the characteristics 

that have been observed in non-air worthy 

canopies. Remove from service. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0048 00 

Change 1 0048 00-6 

NOTE

Any canopy having an average permeability reading along the top 

surface nose section of 12.0-cfm or greater will be removed from 

service. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0049 00 

UNIT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

CONVERSION (RESERVE CANOPY TO A MAIN CANOPY) 

0049 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Conversion 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Brush, Stenciling (Item 5, WP 0063 00) 

Machine, Stencil Cutting (Item 26, WP 0063 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, 7

/16-IN, Open End (Item 45, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

3-Ring, Set, Riser, Main (Item 11, WP 0065 00) 

Control Line Assembly, Main, Set (Item 9, WP 0068 00) 

Ink, Marking, Parachute (Item 25/26, WP 0076 00) 

Stencil Board, Oiled (Item 31, WP 0076 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

CONVERTING RESERVE CANOPY TO MAIN CANOPY 

NOTE

Reserve canopies converted to main canopies retain their 

service/age life from the original date of the canopy being placed inservice/date of manufacture. 

1. Using a 7

/16-inch open end wrench, disconnect the reserve canopy from the reserve risers at the 

connector links. 

2. Perform a 100% Technical Rigger/Inspection on the canopy and suspension lines IAW WP 0011 00. 

3. Perform a permeability test on the canopy IAW WP 0048 00. Canopies having an average top skin 

permeability value of 6.0 cubic feet per minute (CFM) or greater are not eligible for conversion to 

main canopies. 

4. Replace the reserve control lines with main control lines IAW WP 0057 00. 

5. Perform a suspension line continuity check IAW WP 0006 00. 

6. Attach a set of main risers, to the connector links IAW WP 0006 00. 

7. Using parachute marking ink, stencil the following near the data block: “Converted to P/N 11-1-3518-

0” and date converted. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

CHAPTER 4 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

FOR

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL 

PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

GENERAL REPAIR PROCEDURES 

0050 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Basting and Temporary Tacking 

x Stitching and Restitching 

x Darning

x Zig-Zag Sewing 

x Patching

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition

Unpacked. Canopy with defects recorded. Clean. 

Tools

Specified in paragraph applicable to the item being repaired.

Personnel Required 

92R(10) Parachute Rigger 

Materials/ Parts 

Specified in paragraph applicable to 

the item being repaired.

NOTE

Sewing requirements will vary according to the type of item being 

repaired and the type of repair being made. The type of sewing 

machine, type of thread, the stitch range, and the stitch pattern (if 

applicable) required to accomplish a sewing procedure will be 

specified in the paragraph applicable to the item being repaired. 

Immediately after the accomplishment of a machine sewing 

procedure, trim thread ends to a point as close as possible to the 

material that has been sewn. 

NOTE

Repair and replacement of parachute components is performed in 

accordance with the repair instruction in this section and in specific 

paragraphs applicable to the item being repaired. 

BASTING AND TEMPORARY TACKING 

Basting and temporary tacking are hand-sewing methods used to temporarily hold layers of cloth fabric 

together while a repair is being performed. The following is a list of procedures that apply to basting and 

temporary tacking actions: 

1. Basting and temporary tacking should be made using thread that is of a contrasting color to the 

material being worked. 

2. Basting and temporary tacking will be performed using a single strand of size A, nylon thread, or 

ticket No. 24/4 cotton thread. 

3. When basting, do not tie knots at any point in the thread length. Also, the sewing should be made 

with two (2) stitches per inch. 

4. Immediately upon completion of a repair, remove previously made basting or temporary tacking. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-2 

STITCHING AND RESTITCHING 

Perform stitching and re-stitching as follows, refer to Tables 1 and 2. 

1. Parachute canopy assemblies. The stitching and re-stitching made on parachute canopies should be 

accomplished with thread that is contrasting in color to the fabric being re-stitched. If contrasting 

color thread is not available, thread of matching color may be used, providing all other specifications 

are met. Straight stitching and re-stitching on parachute canopy assemblies should be locked by at 

least 2-inches at each end of a stitch row, when possible. Zig-Zag stitching does not require locking; 

however, zig-zag re-stitching should extend at least 1⁄4-inch into undamaged stitching at each end, 

when possible. When re-stitching parachute canopy assemblies, stitch directly over the original 

stitching and follow the original stitch pattern as closely as possible. 

Table 1. Sewing Machine Code Symbols 

CODE SYMBOL SEWING MACHINE 

LD SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: General Sewing; 301 Stitch; Light-Duty; NSN 

350-01-177-8590. 

MD ZZ SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: Zig-Zag; 308 Stitch; Medium-Duty; NSN 

3530-01-181-1421. 

LD ZZ SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: Zig-Zag; 308 Stitch; Light-Duty; NSN 3530-

01-181-1420. 

HD SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: General Sewing; 301 Stitch; Heavy-Duty; 

NSN 3530-01-177-8588. 

MD SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: General Sewing; 301 Stitch; Medium-Duty; 

NSN 3530-01-177-8591. 

DN SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: Darning; Lock Stitch; NSN 3530-01-177-8589.

LHD SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: 301 Stitch; Light-Heavy Duty; NSN 3530-01-

186-3079. 

ND SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: 301 Stitch; Double-Needle; NSN 3530-01-

182-2873. 

BT SEWING MACHINE, AUTOMATIC: Box -X; (Local purchase, Herbert Jaffe/JF PN 

HJ1615X1X56, Model Number 3334) 

BT SEWING MACHINE, INDUSTRIAL: Bartack, 42 stitch (Local purchase, 

Recommended PN HJ1466-1X42) 

Table 2. Stitching and Re-stitching Specifications

Component Recommended Sewing Machine 

(code symbol) 

Stitches

per Inch 

Thread

Size 

Canopy DN A 

Panel, Stabilizer LD, MD, BT 7 to 11/42 E 

Ribs LD, MD 7 to 11 E 

Line, Suspension BT, ZZ 42 E 

Line, Control BT, ZZ 42 E 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-3 

2. Other parachute items. Stitching and re-stitching on other parachute items constructed from cloth, 

canvas, and webbing should be accomplished with thread that matches the color of the original 

stitching, when possible. All straight stitching should be locked by backstitching at least 1⁄2-inch. Restitching should be locked by overstitching each end of the stitch formation by 1⁄2-inch. Zig-zag 

stitching does not require locking; however, zig-zag re-stitching should extend at least 1⁄4-inch into 

undamaged stitching at each end, when possible. Re-stitching should be made directly over the 

original stitching; follow the original stitch pattern as closely as possible. 

DARNING 

(Refer to Tables 1 and 2). Darning is a sewing procedure used to repair limited size holes, rips, and 

tears. A darning repair may be made either by hand or by sewing machine, depending upon the method 

preferred and the availability of equipment. However, a darning machine should be used to darn small 

holes and tears where fabric is missing. A darning repair will be preformed using the following 

procedures, as appropriate: 

1. Machine darning. Proceed as follows: 

a. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark a square around the damaged area 

and ensure the marking is at least 1⁄4-inch back from each edge of the damaged area. 

b. Darn the damaged area by sewing the material in a back and forth manner, using size A or E 

nylon thread. 

c. Turn material and stitch back and forth across stitching made in b., above until hole or tear is 

completely darned. 

d. If applicable, restencil informational data or identification marks using the criteria in WP 0052 00. 

2. Hand darning. When repair of a hole or tear is made by hand darning, the darn should match the 

original weave of the damaged material as closely as possible. Hand darning is performed as 

follows: 

a. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark a square around the damaged area 

and ensure that the marking is at least 1⁄4-inch back from each edge of the damaged area. 

Back and Forth 

Stitching in Both 

Directions

Hole

Marking
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-4 

b. Using darning needle and a length of size A or E nylon thread, begin darning at one corner of 

marked area. Working parallel with the marking, pass needle and thread back and forth through 

material until opposite diagonal corner of marked area is reached as shown in illustration A, 

below. 

A STITCHING B HAND DARNING

c. Turn material and weave needle and thread back and forth across stitching made in b., above, 

until hole is completely darned as shown in b., above. 

d. If applicable, restencil informational data or identification marks as outlined in WP 0052 00. 

3. Zig-zag Sewing. (Refer to tables 1 and 2) Components of the MC-4, except parachute canopy, that 

have sustained cut or tear damage may be repaired by zig-zag sewing provided the applicable 

damaged area does not have any material missing and the cut or tear is straight or L-shaped. Should 

the damaged area be irregular shaped or have material missing, the repair will be achieved by either 

darning or patching, as required. A zig-zag sewing repair is accomplished using a zig-zag sewing 

machine as follows: 

a. Set sewing machine to maximum stitch width. 

b. Beginning at a point 1⁄4-inch beyond one end of cut or tear, stitch lengthwise along damaged area 

to a point 1⁄4-inch beyond opposite end of cut or tear. 

Finish 

Marking

Start

Start

Hole

Finish 

1⁄4-IN. 1⁄4-IN.

A STRAIGHT CUT OR TEAR STITCHING
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-5 

c. The cited stitching procedure also applies to an L-shaped cut or tear. 

d. If applicable, restencil information data or identification marks as prescribed in WP 0052 00. 

4. Patching Procedures. Patching is a procedure used to repair holes that cannot be darned. 

a. Patching limitations for the parachute canopy and container. The following is a list of patching 

limitations for the MC-4 parachute canopy and container. 

(1) A patch will not be applied to a damaged area that has been previously patched. 

(2) There will be no more than two (2) darns and three (3) patches per section, rib, or stabilizer, 

not to exceed 50 percent. A canopy section is defined as an area between loaded ribs (on 

the left and right side rigger view) and from seam to seam from nose to tail. 

(3) A rib and a stabilizer are each considered as one (1) section. A finished basic patch shall not 

be closer than one-inch from a sewn seam. However, determination should be made as to 

the lowest economical method to be used (i.e., two (2) or more patches verses one (1) large 

patch or one (1) large patch verses a section replacement). 

NOTE

Patches must be cut with their edges parallel to the warp and weft of 

the fabric and are to be applied with the warp and weft threads 

parallel to those of the material under repair. 

1⁄4-IN.

1⁄4-IN.

B L-SHAPED CUT OR TEAR STITCHING 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-6 

Canopy damage chart. A canopy damage chart is provided for local reproduction. The canopy damage 

chart is used to record canopy damage and repair action. 

TOP SKIN

BOTTOM 

SKIN

RIBS

NOSE 

Nose

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

Nose

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-7 

LEGEND AMT HRS INSPECTION

DATA 

REPAIR

DATA 

D DARN .8 X TYPE

PARACHUTE 

CANOPY 

REPAIR

RS RESEW .8 X MC-4 NAME DATE

BR BURN .4 X SERIAL # 

RE RESTENCIL .4 X LINE REPAIR 

 PIS NAME DATE

SP SEWN PATCH .8 X WOD 

RLS REPLACE LINE 

SINGLE .8 X 

RCL REPLACE

CONTROL LINES 1.0 X DATE

INSPECTED

FINAL

INSPECTION

SLS SEW LINE SET 1.5 X NAME DATE

RRH REPLACE RIB 

HALF 3.0 X INSPECTED

BY

RPS REPLACE PANEL 

SINGLE 4.0 X REPAIR HRS 

LS REPLACE LINE 

SET 3.5 X 

RPD REPLACE PANEL 

DOUBLE 7.0 X INSPECTION

HRS

RRC REPLACE RIB 

COMPLETE 5.0 X 3.00

RPM REPLACE PANEL 

MULTI X TOTAL HRS 

5. Making a basic patch. A basic patch is used to repair damaged cloth when the finished patch is no 

closer than 1-inch from a stitched seam or stitched tape. Should a damaged area be closer than 1-

inch to the cited areas, a miscellaneous patch will be made as detailed in step 6 detailed on the 

following page. The basic patch is applied by sewing. The patch is applied to the inside of the 

canopy. The deployment bag is patched on the outside. The basic patch is shown below. Apply a 

basic patch as follows: 

1⁄2-IN.

1

/16-IN.

1⁄2-IN. 

1

/16-IN. 

3⁄4-IN. 

Preferred Rounded SECTION A-A 

Corners

INSIDE VIEW OUTSIDE VIEW 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-8 

NOTE

A basic patch applied to the parachute canopy will be square or 

rectangular in shape. ADHESIVE NYLON PARACHUTE 

MENDING CLOTH WILL NOT BE USED. Ensure proper thread 

tension is used to prevent distortion of the canopy. 

a. Place repairable item on repair table, smooth the fabric around the damaged area, and secure 

item to table with push-up pins. Do not pin damaged area. 

b. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark a square or rectangle around area to 

be patched. 

c. Cut damaged area fabric along the lines made in b., above. Further cut the fabric diagonally at 

each corner to allow a 1⁄2-inch fold back in the raw edges. 

d. Make a 1⁄2-inch fold back at each raw edge. Pin and baste each foldback to complete the 

prepared hole. Basting is performed using procedures on page 0015 00. 

e. Using same type material as in original construction, mark and cut a patch 2 1⁄2-inches wider and 

longer than the inside measurements of prepared hole. 

f. Center patch material over prepared hole. 

g. Make a 1⁄2-inch fold under on each edge of patch material and pin in position. Baste patch to 

prepared area. Basting is performed using procedures detailed in this WP. 

h. Remove pushpins securing canopy to repair table and secure patch by stitching, using the 

applicable details in the illustration above and in this WP. Make the first row of stitching 

completely around patch. It is not necessary for the stitch pattern to exactly follow the angles of 

the patch. It is preferred to round the corners of the patch, to stitch at a 45-degree angle, rather 

than a 90-degree angle. For corners less than or greater than 90-degrees, adjust accordingly. 

i. Turn canopy over and make second row of stitching, ensuring that locking stitches are on 

opposite sides of patch. Stitching is performed in accordance with the details in this WP. 

j. If applicable, restencil informational data according to procedures in WP 0052 00. 

6. Applying miscellaneous canopy patch. A miscellaneous canopy patch, which may be irregularly 

shaped, is used to repair damaged canopy material when the location of the damaged area requires 

the patch to extend into or over a seam or a reinforced seam. Ascertain the type of patch required for 

the canopy using the details in the illustrations on the following page. A canopy section that cannot 

be patched with a basic patch as outlined in step 5., above, is patched with a miscellaneous patch. 

Apply a miscellaneous patch to a section as follows (refer to following page): 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-9 

INSIDE VIEW 

INSIDE VIEW 

1⁄2-IN.

1⁄2-IN.

1⁄2-IN.

1⁄2-IN.

1⁄2-IN.

3⁄4-IN. 3⁄4-IN.

1

/16-IN. 1

/16-IN. 1

/16-IN. 1

/16-IN. 

SECTION A-A SECTION B-B SECTION A-A 

A. OUTSIDE VIEW B. OUTSIDE VIEW 

NOTE:

FOR TWO OUTMOST RIBS, THE PATCH WILL 

BE APPLIED OVER THE REINFORCING TAPE.

A. RECTANGULAR PATCH AT REINFORCING 

TAPE OF LEADING EDGE (UPPER AND 

LOWER) FOR DAMAGE NOT CLOSER 

THAN 2-INCHES TO RIB SEAMS. 

NOTE: FOR AN OUTSIDE RIB OVER A 

REINFORCING TAPE, 

1. REMOVE STITCHING FROM 

REINFORCING TAPE. 

2. APPLY A BASIC PATCH. 

3. RE-STITCH THE REINFORCING TAPE. 

B. RECTANGULAR PATCH CROSSING A 

REINFORCING TAPE. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-10 

NOTE

ADHESIVE NYLON PARACHUTE MENDING CLOTH WILL NOT 

BE USED in the construction or application of a miscellaneous 

canopy patch. 

a. Place canopy inside out on a repair table, smooth fabric around damaged area, and secure 

damaged section to table with pushup pins. Do not pin damaged area of section. 

b. As required, cut applicable stitching to remove or lay aside items that may interfere with patching 

process. 

c. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark damaged area. Mark the 1⁄2-inch from 

any adjacent seam or reinforced seam, except where the width of the foldback is limited by the 

width of the reinforced seam. 

d. Prepare damaged area hole by cutting along marks made in step c., above. Also make a 

diagonal cut at each corner of formed hole to permit a foldback of each raw edge. 

e. To complete hole preparation, make a 1

/2-inch fold back of each raw edge. Pin and baste each 

edge foldback using procedures detailed in this WP. 

f. Using same type material as in original canopy construction, mark and cut a patch 2 1⁄2-inches 

wider and longer than inside measurements of prepared hole. 

g. Center patch material over prepared hole. 

h. Make a 1⁄2-inch fold under on each edge of patch material and pin patch material in position. 

Baste patch to prepared area. Basting is performed using procedures detailed in this WP. 

i. Remove pushpins securing canopy to repair table and secure patch by stitching according to the 

details in the illustrations above and below, using stitching specifics outlined in tables 1 and 2. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-11 

INSIDE VIEW INSIDE VIEW 

C. OUTSIDE VIEW D. OUTSIDE VIEW 

C. TRIANGULAR PATCH AT FRONT 

LEADING EDGE OF RIBS. 

D. FOUR-SIDED PATCH AT 

FORWARD LEADING EDGE OF 

RIBS.

SECTION A-A SECTION B-B SECTION A-A SECTION B-B 

1⁄2-IN.

1⁄2-IN. 1⁄2-IN. 

1⁄2-IN.

1⁄2-IN. 1⁄2-IN.

1-IN.

1-IN.

3⁄4-IN.

1

/16-IN. 1

/16-IN. 1

/16-IN. 

3⁄4-IN. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0050 00 

0050 00-12 

j. Make the first row of stitching completely around the edges of the patch. Turn canopy right side 

out and make a second row of stitching, ensuring that locking stitches are on opposite sides of 

patch. Stitching is performed in accordance with this WP. 

k. Reposition canopy items removed or laid aside in step b., above, in the original location and 

secure each item to canopy by restitching according to original construction details and the 

procedures detailed in this WP. 

l. If applicable, restencil informational data according to procedures in WP 0052 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0051 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SEARING AND WAXING 

0051 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Searing 

x Waxing

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Knife, Hot Metal (Item 24, WP 0063 00) 

Pot, Melting, Electric (Item 34, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Beeswax (Item 5, WP 0076 00) 

Wax, Paraffin (Item 46, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Unpacked 

CAUTION 

Cotton tape, webbing, or cord will not be seared. 

NOTE

Fabric materials such as cord, tape, and webbing that is cut for use 

in the maintenance of the MC-4 parachute will normally be heatseared or dipped in a melted wax mixture, as applicable, to prevent 

the material from fraying or unraveling. However, in some instances 

the preparation of the material may not be necessary and will be 

specified accordingly. 

SEARING 

The cut ends of nylon tape, webbing, and cord lengths may be prepared by heat-searing, which is 

performed by pressing the raw end of the material against a hot metal surface (knife) until the nylon has 

melted sufficiently. 

CAUTION 

Avoid forming a sharp edge or lumped effect on the melted end. 

Sharp edges may cut other components 

WAXING 

Fraying or unraveling of cotton or nylon tape, webbing, and cord length ends may be prevented by 

dipping 1⁄2-inch of the raw end of the material into a thoroughly melted mixture of half beeswax and half 

paraffin in an electric melting pot. The wax temperature should be substantial enough to ensure the wax 

completely penetrates the material rather than just coating the exterior fabric. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0052 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MARKING AND RESTENCILING 

0052 00-1/(2 Blank) 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Marking

x Restenciling 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Brush, Stenciling (Item 5, WP 0063 00) 

Machine, Stencil Cutting (Item 26, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Ink, Marking, Parachute (Item 25/26, WP 0076 00) 

Marker, Felt Tip, Permanent, Black (Item 28, WP 0076 00) 

Pen, Ball Point (Item 29, WP 0076 00) 

Stencil Board, Oiled (Item 31, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

Suitable area.

NOTE

Stenciling should be used whenever possible. A ballpoint pen or 

permanent felt tip marker should be used only where stenciling is 

not possible, or when stenciling devices are not available. Any type 

bail point pen using black or blue ink may be used for marking on 

labels only. 

Original stenciled data or marking that becomes faded, illegible, 

obliterated, or are removed as a result of performing a repair 

procedure will be remarked with a ballpoint pen, felt tip marker, or 

re-stenciled. All marking or re-stenciling will be done on or as near 

as possible to the original location and should conform to the 

original lettering type and size. 

MARKING

Using marking devices such as ballpoint pen or permanent felt tip marker, mark on, or as near as 

possible to, original location and conform to original lettering type and size. 

RESTENCILING

Proceed as follows: 

1. Cut oiled stencil board to original lettering type and size of data to be restenciled. 

2. Place cut stencil board over, or as near as possible to, original marking to be restenciled. 

3. Place additional sheet or stencilboard beneath area to be re-stenciled to prevent marking ink from 

penetrating to other areas. 

4. Hold stencilboard in place and, using stenciling brush filled with parachute marking ink, restencil 

original marking. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0053 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SUSPENSION LINES (LINES 4A/B AND 5 A/B ONLY) 

0053 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0050 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Cord, Dacron, 600-Pound, Type I (Item 12, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Continuity check and canopy trim 

check (WPs 0005 00 and 0006 00).

REPLACE

NOTE

This procedure applies only to lines 4 A/B and 5 A/B which in each 

case are one continuous line, running from the forward center cell 

(A lines) of the canopy to the inboard side of the front connector 

links, then back to the forward center cell (B lines) of the canopy. 

1. Find the approximate mid-point of replacement line. Position midpoint at inboard (barrel side) of 

connector link. Secure line to connector link with bartack stitch. Bartack begins 3

/4 ± 1/8-inch from end 

of loop and is 5

/8-inch long by 1/8-inch wide. 

Bartack

5

/8-IN.

3

/4 (+1/8)-IN.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0053 00 

0053 00-2 

2. Route both free ends of line through front slider grommet to proper canopy attachment points. Tie 

free end of line to attachment loop with a French locking knot. Adjust line to proper trim using other 

lines in the group as reference. 

1

3

4

2

3. When adjusted, lay free end of line on top of main line and secure with 5

/8-inch by 1/8-inch bartack 

placed as close to knot as possible. Trim line 1

/16-inch from bartack. 

4. Perform continuity check IAW WP 0004 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

French Locking Knot

Bartack

Attachment Loop 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0054 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SUSPENSION LINE SETS (PREFERRED METHOD) 

0054 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0050 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Wrench, 7

/16-IN., Open-End (Item 45, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Suspension Line Set, Main/Reserve (Item 5, WP 0068 00/WP 0069 00) 

Tape, Lacing and Tying (Item 33, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00)

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Canopy in proper layout. 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Continuity check and canopy 

check (WPs 0005 00 and 

0006 00).

REPLACE

NOTE

Replacement of suspension lines as a set is the preferred method. 

If suspension line sets are not available, replacement of individual 

lines from bulk material is authorized. Refer to WP 0055 00. 

NOTE

When replacing suspension lines, the overall base A-Line 

measurement will be 14-feet, 6-inches (r 2-inches). 

1. Replace suspension lines as follows: 

a. With canopy in proper layout, place replacement connector link adjacent to connector link with 

damaged line(s). 

b. Using old lines as a guide, route replacement lines through proper slider grommet to appropriate 

canopy attachment points and mark lines. 

c. Cut and remove old lines from attachment loops. Route replacement lines through attachment 

loops, and with mark centered in loop, secure with a French locking knot. 

French Locking Knot

Attaching 

Loop
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0054 00 

0054 00-2 

d. Cut and remove tacking on risers below connector links. 

e. Loosen barrel nuts on connector links with 7/16-inch open-end wrench. 

f. Remove connector links from risers and discard old lines. 

g. Connect connector links to risers. Connector link barrel nuts must face inboard and tighten 

upward.

h. Using 7

/16-inch open-end wrench, tighten barrel nut on connector links 1⁄4 turn past hand tight. 

i. Hand-tack each riser at connector link with one turn double nylon lacing tape. 

Connector Link 

Barrel Nut 

Riser

Tacking

Connector Link 

Barrel Nut 

Riser

Tacking
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0054 00 

0054 00-3/(4 Blank) 

j. Perform a canopy trim check in accordance with WP 0005 00 or WP 0006 00, as applicable. 

Adjust lengths of suspension lines at French locking knots to achieve required results. 

k. When adjusted, lay free end of line on top of main line and secure with a 5

/8-inch by 1/8-inch

bartack placed as close to the knot as possible. Trim line 1

/16-inch from bartack. 

l. Perform follow-up procedure IAW WPs 0005 00 and 0006 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

French Locking Knot

Bartack

Attachment 

Loop

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0055 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SUSPENSION LINES/CASCADE LINES (ALTERNATE METHOD) 

0055 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Finger Trap Tool (Item 16, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0050 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Cord, Dacron, 600-Pound, Type I (Item 12, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Personnel Required

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Follow-Up Procedure 

Continuity check and canopy trim 

check (WPs 0005 00 and 0006 00). 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

REPLACE

This procedure is authorized only if pre-manufactured suspension line 

sets are unavailable. 

This procedure applies to all lines except lines 4 A/B and 5 A/B lines. To 

replace lines 4 A/B and 5 A/B, refer to WP 0054 00. 

NOTE

When replacing suspension lines, the overall base A-Line 

measurement will be 14-feet, 6-inches (r 2-inches). 

1. Main Suspension Lines. Replace main suspension lines as follows: 

a. Trim end of replacement line with scissors and taper approximately 1⁄4-inch. Route line through 

connector link and finger-trap 3-inches of line forming a 3

/4 ± 1/8-inch loop at connector link. 

NOTE

Trim With Scissors. Tape 

Approximately 1⁄4-IN.

Bartack 1

/8-IN. 

Max

3⁄4 (±1/8)-IN.

3-IN.

* OTHER LINES 

OMITTED FOR CLARITY
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0055 00 

0055 00-2 

b. Secure line with a 5/8-inch by 1/8-inch bartack beginning 1/8-inch from loop. 

c. Route free end of line through proper slider grommet to appropriate canopy attachment point. 

Tie free end of line to attachment loop with a French locking knot. Adjust line to the proper trim 

using the other lines in the group as reference. 

1

3

4

2

d. When adjusted, lay free end of line on top of main line and secure with a 5

/8-inch by 1/8-inch

bartack placed as close to knot as possible. Trim line 1

/16-inch from bartack. 

French Locking 

Knot

Bartack

Attachment Loop
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0055 00 

0055 00-3 

1

/8-IN. (MAX) 

(DO NOT OVERLAP)

2. Cascaded Suspension Lines. Replace cascaded suspension lines as follows: 

a. Lay replacement cascaded line on top of main line in same location as old line. Secure cascaded 

line to main line with two 5

/8-inch by 1/8-inch bartack, located 1/8-inch apart. Sear cut cascaded 

line 1

/16-inch from end of bartack. 

b. Tie free end of cascaded line to canopy attachment loop with a French locking knot. Adjust line to 

proper trim using other lines in-group as reference. 

c. When adjusted, lay free end of line on top of main line and secure with a 5

/8-inch by 1/8-inch

bartack placed as close to knot as possible. Trim line 1

/16-inch from bartack. 

Bartack

Main Line

French Locking Knot

Bartack

Attachment 

Loop

Cascade Line 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0055 00 

0055 00-4 

d. Perform continuity check IAW WPs 0005 00 and 0006 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0056 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SUSPENSION LINE ATTACHING LOOP 

0056 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Double Box-X (Table 1, WP 0050 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Aid, Marking (Item 1/2, WP 0076 00) 

Tape, Nylon, 1-Inch Wide (Item 34, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other 

suitable area.

REPLACE

The suspension line attaching loop may need to be replaced in conjunction with a repair to the canopy. 

Remove and reattach the suspension line attaching loop as follows: 

1. Using an authorized marking aid of contrasting color, mark the original location of the suspension line 

attaching loop using the adjoining loaded rib as a guide to determine where to reattach the suspension 

line attaching loop. 

2. Using the stitch removal tool, carefully remove the suspension line attachment loop from the canopy. 

3. Depending on the location of the suspension line attaching loop, the cut length of the material will vary 

as follows: 

a. Suspension line attaching loops on the canopy nose are two (2) 3 1⁄2-inch pieces. 

b. Suspension line attaching loops on the canopy tail are one (1) 3-inch piece. 

1-inch 

Canopy Tail Suspension Line 

Attaching Loops 

NOTE: Fold under 

optional, if fold under 

is used, cut length is 

4-inches.

Canopy Nose Suspension Line 

Attaching Loops (2 plies) 

1/2
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0056 00 

0056 00-2 

c. Suspension line attaching loops sewn within the center of the canopy are one (1) 4 1⁄2-inch 

piece.

4. Repair canopy damage as outlined in the applicable WP. 

5. Depending on the location of the suspension line attaching loop, cut the appropriate length of tape, 

textile, 1-Inch wide material and sear both ends. 

6. Using a double box-X pattern sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 56 stitches per inch, reattach 

the suspension line attaching loop to the original location as previously marked. 

a. Perform continuity check IAW WP 0005 00 or WP 0006 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

1 1⁄4-inch

Double Box-X

Stitch Pattern

Suspension Line 

Attaching Loop 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0057 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

CONTROL LINES 

0057 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Sewing Machine, Bartack (Table 1, WP 0050 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Control Line Set, Main (Item 9, WP 0068 00) 

Control Line Set, Reserve (Item 9, WP 0069 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Lay out on packing table or other suitable area. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

Follow-Up Procedure 

WP 0005 00; WP 0006 00 

REPLACE

NOTE

When replacing control lines, both control lines will be replaced. 

1. Lay out upper control lines at their corresponding attachment loops. Route lines through attachment 

loops, adjust in accordance with WP 0005 00 or WP 0006 00 as applicable and secure with a French 

locking knot. 

Attaching Loop French Locking Knot
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0057 00 

0057 00-2 

2. Apply equal tension to all lines and adjust trim. 

3. When adjusted, lay free ends of lines on top of main lines and secure with a 5

/8-inch by 1/8-inch

bartack placed as close to knot as possible. Trim lines 1

/16-inch from bartack. 

4. Perform follow-up procedure IAW WPs 0005 00 and 0006 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

French Locking Knot Attaching Loop

Bartack
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0058 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

CANOPY RIB 

0058 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Light-Duty (Table 1, WP 0050 00) 

Sewing Machine, Double Needle w/Puller (3

/8 gauge) 

(Table 1, WP 0050 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Rib, Loaded/Unloaded (WP 0068 00/WP 0069 00) As Applicable 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

REPLACE (WHOLE RIB) 

1. Cut stitching to open tail section approximately 12-inches on each side of the damaged rib. 

2. Premark the top and bottom skin and rib where the reinforcement tapes are sewn on the rib and 

every 3-inches to be used as guide marks. 

3. Layout the canopy and carefully cut the stitching and remove any items necessary to expose the 

damaged rib, such as suspension line attaching loops and reinforcing tapes. 

4. Carefully cut and remove the double rows of stitching securing the rib to the top and bottom skin and 

remove the damaged rib. 

5. Obtain a new rib from supply stock. 

6. Using the damaged rib as a pattern, transfer the guide marks made in step 2., above, on to the 

replacement rib as required. 

7. Starting at the tail end of the rib, fold and sew the bottom of the rib to the bottom skin with a double 

needle sewing machine, using size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

RIB REPLACEMENT, BOTTOM SKIN 

CROSS SEAM, BOTTOM SKIN NOSE SEAM, BOTTOM SKIN 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0058 00 

0058 00-2 

NOTE

When sewing the rib, pull tension on the bottom or top skin as 

required; however, let the rib material lay naturally to ensure the rib 

and the nose of the canopy fit correctly. Make adjustments as 

required using the guide marks made in step 1., above. 

8. If the rib being replaced is a loaded rib, start at the tail of the rib, fold and sew a second double row of 

stitching using a double needle sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

9. Starting at the tail end of the rib, fold and sew the top skin with a double needle sewing machine, size 

E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

10. If the rib being replaced is a loaded rib, start at the tail end of the rib, fold and sew a second row of 

stitching using a double needle sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

11. Re-sew the tail seam as required, in accordance with original construction and stitch formation. 

12. Re-sew any reinforcement tapes as required, in accordance with original construction and stitch 

formation.

NOTE

When re-sewing the rib to the bottom skin, ensure that the 

reinforcement tapes on the rib are centered on the reinforcement 

tape running span wise. Ensure that the guide marks on the rib are 

aligned with the guide marks on the bottom skin in the case of the 

unloaded rib. 

LOADED RIB, BOTTOM SKIN 

LOADED RIB, BOTTOM SKIN 

NON-LOADED RIB SEAM, BOTTOM SKIN 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0058 00 

0058 00-3 

NOTE

When re-sewing the rib to the top skin, ensure that the 

reinforcement tape is aligned with the guide marks made in step 2., 

above. Ensure that the guide marks on the rib are aligned with the 

guide marks on the top skin in the case of the unloaded rib. 

REPLACEMENT (PARTIAL RIB) 

NOTE

Ribs may be partially replaced not to exceed 50 percent. 

1. Cut stitching to open tail section approximately 12-inches on each side of the damaged rib. 

2. Premark the top and bottom skin where the reinforcement tapes are sewn on the rib and every 3- 

inches ribs to be used as guide marks. 

3. Carefully cut and remove any items necessary to expose the damaged rib such as suspension line 

attaching loops and reinforcement tapes. 

4. Carefully cut and remove the double row of stitching securing the rib to the top and bottom skin as 

necessary to expose only the damaged portion of the rib. 

5. Obtain a new rib from supply stock. 

6. Using the damaged rib as a pattern, mark the new rib as required to allow for a 3

/4 -inch seam. 

7. Sew the new and old rib together using two rows of straight stitching. 

8. Again, using the damaged rib as a pattern, transfer the guide marks made in step 2., above on to the 

replacement rib as required. 

9. Starting at the tail end of the rib, fold and sew the bottom of the rib to the bottom skin with a double 

needle sewing machine, using size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

NOTE

When sewing the rib, pull tension on the bottom or top skin as 

required, however, let the rib lay naturally to ensure the rib and the 

nose of the canopy fit correctly. Make adjustments as required 

using the guide marks made in step 2., above. 

10. If the rib being replaced is a loaded rib, start at the tail end of the rib, fold and sew a second double 

row of stitching, using a double needle sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per 

inch.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0058 00 

0058 00-4 

11. Starting at the tail end of the rib, fold and sew the top skin with a double needle sewing machine, size 

E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

12. If the rib is a loaded rib, start at the tail end fold and sew a second row of stitching, using a double 

needle sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

13. Re-sew the tail seam as required according to original construction and stitch formation. 

14. Re-sew any reinforcement tape as required according to original construction and stitch formation. 

15. Replace any crossport holes as required, IAW WP 0027 00. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

NON-LOADED RIB SEAM, TOP SKIN 

LOADED RIB SEAM, TOP SKIN 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0059 00 

DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SECTION REPLACEMENTS 

0059 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Replace 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Tools

Needle, Tacking (Item 29, WP 0063 00) 

Sewing Machine, Medium-Duty (Table 1, WP 0050 00) 

Shears (Item 39, WP 0063 00) 

Stitch Removal Tool (Item 40, WP 0063 00) 

Tape Measure (Item 42, WP 0063 00) 

Materials/Parts 

Cloth, Nylon Ripstop, Type I (Item 9, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size A (Item 45, WP 0076 00) 

Thread, Nylon, Size E (Item 43/44, WP 0076 00) 

Equipment Condition 

Layout on packing table or other 

suitable area. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger 

REPLACE

NOTE

Due to complexity of repair, it is recommended that pre-fabricated 

repair parts be purchased via construction from bolt material. 

1. A canopy section is defined as an area between loaded ribs on the left and right side (rigger view) 

and from seam to seam from the nose to the tail. 

2. Carefully cut and remove any items necessary to expose the damaged section, such as suspension 

line attaching loops and reinforcement tapes. 

3. Carefully cut and remove the double rows of stitching securing the ribs to the damaged section. 

4. Carefully cut and remove all stitching securing the damaged section to the nose and tail seam side 

of the section. 

5. Using the two (2) double rows of stitching that secured both loaded ribs to the section as a guide, 

draw a line the width of the section between the double rows using an authorized marking aid. 

Draw a second line 1⁄4-inch in from the previous width of the section to allow for a 1⁄4-inch fold back. 

6. Cut along the second line of both loaded ribs and remove the damaged area leaving approximately 

1⁄4-inch of material. 

7. Measure the damaged panel. Using the ripstop blocks as a guide cut a new piece of replacement 

material. Ensure the replacement piece is 1-inch wider (spanwise) and the same length on the 

nose to tail side. 

8. Sew the new section material to the adjacent section with one (1) row of straight stitching 1⁄4-inch 

from the edge on both the left and right sides, using size E, nylon thread, 7 to 11 stitches per inch, 

ensuring the raw edge is to the inside (see illustrations marked VIEW 1, TOP SKIN, and VIEW 4, 

BOTTOM SKIN). 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0059 00 

0059 00-2 

NOTE

Ensure the raw edges of the seams are sewn to the inside of the canopy. 

9. Sew the side closest to the nose side of the section with a double row of stitching as close to the 

original construction as possible using a double needle sewing machine, size E nylon thread, and 7 

to 11 stitches per inch. 

10. Re-sew any reinforcement tape as close to the original stitching construction as possible. 

NOTE

If the fourth section is the section being repaired, do not re-sew tail 

seam until all ribs have been re-sewn. 

11. Re-sew the side closest to the tail side of the section using double needle sewing machine, size E 

nylon thread and 7 to 11 stitches per inch. 

12. Re-sew the loaded ribs with a double row of straight stitching as shown in the illustration known as 

VIEWs 2 & 5. 

NOTE

When re-sewing the rib to the new section, pull tension on the top and 

bottom skin as required ensuring the rib and the end of the section fits 

back into its original place. 

NOTE

The loaded ribs are sewn on top of the 1⁄4-inch seam sewn in step 8., above 

(see illustrations known as VIEWs 2 & 5). Ensure that raw edges are not visible. 

13. Using the ripstop blocks as a guide, re-sew the non-loaded rib to the center of the section with a 

double row of stitching using a double needle sewing machine, size E nylon thread and 7 to 11 

stitches per inch (see illustrations known as VIEWs 2 & 5). 

14. Fold and sew the loaded ribs with a second double row of straight stitching as shown in the 

illustrations known as VIEWs 3 & 6. 

15. After sewing the loaded ribs, ensure that all raw edges of the new material are hidden between the 

double rows of stitching. Ensure that the stitching cannot be seen on the outside of the canopy both 

on the top and bottom skins. 

16. If the canopy section is located near the tail, close the tail as required. 

17. Re-sew any reinforcement tapes as required. 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0059 00 

0059 00-3 

ILLUSTRATION OF SECTION REPLACEMENT TOP SKIN 

VIEW 1 

INSIDE CANOPY 

Single Row Stitching 1⁄4-IN. Seam 

New Section Bottom Skin 

VIEW 2 New Section Top Skin 

LOADED RIB NON-LOADED RIB LOADED RIB 

New Section VIEW 3

Top Skin 

LOADED RIB NON-LOADED RIB LOADED RIB 
 TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0059 00 

0059 00-4 

SECTION REPLACEMENT BOTTOM SKIN 

VIEW 4 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

INSIDE CANOPY 

Single Row Stitching 1⁄4-IN. Seam 

New Section Bottom Skin 

VIEW 5

LOADED RIB NON-LOADED RIB LOADED RIB

New Section Bottom Skin 

VIEW 6

LOADED RIB NON-LOADED RIB LOADED RIB

New Section

Bottom Skin 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

CHAPTER 5 

SUPPORTING INFORMATION 

FOR

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL 

PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0060 00 

SUPPORTING INFORMATION 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

PREPARATION FOR STORAGE 

0060 00-1 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

x Storage Criteria 

x General Storage Requirements 

x Storage Specifics for Parachutes 

x In-Storage Inspection 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition 

Unpacked. 

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

STORAGE CRITERIA 

Administrative storage of the MC-4 Ram Air Personnel Parachute System will be accomplished in 

accordance with AR 750-1, and the instructions furnished below. 

GENERAL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS 

To ensure that serviceability standards of the stored parachute assembly are maintained, every effort will 

be exerted to adhere to the following general storage requirements: 

1. When available, a heated building should be used to store parachutes. 

2. Parachutes will be stored in a dry, well-ventilated location and protected from pilferage, dampness, 

fire, dirt, insects, rodents, and direct sunlight. 

3. Parachutes will not be stored in a manner which would prevent ventilation or interfere with light 

fixtures, heating vents, fire fighting devices, cooling units, exits, or fire doors. 

4. Parachutes will not be stored in a damaged, dirty, or damp condition. 

5. All stored parachute items will be marked, segregated, and located for accessibility and easy 

identification. 

6. Parachutes will not be stored in direct contact with any building floor or wall. Storage will be 

accomplished using bins, shelves, pallets, racks, or dunnage to provide airspace between the storage 

area floor and the equipment. If the pre-constructed shelving or similar storage accommodations are 

not available, locally fabricate storage provisions using suitable lumber or wooden boxes. 

7. All available material handling equipment should be used as much as possible in the handling of 

parachutes. 

8. Periodic rotation of stock, conversion of available space, proper housekeeping policies, and strict 

adherence to all safety regulations will be practiced at all times. 

STORAGE SPECIFICS FOR PARACHUTES 

In addition to the storage requirements stipulated in the general storage requirements paragraph, above, 

the following is a list of specifics that must be enforced when storing parachutes: 

1. Except for those assemblies required for contingency operation, parachutes will not be stored in a 

packed configuration. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0060 00 

0060 00-2 

2. Stored parachute assemblies will be secured from access by unauthorized personnel. 

3. A parachute that is in storage, and is administered a cyclic repack and inspection, will not be exposed 

to incandescent light or indirect sunlight for a period of more than 36-hours. In addition, exposure to 

direct sunlight will be avoided entirely. 

IN-STORAGE INSPECTION 

1. General Information. An in-storage inspection is a physical check conducted on a random sample of 

parachutes that are located in storage. 

2. Intervals. MC-4 parachutes in-storage will be inspected at least once every 180 calendar days and at 

more frequent intervals if prescribed by the local parachute maintenance officer. 

3. Inspection. Inspect to ensure that the parachute is ready for issue. 

4. Check the parachute for proper identification. 

5. Check that no damage or deterioration has been incurred. 

6. Ensure that all modifications or similar requirements have been completed. 

7. Check the adequacy of the storage facilities, efforts taken to control pests and rodents, and protection 

against unfavorable climatic conditions. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0061 00 

SUPPORTING INFORMATION 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT 

0061 00-1 Change 2 

THIS TASK COVERS: 

• In-Storage Inspection 

• Shipment 

• Accordion Folding/Rigger Rolling 

INITIAL SETUP: 

Equipment Condition 

Unpacked.

Personnel Required 

92R (10) Parachute Rigger

SHIPMENT 

Initial Shipment. The initial packaging and shipping of parachutes are the responsibility of item 

manufacturers, who are required to comply with federal and military packing specifications, as stipulated 

in contractual agreements. Parachutes are normally shipped to depot activities, by domestic freight or 

parcel post, and packed to comply with overseas shipping requirements. Except for those parachute that 

are unpackaged and subjected to random inspections or testing by depot activity, parachutes received by 

a using unit will be contained in the original packaging materials. 

Shipping Between Maintenance Activities. The shipping of parachutes between activities will be 

accomplished on a signature verification basis using whatever means of transportation is available. Used 

parachutes and other fabric items will be tagged in accordance with DA PAM 738-751, and rolled, folded, 

or placed loosely in a parachute pack, deployment bag, or other suitable container, as required. Unused 

parachutes will be transported in original shipping containers. During shipment, every effort will be made 

to protect parachute from weather elements, dust, dirt, oil, grease, and acids. Vehicles used to transport 

parachutes will be inspected to ensure the items are protected from the previously cited material 

damaging conditions. 

Other Shipping Instructions. Parachutes destined for domestic or overseas shipment will be packaged 

and marked in accordance with AR 700-15. Shipment of parachutes will be accomplished in accordance 

with TM 10-1670-201-23/T.O. 13C-1-41/NAVAIR 13-1-17. 

ACCORDION FOLDING/RIGGER ROLLING 

Accordion Folding. Personnel parachute canopy assemblies that are not packed for use should be 

accordion folded prior to entry into storage. To accordion fold a parachute canopy assembly, perform the 

following: 

1. Place the parachute canopy in proper layout. Tie risers or connector links with log record book. 

2. Fold tail and nose toward center in approximately 10 to 12-inch folds until they meet. 

3. Move slider up to bottom of canopy and daisy-chain suspension lines. 

4. Fold lines, slider, and stabilizer panels toward top of canopy, keeping lines centered on canopy. 

5. Fold canopy in half top to bottom, then in half left to right. 

6. Tie folded canopy top to bottom and-left to right using 1

/4-inch cotton webbing. 

7. Tag assembly in accordance with DA PAM 738-751. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0061 00 

Change 2 0061 00-2 

Rigger Rolling. Personnel parachute assemblies will be rigger rolled prior to being sent to or returned 

from a parachute repair activity for ease of handling and to prevent suspension line entanglement. MC-4 

parachutes are rigger rolled in the same manner as accordion folding. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0062 00

SUPPORTING INFORMATION 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

REFERENCES 

0062 00-1 Change 2 

THIS WORK PACKAGE COVERS:

• Scope 

• Publication Indexes 

• Technical Manuals 

• Field Manuals 

• Army Regulations 

• Technical Bulletins 

• Forms 

• Air Force Technical Orders 

• Air Force Technical Order Forms 

• Marine Corps Forms

SCOPE 

This appendix lists all forms, technical manuals, and miscellaneous publications referenced in this manual. 

PUBLICATION INDEXES 

The following publication indexes should be consulted frequently for the latest changes or revisions of 

references given in this work package, and for new publications relating to the material covered in this 

manual: 

DA PAM

Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms DA PAM 25-30 

The Army Maintenance Management System, Users Manual (TAMMS) DA PAM 750-8 

Functional Users Manual for The Army Maintenance Management System 

(Aviation) (TAMMSA) 

DA PAM 738-751 

TECHNICAL MANUALS 

General Maintenance of Parachutes and Other Airdrop Equipment TM 10-1670-201-23/ 

T.O. 13C-1-41/ 

NAVAIR 13-1-17 

Equipment Maintenance Forms and Procedures TM 4700-15/1/ 

Procedures for the Destruction of Air Delivery Equipment to 

Prevent Enemy Use 

TM 43-0002-1/ 

T.O. 13C3-1-10/ 

NAVAIR 13-1-19 

FIELD MANUALS 

First Aid for Soldiers FM 4-25.11 

Military Free-Fall Parachuting FM 31-19 

ARMY REGULATIONS 

Authorized Abbreviation and Brevity Codes and Acronyms AR 25-52 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0062 00

Change 2 0062 00-2 

Accident Reporting and Records AR 385-40 

Packaging of Material AR 700-15 

Army Materiel Maintenance Policy AR 750-1 

Air Drop, Parachute Recovery and Aircraft Personal Escape Systems AR 750-32 

TECHNICAL BULLETINS 

Maintenance Expenditure Limits for FSC Group 16, FSC Class 1670 TB 43-0002-43 

JOINT REGULATIONS 

Defense Disposal Manual DOD 4160.21-M 

Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms Joint Pub 1-02 

Joint Airdrop Inspection records, Malfunction Investigations and Activity 

Reporting 

AR 59-4/AFR 55-

10/OPNAVINST 4360-

24B/MCO 13480-1B 

FORMS 

Parachute Log Record DA Form 3912 

Recommended Changes to Publications DA Form 2028 

Equipment Inspection & Maintenance Worksheet DA Form 2404 

Product Quality Deficiency Report SF 368/AFR 900-4/MCO 

1650.17 

AIR FORCE TECHNICAL ORDERS

Cleaning of Parachute Assemblies T.O. 14D1-1-2 

Parachute Logs and Records T.O. DO-25-241 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0062 00

 0062 00-3/(4 Blank) Change 2 

AIR FORCE TECHNICAL ORDER FORMS

Parachute Log AFTO 391 

Parachute Repack Inspection and Component Card AFTO 392 

MARINE CORPS FORMS 

Marine Corps Military Incentive Awards Program MCO 1650.17F 

Parachute History Record NAV WPN CEN or NAV 

WPNS CL 13512/11 

Product Quality Deficiency Report (PQDR) MCO 4855.10B 

Recommended Changes to Technical Publications NAVMC 10772 

END OF WORK PACKAGE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

SUPPORTING INFORMATION 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) 

0063 00-1 Change 2 

THIS WORK PACKAGE COVERS:

• Introduction 

• Maintenance Functions 

• Explanation of Columns in the MAC 

• Explanation of Columns in Tool and Test Equipment Requirements 

• Explanation of Column in Remarks 

INTRODUCTION 

The Army Maintenance System MAC 

This section provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at the two 

maintenance levels under the Two-Level Maintenance System concept. 

The MAC (immediately following the introduction) designates overall authority and responsibility for the 

performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component. The application of the 

maintenance functions to the end item or component shall be consistent with the capacities and 

capabilities of the designated maintenance levels, which are shown in the MAC in column (4) as: 

Field – includes two columns, Unit maintenance and Direct Support maintenance. The Unit 

maintenance column is divided again into two more subcolumns, C for Operator or Crew and O for 

Unit maintenance. 

Sustainment – includes two subcolumns, General Support (H) and Depot (D). 

The tools and test equipment requirements (immediately following the MAC) list the tools and test 

equipment (both special tools and common tool sets) required for each maintenance function as 

referenced from the MAC. 

The remarks (immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements) contain supplemental 

instructions and explanatory notes for a particular maintenance function. 

Maintenance Functions 

Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as follows: 

1. Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/or 

electrical characteristics with established standards through examination (e.g., by sight, sound, or 

feel.) This includes scheduled inspection and gagings and evaluation of cannon tubes. 

2. Test. To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or electrical 

characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards on a 

scheduled basis, i.e., load testing of lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses. 

3. Service. Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition; e.g., to clean 

(includes decontaminate, when required), to preserve, to drain, to paint, or to replenish fuel, 

lubricants, chemical fluids, or gases. This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil 

mechanisms. The following are examples of service functions: 

a. Unpack. To remove from packing box for service or when required for the performance of 

maintenance operations. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

Change 2 0063 00-2 

b. Repack. To return item to packing box after service and other maintenance operations. 

c. Clean. To rid the item of contamination. 

d. Touch up. To spot paint scratched or blistered surfaces. 

e. Mark. To restore obliterated identification. 

4. Adjust. To maintain or regulate, within prescribed limits, by bringing into proper position, or by setting 

the operating characteristics to specified parameters.

5. Align. To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired 

performance

6. Calibrate. To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of test, 

measuring, and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement. Consists of comparisons of 

two instruments, one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy, to detect and adjust any 

discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared.

7. Remove/Install. To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other 

maintenance functions. Install may be the act of emplacing, seating, or fixing into position a spare, 

repair part, or module (component or assembly) in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an 

equipment or system.

8. Paint. To prepare and spray color coats of paint so that the ammunition can be identified and 

protected. The color indicating primary use is applied, preferably, to the entire exterior surface as the 

background color of the item. Other markings are to be repainted as original so as to retain proper 

ammunition identification.

9. Replace. To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place. 

“Replace” is authorized by the MAC and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position 

code of the Source, Maintenance and Recoverability (SMR) code.

10. Repair. The application of maintenance services, including fault location/troubleshooting, 

removal/installation, disassembly/assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify troubles 

and restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage, fault, malfunction, or failure in a 

part, subassembly, module (component or assembly), end item, or system.

NOTE 

The following definitions are applicable to the “repair” maintenance function: 

Services. Inspect, test, service, adjust, align, calibrate, and/or replace. 

Fault location/troubleshooting. The process of investigating and detecting the cause of 

equipment malfunctioning; the act of isolating a fault within a system or Unit Under Test 

(UUT). 

Disassembly/assembly. The step-by-step breakdown (taking apart) of a spare/functional group 

coded item to the level of its least component, that is assigned an SMR code for the level of 

maintenance under consideration (i.e., identified as maintenance significant). 

Actions. Welding, grinding, riveting, straightening, facing, machining, and/or resurfacing.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

0063 00-3 Change 2 

11. Overhaul. That maintenance effort (service/action) prescribed to restore an item to a completely 

serviceable/operational condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical 

publications. Overhaul is normally the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army. 

Overhaul does not normally return an item to like new condition. 

12. Rebuild. Consists of those services/actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment 

to a like new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards. Rebuild is the highest 

degree of material maintenance applied to Army equipment. The rebuild operation includes the act of 

returning to zero those age measurements (e.g., hours/miles.) considered in classifying Army 

equipment/components. 

Explanation of Columns in the MAC 

Column (1) Group Number. Column (1) lists Functional Group Code (FGC) numbers, the purpose of 

which is to identify maintenance significant components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules with 

the Next Higher Assembly (NHA). 

Column (2) Component/Assembly. Column (2) contains the names of components, assemblies, 

subassemblies, and modules for which maintenance is authorized. 

Column (3) Maintenance Function. Column (3) lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in 

column (2). (For a detailed explanation of these functions refer to “Maintenance Functions” outlined 

above). 

Column (4) Maintenance Level. Column (4) specifies each level of maintenance authorized to perform 

each function listed in column (3), by indicating work time required (expressed as manhours in whole 

hours or decimals) in the appropriate subcolumn. This work time figure represents the active time 

required to perform that maintenance function at the indicated level of maintenance. If the number or 

complexity of the tasks within the listed maintenance function varies at different maintenance levels, 

appropriate work time figures are to be shown for each level. The work time figure represents the 

average time required to restore an item (assembly, subassembly, component, module, end item, or 

system) to a serviceable condition under typical field operating conditions. This time includes preparation 

time (including any necessary disassembly/assembly time), troubleshooting/fault location time, and 

quality assurance time in addition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the 

maintenance functions authorized in the MAC. The system designations for the various maintenance 

levels are as follows: 

 Field:

 

Sustainment: 

C Operator or Crew maintenance 

O Unit maintenance 

F Direct Support maintenance 

L Specialized Repair Activity 

H General Support maintenance 

D Depot maintenance 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

Change 2 0063 00-4 

NOTE 

The “L” maintenance level is not included in column (4) of the MAC. Functions to this level of 

maintenance are identified by work time figure in the “H” column of column (4), and an 

associated reference code is used in the REMARKS column (6). This code is keyed to the 

remarks and the SRA complete repair application is explained there. 

Column (5) Tools and Equipment Reference Code. Column (5) specifies, by code, those common tool 

sets (not individual tools), common Test, Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE), and special 

tools, special TMDE and special support equipment required to perform the designated function. Codes 

are keyed to the entries in the tools and test equipment table. 

Column (6) Remarks Code. When applicable, this column contains a letter code, in alphabetic order, 

which is keyed to the remarks table entries. 

Explanation of Columns in Tools and Test Equipment Requirements 

Column (1) - Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code. The tool or test equipment reference code 

correlates with a code used in column (5) of the MAC. 

Column (2) - Maintenance Level. The lowest level of maintenance authorized to use the tool or test 

equipment. 

Column (3) - Nomenclature. Name or identification of tool or test equipment. 

Column (4) - National Stock Number (NSN). The NSN of the tool or test equipment. 

Column (5) - Tool Number. The manufacturer’s part number. 

Explanation of Columns in Remarks 

Column (1) - Remarks Code. The code recorded in column (6) of the MAC. 

Column (2) - Remarks. This column lists information pertinent to the maintenance function being 

performed as indicated in the MAC. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

0063 00-5 Change 2 

Table 1. Maintenance Allocation Chart 

for the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System 

(4) 

MAINTENANCE LEVEL 

FIELD SUSTAINMENT 

UNIT DIRECT 

SUPPORT 

GENERAL 

SUPPORT 

DEPOT 

(1) 

GROUP 

NUMBER 

(2) 

COMPONENT/ 

ASSEMBLY 

(3) 

MAINTENANCE 

FUNCTION 

C O F H D 

(5) 

TOOLS AND 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(6) 

REMARKS 

00 MC-4 RAM AIR 

PARACHUTE 

SYSTEM 

 Table 2 in this 

WP. 

01 DEPLOYMENT 

BAG 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.5 

0.3 

 

Table 2 in this 

WP. 

A 

0101 GROMMET Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

 A 

0102 SUPPORT 

WEBBING 

Inspect 

Repair 

 0.1 

0.2 

 A 

E 

02 DEPLOYMENT 

SYSTEM, 

RESERVE 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.2 

0.1 

 

Table 2 in this 

WP. 

A 

0201 PILOT 

PARACHUTE 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

 A 

0202 DEPLOYMENT 

BAG AND 

BRIDLE 

ASSEMBLY 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

 A 

0203 SAFETY LOOP Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

 A 

03 CANOPY, MAIN Service 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 1.0 

0.5 

1.5 

1.0 

 

Table 2 in this 

WP. 

B C 

A 

D,E 

0301 SUSPENSION 

LINES 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.3 

1.0 

 A 

0302 CONTROL 

LINES 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.3 

1.0 

 A 

0303 CASCADE LINE Inspect 

Replace 

 0.3 

1.0 

 A 

0304 SLIDER Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

0.1 

 A 

E 

0305 CROSSPORTS Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

1.0 

 A 

E 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

Change 2 0063 00-6 

Table 1. Maintenance Allocation Chart 

for the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System - continued 

(4) 

MAINTENANCE LEVEL 

FIELD SUSTAINMENT 

UNIT DIRECT 

SUPPORT 

GENERAL 

SUPPORT 

DEPOT 

(1) 

GROUP 

NUMBER 

(2) 

COMPONENT/ 

ASSEMBLY 

(3) 

MAINTENANCE 

FUNCTION 

C O F H D 

(5) 

TOOLS AND 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(6) 

REMARKS 

0306 CANOPY RIB Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

1.5 

 A 

0307 SECTION 

REPLACEMENTS 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

1.5 

 A 

0308 STABILIZER Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

1.0 

 A

E 

0309 TAIL SEAM Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.5 

0.8 

 A

E 

0310 SUSPENSION 

LINE 

ATTACHING 

LOOP 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

0.5 

 A

E 

04 CANOPY, 

RESERVE 

Service 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 1.0 

0.5 

1.5 

1.0 

 

Table 2 in this 

WP. 

B, C 

A 

D, E 

0401 SUSPENSION 

LINES 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.3 

1.0 

 A 

0402 CONTROL LINES Inspect 

Replace 

 0.3 

1.0 

 A 

0403 CASCADE LINE Inspect 

Replace 

 0.3 

1.0 

 A 

0404 SLIDER Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

0.1 

 A

E 

0405 CROSSPORTS Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

1.0 

 A

E 

0406 CANOPY RIB Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

1.5 

 A 

0407 SECTION 

REPLACEMENTS 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

1.5 

 A 

0408 STABILIZER Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

1.0 

 A

E 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

 0063 00-7 Change 2 

Table 1. Maintenance Allocation Chart 

for the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System - continued 

(4) 

MAINTENANCE LEVEL 

FIELD SUSTAINMENT 

UNIT DIRECT 

SUPPORT 

GENERAL 

SUPPORT 

DEPOT 

(1) 

GROUP 

NUMBER 

(2) 

COMPONENT/ 

ASSEMBLY 

(3) 

MAINTENANCE 

FUNCTION 

C O F H D 

(5) 

TOOLS AND 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(6) 

REMARKS 

0409 TAIL SEAM Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.5 

0.8 

 A

E 

0410 SUSPENSION 

LINE 

ATTACHING 

LOOP 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

0.5 

 A

E 

05 RISERS, MAIN Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.5 

0.5 

 

Table 2 in this 

WP. 

A 

E 

0501 CABLE FLUTE Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

0.5 

 A

E 

0502 KEEPERS Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

0.5 

 A

E 

06 HARNESS/CON

TAINER 

ASSEMBLY 

Inspect 

Service 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.5 

1.0 

1.0 

1.0 

 

Table 2 in this 

WP. 

A 

B 

E 

0601 GROMMETS Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

0.3 

 

0602 SNAP 

FASTENERS 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

0.3 

 

0603 RIPCORD 

POCKET, MAIN 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

0.5 

 

A, G 

0604 RIPCORD 

POCKET, 

RESERVE 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.2 

0.5 

 

A, G 

0605 POCKET, FF-2 Inspect 

Repair 

 0.1 

0.2 

 A

E 

0606 POCKET, AR2 Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.8 

 A

0607 PACK 

STIFFENERS 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.5 

 A

0608 RIPCORD 

PROTECTOR 

FLAP 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

0.5 

 A

E 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

Change 2 0063 00-8 

Table 1. Maintenance Allocation Chart 

for the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System - continued 

(4) 

MAINTENANCE LEVEL 

FIELD SUSTAINMENT 

UNIT DIRECT 

SUPPORT 

GENERAL 

SUPPORT 

DEPOT 

(1) 

GROUP 

NUMBER 

(2) 

COMPONENT/ 

ASSEMBLY 

(3) 

MAINTENANCE 

FUNCTION 

C O F H D 

(5) 

TOOLS AND 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(6) 

REMARKS 

0609 FASTENER, 

HOOK, PILE, 

TAPE 

Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

0.5 

 A

E 

0610 WAISTBAND Inspect 

Repair 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

0.5 

 A

E 

0611 POWER CABLE 

ASSEMBLY, 

AR2 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

0.3 

 A

0612 RESERVE 

CANOPY 

CONVERSION 

TO MAIN 

CANOPY 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

1.0 

 

A, B, C, D 

 

0613 AR2 POWER 

CABLE SLEEVE 

Inspect 

Replace 

 0.1 

1.0 

 A
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

 0063 00-9 Change 2 

Table 2. Tool and Test Equipment Requirements 

for the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System 

(1) 

TOOL OR TEST 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(2) 

MAINTENANCE 

LEVEL 

(3) 

NOMENCLATURE 

(4) 

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER 

(5) 

TOOL NUMBER 

1 O Anvil, Chuck Fastener 5120-00-357-6181 9902 

2 O Bit, Drill, 5/32-IN. 5133-00-227-9652 11418 

3 O Bit, Drill, Countersink, 5

/8-IN, 

Set 5133-00-529-4577 GGG-C-613 

4 O Brush, Scrub, Household 7920-00-282-2470 A-A-2074 

5 O Brush, Stenciling 7510-00-248-9285 H-B-118 

6 O Chuck 5120-00-144-2084 1410 

7 O Chuck 5120-00-144-2088 1412 

8 O Die 5120-00-090-4412 1401 

9 O Die 5120-00-144-2097 1407 

10 O Die Set, Spur Grommet, No. 0 5120-00-221-1146 17-0 

11 O Die Set, Spur Grommet, No. 2 5120-00-221-1148 17-2 

12 O Die Set, Spur Grommet, No. 5 5120-00-221-1151 17-5 

13 O Die Set, Spur Grommet, No. 8 5120-00-221-1142 216-8 

14 O Drill, Electric, 3/8-IN. Drive 5130-00-935-7354 SP6039 

15 O File, Flat, 1-IN. 5110-00-249-2850 GGG-F-325 

16 O Finger Trap Tool WP 0075 00 N/A 

17 O Grommet Setting, Stainless 

Steel, #0 Local Purchase 

18 O Grommet Setting, Stainless 

Steel, #2 Local Purchase 

19 O Hammer, Ball Peen, 16-oz. 5120-00-114-5499 GGG-H-86 

20 O Holder, Die, Fastener 5120-00-357-6177 192 

21 O Inspection Kit, Ripcord Grip 1670-00-910-3866 11-1-0595 

22 O Key, Socket Head Set (Allen 

Type) 5120-00-729-6392 GGG-K-275 

23 O Knife 5110-00-162-2205 MIL-K-818C 

24 O Knife, Hot Metal 3439-01-197-7656 4025 (78976) 

25 O Lead, Pig, 5-Pounds 9650-00-264-5050 QQ-C-40 

26 O Machine, Stencil Cutting 7490-00-164-0541 A-A-2722 

27 O Mallet, Rawhide 5120-00-293-3397 GGG-H-33 

28 O Needle, Basting 8315-00-281-9484 FF-N-180 

29 O Needle, Tacking 8315-00-262-3733 FF-N-180 

30 O Packing Paddle 1670-00-764-6381 11-1-152 

31 O Pins, Temporary Locking Locally MFG N/A 

32 O Pliers, Large, Diagonal Cut 5110-00-222-2708 GGG-P-468 

*33 O Porosity Machine, Gurley 

Model #4301 Local Purchase 4301 

34 O Pot, Melting, Electric 5120-00-924-5213 L-115 

35 O Press, Hand Operated 5120-00-880-0619 A741 

36 O Punch, Center 5120-00-221-1072 GGG-P-831 

37 O Screwdriver, Flat-tip, 1⁄4-IN. 5120-00-596-8653 GGG-S-121 

38 O Screwdriver, Phillips, No. 2 5120-00-234-8913 2752 

39 O Shears 5110-00-223-6370 GGG-S-00278 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0063 00 

Change 2 0063 00-10 

Table 2. Tool and Test Equipment Requirements 

for the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System - continued 

(1) 

TOOL OR TEST 

EQUIPMENT 

REFERENCE 

CODE 

(2) 

MAINTENANCE 

LEVEL 

(3) 

NOMENCLATURE 

(4) 

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER 

(5) 

TOOL NUMBER 

40 O Stitch Removal Tool Local Purchase N/A 

41 O Stroke Simulator 1670-01-428-7637 11-1-4054-1 

42 O Tape Measure 5210-00-182-4797 W7312 

43 O Template, Crossport, 

Oversized Local Purchase 0471-0 

44 O Template, Crossport, 

Standard Local Purchase 0471-1 

45 O Wrench, 7/16-IN. Open End 5120-00-228-9505 A-A-1358 

46 O Wrench, Adjustable, 6-IN. 5120-00-264-3795 5385A12 

 * Gurley Precision Instruments 

 514 Fulton Street 

 Troy, New York 12181 

 (518) 274-0336 

 www.gurley.com

Table 3. Remarks 

for the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System 

(1) 

REMARKS 

CODE 

(2) 

REMARKS 

A Inspect is a Technical Rigger Type Inspection. 

B Service is cleaning of equipment. 

C Service is the packing of parachutes. 

D Repair by restitching, darning, retacking, or restencilling the canopy panel. 

E Repair at the unit maintenance level consists of darning, restitching, patching and the 

replacement of parts authorized for unit maintenance. 

F Repair by darning, retacking, restitching, splice the edge binding, and repairing grommets. 

Replacement of parts authorized for unit maintenance. 

G Perform ripcord pocket test. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0064 00

SUPPORTING INFORMATION 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST (RPSTL), INTRODUCTION 

0064 00-1 

SCOPE

This manual lists and authorizes spare and repair parts; special tools; special test, measurement, and 

diagnostic equipment (TMDE); and other special support equipment required for performance of 

organizational, direct support, and general support maintenance of the MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel 

Parachute System. It authorizes the requisitioning, issue, and disposition of spares, repair parts and 

special tools, as indicated by the Source, Maintenance and Recoverability (SMR) codes. 

GENERAL INFORMATION 

This Repair Parts and Special Tools List is divided into the following sections: 

WP 0057 00, Repair Parts List. A list of spares and repair parts authorized by this RPSTL is for use in 

the performance of maintenance. The list also includes parts that must be removed for replacement of the 

authorized parts. Parts lists are composed of functional groups in ascending alphanumeric sequence, with 

the parts in each group listed in ascending figure, and item, number sequence. Bulk materials are listed. 

Special Tools List. (Not Applicable). No special tools are required to assemble the MC-4 Parachute.

Common tools are listed in WP 0056 00 because they are required for performance of packing and 

maintenance procedures/tasks. These tools are authorized under Chapter 1, WP 0001 00 of this manual. 

Cross Reference Indexes. A list, in National Item Identification Number (NIIN) sequence, of all National 

Stock Numbers (NSN) appearing in the listings (WP 0074 00), followed by a list in alphanumeric sequence 

of all part numbers appearing in the listings (WP 0075 00). National stock numbers and part numbers are 

cross-referenced to each illustration figure and item number appearance. 

EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS

Column 1, Item No. Indicates the number used to identify items called out in the illustration. 

Column 2, SMR Code. The Source, Maintenance, and Recoverability (SMR) code is a 5-position code 

containing supply/requisitioning information, maintenance category authorization criteria, and disposition 

instructions, as shown in the following breakout: 

*Complete Repair: Maintenance capacity, capability, and authority to perform all the corrective 

maintenance tasks of the REPAIR function in a use/user environment in order to restore serviceability 

to a failed item.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0064 00

0064 00-2 

Source Code. The source code tells you how to get an item needed for maintenance, repair, or 

overhaul of an end item/equipment. Source codes are always the first and second positions of the 

SMR code. Explanations of source codes follow: 

SOURCE CODE EXPLANATION 

PA

PB

PC

PD

PE

PF

PG

Stocked items: Use the applicable NSN to request/ 

requisition items with these source codes. They are 

authorized to the category indicated by the code 

entered in the 3rd position of the SMR code. 

KD

KF

KF

Items with these codes are not to be requested/ 

requisitioned individually. They are part of a kit that is 

authorized to the maintenance category indicated in 

the 3rd position of the SMR code. The complete kit 

must be requisitioned and applied. 

MO – (Made at org/AVUM Level) 

MF – (Made at DS/AVUM Level) 

MH – (Made at GS Level) 

ML – (Made at Specialized Repair Act (SRA)) 

MD – (Made at Depot) 

Items with these codes are not to be 

requested/requisitioned individually. They must be 

made from bulk material that is identified by the part 

number in the DESCRIPTION and USABLE ON 

CODE (UOC) column and listed in the Bulk Material 

group of the repair parts list in the RPSTL. If the item 

is authorized to you by the 3rd position code of the 

SMR code, but the source code indicates it is made at 

a higher level, order the item from the higher level of 

maintenance.

AO – (Assembled by org/AVUM Level) 

AF – (Assembled by DS/AVIM Level) 

AH – (Assembled by GS Category) 

AL – (Assembled by SRA) 

AD – (Assembled by Depot) 

Items with these codes are not to be 

requested/requisitioned individually. The parts that 

make up the assembled item must be requisitioned or 

fabricated and assembled at the level of maintenance 

indicated by the source code. If the 3rd position code 

of the SMR code authorizes you to replace the item, 

but the source code indicates the item is assembled 

at a higher level, order the item from the higher level 

of maintenance. 

XA - Do not requisition an XA-coded item. Order its next 

higher assembly. (Also, refer to the NOTE below.) 

XB - If and XB-coded item is not available from salvage, 

order it using the CAGEC and the given part number. 

XC - 

The installation drawing, diagram, instruction sheet, 

and field service drawing that is identified by 

manufacturers part number. 

XD - 

Item is not stocked. Order an XD-coded item through 

normal supply channels using the CAGEC and the 

part number given, if no NSN is available. 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0064 00

0064 00-3 

NOTE

Cannibalization or controlled exchanged, when authorized, may be 

used as a source of supply for items with the above source codes, 

except for those source coded XA or those aircraft support item 

restricted by requirements of AR 750-1. 

Maintenance Code. Maintenance codes tell you the level(s) of maintenance authorized to USE and 

REPAIR support items. The maintenance codes are entered in the third and fourth positions of the 

SMR Code as follow: 

Third position. The maintenance code entered in the third position tells you the lowest 

maintenance level authorized to remove, replace, and use an item. The maintenance code entered 

in the third position will indicate authorization to one of the following levels of maintenance. 

MAINTENANCE CODE APPLICATION/EXPLANATION 

C - Crew or operator maintenance done within 

organizational or aviation unit maintenance. 

O - Organizational or aviation unit category can 

remove, replace, and use the item. 

F - Direct support or aviation intermediate level can 

remove, replace, and use the item. 

H - General Support level can remove, replace, and 

use the item. 

L - Specialized repair activity can remove, replace, 

and use the item. 

D - Depot level can remove, replace, and use the 

item.

Fourth position. The maintenance code entered in the fourth position tells whether or not the item 

is to be repaired and identifies the lowest maintenance level with the capability to do complete 

repair (i.e., perform all authorized repair functions.) Some limited repair may be done on the item at 

a lower level of maintenance, if authorized by the Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) and SMR 

code. This position will contain one of the following maintenance codes. 

MAINTENANCE CODE APPLICATION/EXPLANATION 

O - Organizational (or aviation unit) is the lowest level 

that can do complete repair of the item. 

F - 

Direct support (or aviation intermediate) is the 

lowest level that can do complete repair of the 

item.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0064 00

0064 00-4 

MAINTENANCE CODE - Continued APPLICATION/ EXPLANATION - Continued 

H - General support is the lowest level that can do 

complete repair of the item. 

L - 

Specialized repair activity (designate the 

specialized repair activity) is the lowest level that 

can do complete repair of the item. 

D - Depot is the lowest level that can do complete 

repair of the item. 

Z - Non-repairable. No repair is authorized. 

B -

No repair is authorized. (No parts or special tools 

are authorized for the maintenance of a B-coded 

item.) However, the item may be reconditioned by 

adjusting, lubricating, etc., at the user level. 

Recoverability code. Recoverability codes are assigned to items to indicate the disposition action on 

unserviceable items. The recoverability code is entered in the fifth position of the SMR code as 

follows:

RECOVERABILITY CODE APPLICATION/EXPLANATION 

Z - 

Non-repairable item. When unserviceable, 

condemn and dispose of the item at the level of 

maintenance shown in the 3rd position of the 

SMR Code. 

O - 

Repairable item. When uneconomically 

reparable, condemn and dispose of the item at 

organizational or aviation unit level. 

F - 

Repairable item. When uneconomically 

repairable, condemn and dispose of the item at 

the direct support or aviation intermediate level. 

H - 

Repairable item. When uneconomically 

repairable, condemn and dispose of the item at 

the general support level. 

D - 

Repairable item. When beyond the lower level 

repair capability, return to depot. Condemnation 

and disposal of item not authorized below depot 

level.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0064 00

0064 00-5 

RECOVERABILITY CODE - Continued APPLICATION/EXPLANATION - Continued 

L - 

Repairable item. Condemnation and disposal 

not authorized below Specialized Repair Activity 

(SRA).

A - 

Item requires special handling or condemnation 

procedures because of specific reasons (e.g., 

precious metal content, high dollar value, critical 

material or hazardous material). Refer to 

appropriate manuals/directives for specific 

instructions.

Column 3, CAGE Code. The Commercial and Government Entity Code (CAGEC) is a 5-digit numeric 

code that is used to identify the manufacturer, distributor, or Government agency that supplies the item. 

Column 4, Part Number. Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual, company, 

firm, corporation, or Government activity), which controls the design and characteristics of the item by 

means of its engineering drawings, specifications, standards, and inspection requirements to identify an 

item or range of items. 

NOTE

When you use an NSN to requisition an item, the item you receive 

may have a different part number from the part ordered. 

Column 5, Description and Usable on Code (UOC). This column includes the following information: 

1. The Federal item name and, when repaired, a minimum description to identify the item. 

2. The physical security classification of the item is indicated by the parenthetical entry, (insert applicable 

physical security classification abbreviation, e.g., Phy Sec CI (C) – Confidential, Phy Sec CI (S) 

Secret, Phy Sec CI (T) – Top Secret. 

3. Items that are included in kits and sets are listed below the name of the kit or set. 

4. Spare/repair parts that make up an assembled item are listed immediately following the assembled 

item line entry. 

5. Part numbers for bulk materials are referenced in this column in the line item entry for the item to be 

manufactured/fabricated.

6. When the item is not used will all serial numbers of the same model, the effective serial numbers are 

shown on the last line(s) of the description (before UOC). 

7. The usable on code, when applicable (see the “SPECIAL INFORMATION” paragraph below). 

8. In the Special Tools List section, the Basis of Issue (BOI) appears as the last line(s) in the entry for 

each special tool, special TMDE, and other special support equipment. When density of equipment 

supported exceeds density spread indicated in the BOI, the total authorization is increased 

proportionately.
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0064 00

0064 00-6 

9. The statement END OF FIGURE appears just below the last item description in Column 5 for a given 

figure.

Column 6, QTY. The QTY (quantity per figure column) indicates the quantity of the item used in the 

breakout shown on the illustration figure, which is prepared for a functional group, sub functional group, or 

an assembly. A “V” appearing in the column, in lieu of a quantity, indicates that the quantity is variable 

and may vary from application to application. 

SPECIAL INFORMATION 

The Usable on Code title appears in the lower right corner of column (5), Description. Usable on codes 

are shown in the right-hand margin of the description column. 

Bulk materials required to manufacture items are listed in the Bulk Material group of this manual. NSNs 

for bulk materials are also referenced in the description column of the line item entry for the item to be 

manufactured/fabricated. Detailed manufacturing instructions for items source coded to be manufactured 

or fabricated are found in this manual. 

Detailed assembly instructions for items source coded to be assembled from component spare/repair 

parts are found in this manual. Items that make up the assembly are listed immediately following the 

assembled item entry. 

Line item entries for repair part kits and sets appear as the last entries in the repair part listing for the 

figure in which their parts are listed as repair parts. 

Items that have the word Bulk in the figure number column will have an index number shown in the item 

number column. This index number is furnished for use as a cross-reference between the National Stock 

Number/Part Number Index and the bulk material list. 

In the repair parts list, some items are indented to show that they are components of the item under which 

they are indented. 

EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS 

National Stock Number (NSN) Index.

1. Stock number column. This column lists the NSN by National Item Identification Number (NIIN) 

sequence. The NIIN consists of the last nine digits of the NSN, i.e. 

When using this column to locate an item, ignore the first 4 digits of the NSN. However, the 

complete NSN should be used when ordering items by stock number. 

2. Fig. column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located. 

3. Item column. The item number identifies the item associated with the figure listed in the adjacent Fig. 

column. This item is also identified by the NSN listed on the same line. 

NSN

5305-01-574-1467

NIIN
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0064 00

0064 00-7 

Part Number Index. Part numbers in this index are listed by part number in ascending alphanumeric 

sequence (i.e., vertical arrangement of letter and number combination which places the first letter or digit 

of each group in order A through Z, followed by the numbers 0 through 9, and each following letter or digit 

in like order). 

1. CAGEC column. The Commercial and Government Entity Code is a 5-digit numeric code used to 

identify the manufacturer, distributor, or Government agency, etc., that supplies the item. 

2. Part number column. Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer (individual, firm, 

corporation, or Government activity) that controls the design and characteristics of the item by means 

of its engineering drawings, specifications, standards, and inspection requirements to identify an item 

or range of items. 

3. Stock number column. This column lists the NSN for the associated part number and manufacturer 

identified in the part number and CAGEC columns to the left. 

4. Fig. column. This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified/located. 

5. Item column. The item number is that number assigned to the item as it appears in the figure 

referenced in the adjacent figure number column. 

HOW TO LOCATE REPAIR PARTS 

When National Stock Number or Part Number is Not Known. 

1. First. Using the table of contents, determine the functional group or sub-functional group to which the 

item belongs. This is necessary since the figures are prepared for functional groups and subfunctional groups, and listings are divided into the same groups. 

2. Second. Find the item on the figure covering the functional group or sub-functional group to which the 

item belongs. 

3. Third. Identify the item on the figure and note the item number of the item. 

4. Fourth. Refer to the Repair Parts List for the figure to find the line item entry for the item number 

noted on the figure. 

When National Stock Number or Part Number is Known. 

1. First. Using the Index of National Stock Numbers and Part Numbers, find the pertinent National Stock 

Number or part number. The NSN index is in the National Item Identification Number (NIIN) 

*sequence. The part numbers in the Part Number index are listed in ascending alphanumeric 

sequence. Both indexes cross-reference you to the illustration figure and item number of the item you 

are looking for.

*The NIIN consists of the last 9 digits of the NSN, as shown above. 

NSN

5305-01-574-1467

NIIN
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0064 00

0064 00-8 

2. Second. After finding the figure and item number, verify that the item is the one you’re looking for, 

then locate the item number in the repair parts list for the figure. 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0065 00 

GROUP 00 MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

0065 00-(1Blank)/2 

Figure 1. MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System (Sheet 1 of 3) 

1 2

8

3

7

5

6

4
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0065 00 

GROUP 00 MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

0065 00-3 

Figure 1. MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System (Sheet 2 of 3) 

11 12

10

9
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0065 00 

GROUP 00 MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

0065 00-4 

Figure 1. MC-4 Ram Air Free-Fall Personnel Parachute System (Sheet 3 of 3) 

22 1⁄2-IN. 

to 23 1⁄2-IN. 

18

13

1-IN.

12-IN. ± 1⁄2-IN.

16

15

14

17
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0065 00 

GROUP 00 MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0065 00-5 

 (1) 

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 00, Parachute System, MC-4 

Figure 1, Parachute System, Ram Air, MC-4 11-1-3516 

1 PAOOO 1670-01-330-3747 81337 11-1-3522-1 Pilot Chute Assembly, 

Main 1

2 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3283 81337 11-1-3523-1 Bridle Assembly, Pilot 

Chute, Main 1

3 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3282 81337 11-1-3524-2 Ripcord Assembly, Main 1 

4 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3281 81337 11-1-3525 Ripcord Assembly, 

Reserve 1

5 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3743 81337 11-1-3526-1 Ripcord Assembly, Main 

Release 1

6 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3738 81337 11-1-3527-1 Static Line Assembly, 

Reserve 1

7 PAOOO 1670-01-334-7597 81337 11-1-3521-1 Deployment Bag 

Assembly, Main 1

8 PAOZZ 1670-01-342-7686 81337 11-1-3520-1 Deployment System, 

Reserve 1

9 PAOOO 1670-01-332-3916 81337 11-1-3518-0 Parachute Assembly, 

Main Parachute 1

10 PAOOO 1670-01-330-3279 81337 11-1-3518-1 Parachute Assembly, 

Reserve Parachute 1

11 PAOOO 1670-01-330-3284 81337 11-1-3519-1 Riser Set, 3-Ring, Main 1 

12 PAOOO 1670-01-330-3280 81337 11-1-3517-1 Harness/Container 

Assembly 1
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0065 00 

GROUP 00 MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0065 00-6 

 (1) 

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

13 PAOZZ 1670-01-487-6077 81337 11-1-3530-1 Loop, Locking, Elastic 1 

14 XDOZZ Commercial 929174160 Washer, Flat #14L, Nickel 

Plated, Brass or Equal 1

15 PAOZZ 1670-01-475-1207 81337 11-1-4235-1 Pocket Assembly, 

Padded, AR2 1

16 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3741 81337 11-1-3528-1 Loop, Closing, Main, 12-

IN. ± 1⁄2-IN. 1

17 XDOZZ Commercial 92917A140 

Washer, Flat, Nickel 

Plated, Brass or Equal, ID 

0.2-IN., OD 0.5-IN., 

Thickness 0.04-IN. 

1

18 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3742 81337 11-1-3529-1 Loop, Closing, Reserve, 

22 1⁄2-IN. to 23 1⁄2-IN. 1

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0066 00 

GROUP 01 MAIN DEPLOYMENT BAG 

0066 00-(1 Blank)/2 

Figure 2. Main Deployment Bag 

1

1
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0066 00 

GROUP 01 MAIN DEPLOYMENT BAG 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0066 00-3/(4 Blank) 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 01, Deployment Bag. Main 

Figure 2, Deployment Bag, Main 11-1-3521 

1 PAOZZ 5325-01-506-7568 81349 NASM16491 

Grommet, Rolled Rim 

and Spur No. 5, Type 

III, Class II 

1

END OF FIGURE 


TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0067 00 

GROUP 02 RESERVE DEPLOYMENT SYSTEM 

0067 00- (1 Blank)/2 

Figure 3. Reserve Deployment System 

1

2

3
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0067 00 

GROUP 02 RESERVE DEPLOYMENT SYSTEM 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0067 00- 3/(4 Blank) 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 02, Deployment System, Reserve 

Figure 3, Deployment System, Reserve 11-1-3520 

1 PAOZZ 1670-01-331-5423 81337 11-1-3545-1 Pilot Chute Assembly, 

Reserve 1

2 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3748 81337 11-1-3544-1 Deployment Bag and 

Bridle Assembly, Reserve 1

3 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3740 81337 11-1-3533-1 Loop Assembly, Safety 

Stow 1

END OF FIGURE 


TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0068 00 

GROUP 03 MAIN CANOPY 

0068 00-(1 Blank)/2 

Figure 4. Main Canopy 

5

9 8 7

6

10

2

3

13

12

1

4

11

2

3
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0068 00 

GROUP 03 MAIN CANOPY 

REPAIR PARTS LIST

0068 00-3 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 03, Canopy, Main 

Figure 4, Canopy, Main 11-1-3518-0 

1 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3419-1 Rib, Loaded, Left 1 

2 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3419-4 Rib, Unloaded 6 

3 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3419-5 Rib, Loaded 6 

4 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3419-3 Rib, Loaded, Center 1 

5 PAFZZ 1670-01-330-3746 81337 11-1-3699-1 Suspension Line Set 1 

6 PAOZZ 1670-01-342-5135 81337 11-1-3532-1 Toggle Assembly, Soft 2 

7 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3691 63266 HSS358-6 

Link, Connector, 

Stainless Steel #6 or 

equal

4

8 PAOOO 1670-01-330-3744 81337 11-1-3531-1 

Slider Assembly 

Domed, 27-IN. by 28-

IN.

1

9 PAFZZ 1670-01-330-3745 81337 11-1-3700-0 Control Line Assembly, 

Main, Set 1

10 XDOZZ 57771 Commercial 

Grommet, Rolled Rim 

and Spur Grommet, 

Size 8, Nickel Plated 

Brass 

4
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0068 00 

GROUP 03 MAIN CANOPY 

REPAIR PARTS LIST

0068 00-4 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

11 XDOZZ 81337 11-1-3419-2 Rib, Loaded, Right 1 

12 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3418-2 Panel, Stabilizer, Right 1 

13 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3418-1 Panel, Stabilizer, Left 1 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0069 00 

GROUP 04 RESERVE CANPOY 

0069 00-(1 Blank)/2 

Figure 5. Reserve Canopy 

5

9 8 7

6

10

2

3

13

12

1

4

11

2

3
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0069 00 

GROUP 04 RESERVE CANOPY 

REPAIR PARTS LIST

0069 00-3 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 04, Canopy, Reserve 

Figure 5, Canopy, Reserve 11-1-3518-1 

1 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3419-1 Rib, Loaded, Left 1 

2 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3419-4 Rib, Unloaded 6 

3 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3419-5 Rib, Loaded 6 

4 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3419-3 Rib, Loaded, Center 1 

5 PAFZZ 1670-01-330-3746 81337 11-1-3699-1 Suspension Line Set 1 

6 PAOZZ 1670-01-342-5135 81337 11-1-3532-1 Toggle Assembly, Soft 2 

7 PAOZZ 1670-01-330-3691 63266 HSS358-6 Link, Connector, Stainless 

Steel #6 or equal 4

8 PAOOO 1670-01-330-3744 81337 11-1-3531-1 Slider Assembly Domed, 

27-IN. by 28-IN. 1

9 PAFZZ 1670-01-503-9820 81337 11-1-3700-1 Control Line Assembly, 

Reserve, Set 1

10 XDOZZ 57771 Commercial 

Grommet, Rolled Rim and 

Spur Grommet, No. 8, 

Nickel Plated Brass 

4
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0069 00 

GROUP 04 RESERVE CANOPY 

REPAIR PARTS LIST

0069 00-4 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

11 XDOZZ 81337 11-1-3419-2 Rib, Loaded, Right 1 

12 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3418-2 Panel, Stabilizer, Right 1 

13 XDFFO 81337 11-1-3418-1 Panel, Stabilizer, Left 1 

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0070 00 

GROUP 05 MAIN RISERS 

Change 1 0070 00-(1 Blank)/2 

Figure 6. Main Risers 

5

5

1

4

3

2
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0070 00 

GROUP 05 MAIN RISERS 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0070 00-3/(4 Blank) Change 1 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 05, Risers, Main 

Figure 6, Risers, Main 11-1-3519

1 PAOZZ 5325-00-842-1879 96906 MS27980-7B Fastener, Snap, Style 2, 

Stud, Black 1

2 PAOZZ 5325-00-285-6250 96906 MS27980-6B Fastener, Snap, Style 2, 

Socket, Black 1

3 PAOZZ 5325-00-359-6844 96906 MS27980-1B Fastener, Snap, Style 2, 

Button, Black 1

4 PAOZZ 5325-01-023-3843 96906 MS27980-8B Fastener, Snap, Style 2, 

Eyelet, Black 1

5 MOOOO 81349 PIA-T-5038 

Channel, Main Canopy 

Release Cable, Make 

From Tape, Nylon, PIAT-5038, Type III, Class I, 

1-IN. Wide, Thread, 

Nylon, V-T-295, Size E 

4

END OF FIGURE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0071 00 

GROUP 06 HARNESS/CONTAINER 

 0071 00-1 Change 1 

Figure 7. Harness/Container (Sheet 1 of 2) 

4

4

7

8

1

1

4

1

1

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

12

15 4

16

5

6

14

13

17

2

3

2

9

10

11

18
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0071 00 

GROUP 06 HARNESS/CONTAINER 

Change 1 0071 00-2 

ROTATED 180°

 Figure 7. Harness/Container (Sheet 2 of 2) 

1

7

8 19

5

6 5

6

1

24

5

6

1

20

23

21

22

25

26

10
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0071 00 

GROUP 06 HARNESS/CONTAINER 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0071 00-3 Change 1 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 06, Harness/Container 

Figure 7, Harness/Container 11-1-3517

1 PAOZZ 5325-01-506-9046 57771 #0

RRGSW305SS 

Grommet, Rolled 

Rim/Spur Washer, 305 

Stainless Steel, No. 0,

7

2 PAOZZ 5305-00-054-6651 96906 MS51957-27 

Screw, Machine, Pan 

Head, Cross Recessed, 

AR2 Power Cable 

Mounting, Main and 

Reserve, Cres, UNC-2A 

(Not Shown) 

4

3 PAOZZ 5310-00-176-6341 96906 MS17830-06C Nut, AR2 Power Cable 

Mounting, Reserve Only 2

4 PAOZZ 5325-01-506-9046 57771 #0

RRGSW305SS 

Grommet, Rolled 

Rim/Spur Washer, 305 

Stainless Steel, No. 0,

4

5 PAOZZ 5325-00-842-1879 96906 MS27980-7B Fastener, Snap, Stud 10 

6 PAOZZ 5325-01-023-3843 96906 MS27980-8B Fastener, Snap, Eyelet 10 

7 PAOZZ 5325-00-285-6250 96906 MS27980-6B Fastener, Snap, Socket 10 

8 PAOZZ 5325-00-359-6844 96906 MS27980-1B Fastener, Snap, Button 10 

9 PAOZZ 1670-01-504-1457 81337 11-1-4011-1 

Plate, Backing, AR2 Main 

Mounted Only (Not 

Shown) 

1

10 PAOZZ 1670-01-503-9819 81337 11-1-4010-1 

Clamp, AR2 Power Cable 

Mounting, Main/Reserve 

(Not Shown) 

2

11 PAOZZ 5310-00-925-9646 96906 MS21083C06 

Nut, AR2 Power Cable 

Mounting, Main Only (Not 

Shown) 

2
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0071 00 

GROUP 06 HARNESS/CONTAINER 

Change 1 0071 00-4 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

12 XBOZZ 81337 PS70104 Housing, Ripcord, Main, 

33-IN. 1

13 PAOZZ 1670-01-504-1461 81337 11-1-3553-1 Stiffener, Main Bottom 

Flap 1

14 PAOZZ 1670-01-504-1456 81337 11-1-3590-1 Stiffener, Main Top Flap 1 

15 PAOZZ 1670-01-503-9821 81337 11-1-3565-1 AAD Junction Plate, Main 1 

16 PAOZZ 5325-01-506-9030 57771 #2

RRGSW305SS 

Grommet, Rolled 

Rim/Spur Washer 305 

Stainless Steel, No. 2 

1

17 PAOZZ 1670-01-504-1459 81337 11-1-3591-2 Stiffener, Main, Right 

Side Flap 1

18 PAOZZ 1670-01-504-1460 81337 11-1-3591-1 Stiffener, Main, Left Side 

Flap 1

19 XBOZZ 81337 PS70104 Housing, Ripcord, 

Reserve, 11-IN. 1

20 XBOZZ 81337 11-1-3551-1 Housing, Main Release, 

Long, 41-IN. 1

21 PAOZZ 1670-01-343-2946 81337 11-1-3567-1 Pocket, Reserve Ripcord 1 

22 XBOZZ 96906 MS70113-1 Ring, V, Quick Fit 2 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0071 00 

GROUP 06 HARNESS/CONTAINER 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0071 00-5/(6 Blank) Change 1 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

23 PAOZZ 1670-01-342-7696 81337 11-1-3568-1 Pocket, Main Ripcord 1 

24 XBOZZ 81337 11-1-3551-0 Housing, Main Release, 

Short, 5 1⁄2-IN. 1

25 PAOZZ 1670-01-504-1458 81337 11-1-3697-1 Stiffener, Reserve Closing 

Flap 1

26 XDOZZ 81337 11-1-3574-1 Flap Assembly, Reserve 1 

END OF FIGURE 


TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0072 00 

GROUP 99 BULK MATERIALS 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0072 00-(1 Blank)/2 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 99, Bulk Materials 

1 PAOZZ 8305-01-506-0532 81349 MIL-C-43734 Cloth, Duck, Textured 

Nylon, Class 3, CG 483 V

2 PAOZZ 8305-01-315-7955 81349 PIA-C-44378 

Cloth, Nylon, Ripstop, 

Type I, Color 26270 of 

FED-STD-595 

V

3 PAOZZ 8305-00-765-2863 81349 PIA-C-7219 Cloth, Nylon, Type III, 

Class 3, Black V

4 PAOZZ 1670-01-359-9485 81348 T-C-2754 Cord, Dacron, 600-Pound, 

Type I V

5 PAOZZ 8315-00-106-5973 58536 A-A-55126 Fastener, Tape, Hook, 1-

IN. Wide, Type II, Class 1 V

6 PAOZZ 8315-00-106-5974 58536 A-A-55126 Fastener, Tape, Pile, 1-IN. 

Wide, Type II, Class 1 V

7 PAOZZ 8315-00-151-6482 58536 A-A-55126 Fastener, Tape, Pile, 2-IN. 

Wide, Type II, Class 1 V

8 XDOZZ Commercial 

Style Force 9, 1.9-OZ, 

Ripstop, 2-IN. Wide, Color 

White 

V

9 PAOZZ 8315-01-506-5694 81349 MIL-PRF-5038 

Tape, Textile and 

Webbing, 3

/8-IN., Gray, 

26270 

V

10 PAOZZ 4020-00-753-6555 80244 A-A-52080 

Tape, Lacing and Tying, 

Type I, Finish B, Size 3, 

Black

RL

11 PAOOZ 8315-01-506-4404 81349 MIL-T-5038 

Tape, Nylon, Gray, 1-IN. 

Wide, Class 2, Color 

26270 of FED-STD-595 

V
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0072 00 

GROUP 99 BULK MATERIALS 

REPAIR PARTS LIST 

0072 00-3/(4 Blank) 

(1)

ITEM

NO.

(2)

SMR

CODE 

(3)

NSN

(4)

CAGEC 

(5)

PART NO. 

(6)

DESCRIPTION AND 

USABLE ON CODES 

(UOC) 

(7)

QTY

Group 99, Bulk Materials 

12 PAOZZ 8315-01-506-8812 81349 MIL-T-5608 Tape, Nylon, 2-IN. Wide V

13 PAOZZ 8315-00-176-8083 81349 PIA-T-5038 Tape, Nylon, Type III, 

Class I, 3⁄4-IN. Wide V

14 PAOZZ 8310-00-261-9741 81348 A-A-50294 Thread, Cotton, Size 24/4 TU

15 PAOZZ 8310-00-262-3324 81348 V-T-295 Thread, Nylon, Size A TU

16 PAOZZ 8310-00-262-2772 81348 V-T-295 

Thread, Nylon, Size E, 

Green, CG-483, Class A, 

Types I, II, or III 

TU

17 PAOZZ 8310-00-262-2770 81348 V-T-295 

Thread, Nylon, Size E, 

Natural, Class A, Types I, 

II, or III 

TU

18 PAOZZ 8310-00-277-1244 81348 V-T-295 

Thread, Nylon, Size FF, 

CG-483, Class A, Types I, 

II, or III 

TU

19 PAOZZ 8305-00-270-1894 81349 MIL-W-5664 Webbing, Elastic, 1-In. V

20 PAOZZ 8305-00-263-3592 81349 PIA-W-4088 Webbing, Textile, Nylon, 

Type II, CG 483 V

END OF FIGURE

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0073 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

SPECIAL TOOLS LIST 

0073 00-1/(2 Blank) 

Not Applicable 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0074 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER INDEX 

0074 00-1/(2 Blank) Change 1

NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER INDEX 

STOCK NUMBER FIGURE ITEM 

8315-01-506-8812 BULK 12 

5325-01-023-3843 6 4 

5325-01-023-3843 7 6 

5305-00-054-6651 7 2 

8315-00-106-5973 BULK 5 

8315-00-106-5974 BULK 6 

8315-00-151-6482 BULK 7 

5310-00-176-6341 7 3 

8315-00-176-8083 BULK 13 

8310-00-261-9741 BULK 14 

8310-00-262-2770 BULK 17 

8310-00-262-2772 BULK 16 

8310-00-262-3324 BULK 15 

8305-00-263-3592 BULK 20 

8305-00-270-1894 BULK 19 

8310-00-277-1244 BULK 18 

5325-00-285-6250 6 2 

5325-00-285-6250 7 7 

8305-01-315-7955 BULK 2 

1670-01-330-3279 1 10 

1670-01-330-3280 1 12 

1670-01-330-3281 1 4 

1670-01-330-3282 1 3 

1670-01-330-3283 1 2 

1670-01-330-3284 1 11 

1670-01-330-3691 4 7 

1670-01-330-3691 5 7 

1670-01-330-3738 1 6 

1670-01-330-3740 3 3 

1670-01-330-3741 1 16 

1670-01-330-3742 1 18 

1670-01-330-3743 1 5 

1670-01-330-3744 4 8 

1670-01-330-3744 5 8 

1670-01-330-3745 4 9 

1670-01-330-3746 4 5 

STOCK NUMBER FIGURE ITEM 

1670-01-330-3746 5 5 

1670-01-330-3747 1 1 

1670-01-330-3748 3 2 

1670-01-331-5423 3 1 

1670-01-332-3916 1 9 

1670-01-334-7597 1 7 

1670-01-342-5135 4 6 

1670-01-342-5135 5 6 

1670-01-342-7686 1 8 

1670-01-342-7696 7 23 

1670-01-343-2946 7 21 

5325-00-359-6844 6 3 

5325-00-359-6844 7 8 

1670-01-359-9485 BULK 4 

1670-01-475-1207 1 15 

1670-01-487-6077 1 13 

1670-01-503-9819 7 10 

1670-01-503-9820 5 9 

1670-01-503-9821 7 15 

1670-01-504-1458 7 25 

1670-01-504-1456 7 14 

1670-01-504-1457 7 9 

1670-01-504-1459 7 17 

1670-01-504-1460 7 18 

1670-01-504-1461 7 13 

8305-01-506-0532 BULK 1 

8315-01-506-4404 BULK 11 

8315-01-506-5694 BULK 9 

5325-01-506-7568 2 1 

5325-01506-9030 7 16 

5325-01-506-9046 7 1 

5325-01-506-9046 7 4 

4020-00-753-6555 BULK 10 

8305-00-765-2863 BULK 3 

5325-00-842-1879 6 1 

5320-00-842-1879 7 5 

5310-00-925-9646 7 11 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0075 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

PART NUMBER INDEX 

0075 00-1/(2 Blank) 

PART NUMBER FIGURE ITEM 

#0 RRGSW305SS 7 1 

#0 RRGSW305SS 7 4 

#2 RRGSW305SS 7 16 

11-1-3418-1 4 13 

11-1-3418-1 5 13 

11-1-3418-2 4 12 

11-1-3418-2 5 12 

11-1-3419-1 4 1 

11-1-3419-1 5 1 

11-1-3419-2 4 11 

11-1-3419-2 5 11 

11-1-3419-3 4 4 

11-1-3419-3 5 4 

11-1-3419-4 4 2 

11-1-3419-4 5 2 

11-1-3419-5 4 3 

11-1-3419-5 5 3 

11-1-3517-1 1 12 

11-1-3518-0 1 9 

11-1-3518-1 1 10 

11-1-3519-1 1 11 

11-1-3520-1 1 8 

11-1-3521-1 1 7 

11-1-3522-1 1 1 

11-1-3523-1 1 2 

11-1-3524-2 1 3 

11-1-3525 1 4 

11-1-3526-1 1 5 

11-1-3527-1 1 6 

11-1-3528-1 1 16 

11-1-3529-1 1 18 

11-1-3530-1 1 13 

11-1-3531-1 4 8 

11-1-3531-1 5 8 

11-1-3532-1 4 6 

11-1-3532-1 5 6 

11-1-3533-1 3 3 

11-1-3544-1 3 2 

11-1-3545-1 3 1 

11-1-3551-0 7 24 

11-1-3551-1 7 20 

11-1-3553-1 7 13 

11-1-3565-1 7 15 

11-1-3567-1 7 21 

11-1-3568-1 7 23 

11-1-3574-1 7 26 

11-1-3590-1 7 14 

11-1-3591-1 7 18 

11-1-3591-2 7 17 

PART NUMBER FIGURE ITEM 

11-1-3697-1 7 25 

11-1-3699-1 4 5 

11-1-3699-1 5 5 

11-1-3700-0 4 9 

11-1-3700-1 5 9 

11-1-4010-1 7 10 

11-1-4011-1 7 9 

11-1-4235-1 1 15 

929174160 1 14 

92917A140 1 17 

A-A-50294 BULK 14 

A-A-52080 BULK 10 

A-A-55126 BULK 5 

A-A-55126 BULK 6 

A-A-55126 BULK 7 

HSS358-6 4 7 

HSS358-6 5 7 

MIL-C-43734 BULK 1 

MIL-PRF-5038 BULK 9 

MIL-T-5038 BULK 11 

MIL-T-5608 BULK 12 

MIL-W-5664 BULK 19 

MS17830-06C 7 3 

MS21083-CO6 7 11 

MS27980-1B 6 3 

MS27980-1B 7 8 

MS27980-6B 6 2 

MS27980-6B 7 7 

MS27980-7B 6 1 

MS27980-7B 7 5 

MS27980-8B 6 4 

MS27980-8B 7 6 

MS51957-27 7 2 

MS70113-1 7 22 

NASM16491 2 1 

PIA-C-44378 BULK 2 

PIA-C-7219 BULK 3 

PIA-T-5038 BULK 13 

PIA-T-5038 6 5 

PIA-W-4088 BULK 20 

PS70104 7 12 

PS70104 7 19 

T-C-2754 BULK 4 

V-T-295 BULK 15 

V-T-295 BULK 16 

V-T-295 BULK 17 

V-T-295 BULK 18 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0076 00 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST 

0076 00-1 Change 1 

SCOPE

This appendix lists expendable supplies and materials you will need to operate and maintain the 35-Foot 

Diameter Parachute. These items are authorized to you by CTA 50-970, Expendable Items (Except 

Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items). 

EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS 

Column 1, Item Number. This number is assigned to the entry in the listing and is referenced in the 

narrative instructions to identify the material (e.g., Use Cloth, Abrasive (Item 6, WP 0055 00)). 

Column 2, Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item.

(Enter as applicable). 

C - Operator or Crew 

O - Unit Maintenance 

F - Direct Support Maintenance 

H - General Support Maintenance 

D - Depot Maintenance 

Column 3, National Stock Number (NSN). This is the National stock number assigned to the item; use it 

to request or requisition the item. 

Column 4, Description. Indicates the Federal item name and, if required, a description to identify the 

item.

Column 5, Unit of Measure (U/M). Indicates the measure used in performing the actual maintenance 

function. This measure is expressed by a two-character alphabetical abbreviation (e.g., ea., in., pr.). If the 

unit of measure differs from the unit of issue, requisition the lowest unit of issue that will satisfy your 

requirements.

Table 1. Expendable/Durable Supplies and Materials List 

(1)

ITEM

NUMBER

(2)

LEVEL

(3)

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER

(4)

DESCRIPTION

(5)

UNIT OF

MEASURE

1 0 7510-00-174-3205 Aid, Marking Red, Thick BX 

2 0 7510-00-282-3375 Aid, Marking Red, Thin BX 

3 0 6810-00-753-4993 Alcohol, Isopropyl (Anhydrous) BT 

4 0 1670-01-323-9900 Band, Rubber Retainer BX 

5 0 9160-00-253-1171 Beeswax, Technical, 1-LB Cake LB 

6 0 5350-00-221-0872 Cloth, Abrasive YD 

7 0 8305-01-506-0532 Cloth, Duck, Textured Nylon, 

Class 3, CG 483 YD

8 0 7920-00-044-9281 Cloth, Lint Free, Cleaning BX 

9 0 8305-01-315-7955 Cloth, Nylon Ripstop, Type I YD 

10 0 8305-01-315-7955 Cloth, Nylon, Type III, Class 3, 

Black YD

11 0 8310-00-261-9741 Cord, Cotton, Size 24/4 TU 

12 0 1670-01-359-9485 Cord, Dacron, 600-Pound, Type I YD 

13 0 4020-00-246-0688 Cord, Nylon, Type III YD 

14 0 7930-00-281-4731 Dishwashing Compound SA 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0076 00 

Change 1 0076 00-2 

Table 1. Expendable/Durable Supplies and Materials List -- Continued 

(1)

ITEM

NUMBER

(2)

LEVEL

(3)

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER

(4)

DESCRIPTION

(5)

UNIT OF

MEASURE

15 0 8315-00-106-5973 Fastener Tape, Hook, 1-IN. Wide, 

Type II, Class 1 YD

16 0 8315-00-106-5974 Fastener Tape, Pile, 1-IN. Wide, 

Type II, Class 1 YD

17 0 8315-00-151-6482 Fastener Tape, Pile, 2-IN. Wide, 

Type II, Class 1 YD

18 0 5325-00-359-6844 Fastener, Snap, Button EA 

19 0 5325-01-023-3843 Fastener, Snap, Eyelet EA 

20 0 5325-00-285-6250 Fastener, Snap, Socket EA 

21 0 5325-00-842-1879 Fastener, Snap, Stud EA 

22 0 5325-01-506-7568 Grommet, Rolled Rim and Spur 

Washer, No. 5, Type III, Class 2 EA

23 0 5325-01-506-9046 

Grommet, Rolled Rim/Spur 

Washer, 305 Stainless Steel,

No. 0 

EA

24 0 5325-01-506-9030 

Grommet, Rolled Rim/Spur 

Washer, 305 Stainless Steel,

No. 2 

EA

25 0 7510-00-634-6583 Ink, Marking, Parachute, Orange 

Yellow BT

26 0 7510-00-286-5362 Ink, Marking, Parachute, Strata 

Blue BT

27 0 9150-00-168-2000 Lubricant, Solid Film CN 

28 0 7520-00-973-1059 Marker, Felt Tip, Permanent, 

Black BX

29 0 7520-01-060-5820 Pen, Ball Point BX 

30 0 7920-00-205-3570 Rag, Wiping BE 

31 0 9310-00-160-7858 Stencil Board, Oiled SH 

32 0 Commercial Style Force 9, 1.9-OZ Ripstop 

Weave, 2-IN. Wide 

33 0 4020-00-753-6555 Tape, Lacing and Tying YD 

34 0 8315-01-506-4404 Tape, Nylon, 1-IN. Wide, Gray YD 

35 0 8315-01-506-8812 Tape, Nylon, 2-IN. Wide, Natural YD 

36 0 8315-00-255-7673 Tape, Nylon, Type III, 1⁄2-IN. YD 

37 0 8315-00-176-8082 Tape, Nylon, Type III, Class 1, 3⁄4-

IN. Wide YD
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0076 00 

0076 00-3/(4 Blank) Change 1 

Table 1. Expendable/Durable Supplies and Materials List -- Continued 

(1)

ITEM

NUMBER

(2)

LEVEL

(3)

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER

(4)

DESCRIPTION

(5)

UNIT OF

MEASURE

38 0 7510-00-550-7125 Tape, Pressure Sensitive, Yellow, 

1⁄2-IN. Wide YD

39 0 8315-01-506-5694 Tape, Textile and Webbing, 3

/8-IN.

Wide, Gray, 26270 YD

40 0 8310-00-261-9741 Thread, Cotton, 24/4 TU 

41 0 8310-00-262-2780 Thread, Nylon, OD, Size 6, 

Natural Finish TU

42 0 8310-00-277-1244 Thread, Nylon, OD, Size FF TU 

43 0 8310-00-262-2772 Thread, Nylon, Size E, Green TU 

44 0 8310-00-262-2770 Thread, Nylon, Size E, Natural TU 

45 0 8310-00-262-3324 Thread, Nylon, Size A TU 

46 0 9160-00-285-2044 Wax, Paraffin LB 

47 0 8305-00-270-1894 Webbing, Elastic, 1-IN. Wide YD 

48 0 8305-00-263-3592 Webbing, Nylon, Type II YD 

49 0 Local Purchase Webbing, Textile, Nylon, Type VII, 

OD (Waistband), Class 2 YD

50 0 7930-001-506-9885 

Cleaner, Industrial, Multipurpose 

Cleaning Fluid, (1010) (Everblum 

GoldTM)

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0077 00

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE-FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE SYSTEM 

ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS 

0077 00-1 

MC-4 CONTINUITY SUSPENSION DEVICE 

Assemble the MC-4 Continuity Suspension Device in accordance with the illustrations below. Use the 

MC-4 Continuity Suspension Device as an aid in conducting the continuity check and other purpose in 

which the MC-4 requires suspension. 

1. The MC-4 Continuity Suspension Device is constructed from a suitable piece of metal 

or plastic tubing, wood, or other light-weight material (approximately 16-feet in length). 

2. Bolt or weld approximately 8 clamps (evenly spaced) to the Suspension Device. 

3. Ensure both the clamps and the Suspension Device are capable of supporting the 

weight of an MC-4 main or reserve parachute. 

4. Once constructed, hang from a convenient point, normally from the ceiling, high enough to ensure the 

entire canopy is off the ground. 

5. Attach an MC-4 main or reserve parachute to insure stability. 

Clamps Supporting Device 

Supporting Device 

MC-4 Canopy 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 0077 00

0077 00-2 

SPLICING AID FABRICATION 

END OF WORK PACKAGE 

T-Handle as 

Required 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Index -1 

ALPHABETICAL INDEX 

Subject WP Sequence No. – Page No. 

 A 

AAD Junction Plate .........................................................................................................................0045 00-1 

Accordion Folding ...........................................................................................................................0061 00-1 

Acronyms and Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................0001 00-3 

Activation Device, Installing ..........................................................................................................0014 00-43 

After-Use Receipt............................................................................................................................0004 00-8 

Air Force Technical Order Forms....................................................................................................0062 00-3 

Air Force Technical Orders .............................................................................................................0062 00-2 

Airing (and Shakeout) (Unit)............................................................................................................0009 00-1 

Application of Markings............................................................................................... 0005 00-9/0006 00-12 

AR2 Power Cable Assembly Installation/Mounting.........................................................................0047 00-1

AR2 Ripcord Release Pocket..........................................................................................................0046 00-1 

Army Regulations............................................................................................................................0062 00-2 

Assembly – Reserve Parachute......................................................................................................0005 00-1 

Attaching Loop, Suspension Line ...................................................................................................0036 00-1 

Attaching Loop, Suspension Line ...................................................................................................0056 00-1 

Attaching Risers to Harness............................................................................................................0014 00-2 

Attachment Control Lines to Control Toggles ...............................................................................0005 00-10 

Attachment of Canopy to Risers ....................................................................................0005 00-6/0006 00-9 

Attachment of Pilot Chute, Bridle Line, and Deployment Bag ......................................................0006 00-13 

Attachment of Risers to Harness/Container....................................................................................0005 00-1 

Attachment of the AR2..................................................................................................................0013 00-36 

B

Basting (DS)....................................................................................................................................0050 00-1 

Basting (Unit) ..................................................................................................................................0015 00-2 

Bulk Materials..................................................................................................................................0072 00-1 

C

Canopy Repair, General (Main and Reserve).................................................................................0024 00-1 

Canopy Replacement, Main............................................................................................................0025 00-1 

Canopy Replacement, Reserve ......................................................................................................0026 00-1 

Canopy Rib .....................................................................................................................................0058 00-1 

Canopy Trim Check ......................................................................................................................0006 00-14 

Canopy, Release Ripcord and Housing..........................................................................................0042 00-1 

Cascade Lines (Alternate Method) .................................................................................................0055 00-1 

Cleaning and Drying (Unit)..............................................................................................................0010 00-1 

Cleaning Fabric Items With Hand Dishwashing Compound...........................................................0010 00-1 

Closing Container...................................................................................................... 0013 00-24/0014 00-31 

Common Name ...............................................................................................................................0001 00-3 

Common Tools and Equipment ......................................................................................................0001 00-5 

Configuration/Condition ..................................................................................................................0004 00-2 

Connector Links, Main and Reserve Canopy .................................................................................0032 00-1

Container/Harness ..........................................................................................................................0037 00-1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Index -2 

Subject WP Sequence No. – Page No. 

C - continued 

Control Lines ...................................................................................................................................0057 00-1 

Converting Reserve Canopy to Main Canopy.................................................................................0049 00-1

Corrosion Prevention And Control (CPC) .......................................................................................0001 00-1 

Crossport Main or Reserve Canopy................................................................................................0027 00-1 

D

Darning (DS) ...................................................................................................................................0050 00-3 

Darning (Unit)..................................................................................................................................0015 00-4 

Deployment Bag..............................................................................................................................0018 00-1 

Deployment Bag, Main....................................................................................................................0021 00-1 

Deployment Capability ....................................................................................................................0002 00-1 

Description Of Major Components..................................................................................................0002 00-1 

Destruction Of Army Materiel To Prevent Enemy Use ...................................................................0001 00-2 

Drop Testing Criteria ......................................................................................................................0007 00-1 

Drying Fabric Items ........................................................................................................0010 00-3/0012 00-2 

E

Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities And Features...................................................................0002 00-1

Equipment Data ............................................................................................................................0002 00-14 

Equipment Description and Data ....................................................................................................0002 00-1 

Equipment Disposition ....................................................................................................................0011 00-8 

Equipment Improvements and Recommendations, Reporting (EIR)..............................................0001 00-1 

Equipment Name ............................................................................................................................0001 00-3 

F

Fasteners, Snap..............................................................................................................................0039 00-1 

Field Manuals..................................................................................................................................0062 00-2 

Flaking Canopy ........................................................................................................... 0013 00-6/0014 00-13 

Folding Canopy ........................................................................................................... 0013 00-7/0014 00-15 

Forms ...........................................................................................................................................0062 00-2 

Fresh-Water Contamination Test....................................................................................................0012 00-1 

G

General Canopy Repair (Main and Reserve)..................................................................................0024 00-1 

General Procedures for Air Delivery Equipment.............................................................................0004 00-1 

General Repair Procedures (DS)....................................................................................................0050 00-1 

General Repair Procedures (Unit) ..................................................................................................0015 00-1 

General Storage Requirements ......................................................................................................0060 00-1 

Grommets........................................................................................................................................0038 00-1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Index -3 

Subject WP Sequence No. – Page No. 

H

Harness/Container ..........................................................................................................................0037 00-1 

Hook and Pile Tapes, Riser ............................................................................................................0035 00-1 

Housing, Main Ripcord....................................................................................................................0044 00-1 

Housing, Reserve Ripcord ..............................................................................................................0043 00-1 

How to Use this Manual ............................................................................................................................... v 

I

Illustrated List of Manufactured Items ............................................................................................0077 00-1 

Initial Receipt...................................................................................................................................0004 00-1 

Inspection Criteria, Porosity ............................................................................................................0048 00-1 

Inspection........................................................................................................................................0011 00-1 

Installation of Safety Stow...............................................................................................................0005 00-9 

Installing Attaching Tie....................................................................................................................0004 00-2 

Installing the Automatic Activation Device ....................................................................................0014 00-43 

In-Storage Inspection................................................................................................... 0011 00-8/ 0060 00-2 

Introduction To Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) ....................................................................0063 00-1

J

Junction Plate, AAD ........................................................................................................................0045 00-1 

L

Layout and Line Check ..................................................................................................0013 00-3/0014 00-6 

Layout.............................................................................................................................0005 00-3/0006 00-3 

Line Sets (Preferred Method), Suspension.....................................................................................0054 00-1 

Lines (4A/B and 5A/B), Suspension................................................................................................0053 00-1 

Lines (Alternate Method), Suspension/Cascade ............................................................................0055 00-1

Lines, Control ..................................................................................................................................0057 00-1 

List of Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................0001 00-3 

List of Effective Pages ..................................................................................................................................A 

Location And Description of Major Components.............................................................................0002 00-1

Lubrication Service Intervals ..........................................................................................................0008 00-3 

M

Main and Reserve Parachute Characteristics, Table 1 ................................................................0002 00-14 

Main and Reserve Pilot Chute Attachment.....................................................................................0020 00-1 

Main Canopy Release Cable Channel............................................................................................0034 00-1 

Main Canopy Release Ripcord and Housing..................................................................................0042 00-1

Main Canopy Replacement.............................................................................................................0025 00-1 

Main Deployment Bag.....................................................................................................................0021 00-1 

Main or Reserve Canopy, Crossport...............................................................................................0027 00-1 

Main Parachute, Packing Procedures.............................................................................................0014 00-1 

Main Pilot Chute Bridle Line or Deployment Bag............................................................................0018 00-1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Index -4 

Subject WP Sequence No. – Page No. 

M - continued 

Main Pilot Chute..............................................................................................................................0019 00-1 

Main Ripcord Housing.....................................................................................................................0043 00-1 

Main Ripcord Pocket.......................................................................................................................0040 00-1 

Main Risers .....................................................................................................................................0033 00-1 

Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC), Introduction.........................................................................0063 00-1

Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC), Table 1................................................................................0063 00-4 

Maintenance Forms, Records and Reports ....................................................................................0001 00-1 

Maintenance Functions...................................................................................................................0063 00-1 

Maintenance Functions/Procedures ..............................................................................................0007 00-1 

Marine Corps Forms .......................................................................................................................0062 00-3 

Marking and Restencilling (DS) ......................................................................................................0052 00-1 

Marking and Restencilling (Unit) .....................................................................................................0017 00-1 

Marking Parachutes ........................................................................................................................0004 00-2 

Modification Work Order (MWO) Compliance Record Page ..........................................................0004 00-6 

N

National Stock Number Index .........................................................................................................0074 00-1 

Nomenclature Cross-Reference List...............................................................................................0001 00-3 

O

Official Name ..................................................................................................................................0001 00-3 

Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS) .............................................................................................0001 00-1 

P

Packing Procedures – Main Parachute...........................................................................................0014 00-1 

Packing Procedures – Reserve Parachute.....................................................................................0013 00-1 

Pack-In-Process Inspection ...........................................................................................0011 00-1/0014 00-2 

Parachute Log Record ...................................................................................................................0004 00-2 

Parachute Repack Interval .............................................................................................................0007 00-1 

Part Number Index..........................................................................................................................0075 00-1 

Patching Crossports........................................................................................................................0027 00-1 

Pilot Chute Attachment, Main and Reserve....................................................................................0020 00-1 

Pilot Chute, Main.............................................................................................................................0019 00-1 

Porosity Inspection Criteria .............................................................................................................0048 00-1 

Porosity Procedures........................................................................................................................0048 00-1 

Power Cable Assembly Installation/Mounting, AR2........................................................................0047 00-1

Preparation for Shipment ..............................................................................................0001 00-3/0061 00-1 

Preparation for Storage..................................................................................................0001 00-3/0060 00-1 

Preventive Maintenance Checks And Services (PMCS) ...............................................................0008 00-1

Preventive Maintenance Checks And Services (PMCS), Introduction ...........................................0007 00-1

Publication Indexes ........................................................................................................................0062 00-1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Index -5 

Subject WP Sequence No. – Page No. 

R

3-Ring Release/Riser Inspection ....................................................................................................0011 00-3 

Receipt of Used Parachute .............................................................................................................0004 00-8 

References......................................................................................................................................0062 00-1 

References, Air Force Technical Order Forms ...............................................................................0062 00-3 

References, Air Force Technical Orders.........................................................................................0062 00-2 

References, Army Regulations .......................................................................................................0062 00-2 

References, DA PAM......................................................................................................................0062 00-1 

References, Field Manuals .............................................................................................................0062 00-1 

References, Forms..........................................................................................................................0062 00-2 

References, Joint Regulations ........................................................................................................0062 00-2 

References, Marine Corps Forms...................................................................................................0062 00-3 

References, Publication Indexes ....................................................................................................0062 00-1 

References, Technical Bulletins......................................................................................................0062 00-2 

References, Technical Manuals......................................................................................................0062 00-1 

Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL), Introduction............................................................0064 00-1 

Repair Procedures, General (DS)...................................................................................................0050 00-1 

Repair Procedures, General (Unit) .................................................................................................0015 00-1 

Replacements, Section ...................................................................................................................0059 00-1 

Replacing a Filled Out or Unserviceable Log Record.....................................................................0004 00-7

Replacing a Lost Log Record..........................................................................................................0004 00-8 

Replacing Crossport........................................................................................................................0027 00-3 

Reporting Equipment Improvement Recommendations (EIRs)......................................................0001 00-1 

Reporting Errors and Recommending Improvements ................................................................................... i 

Reserve Canopy Replacement .......................................................................................................0026 00-1 

Reserve Canopy, Crossport............................................................................................................0027 00-1 

Reserve Parachute Characteristics, Table 1 ................................................................................0002 00-14 

Reserve Parachute, Assembly........................................................................................................0005 00-1 

Reserve Parachute, Packing Procedures.......................................................................................0013 00-1 

Reserve Pilot Chute Attachment.....................................................................................................0020 00-1 

Reserve Pilot Chute or Reserve Deployment Bag and Bridle Line.................................................0022 00-1 

Reserve Ripcord Housing ...............................................................................................................0043 00-1 

Reserve Ripcord Pocket .................................................................................................................0041 00-1 

Restenciling (DS) ............................................................................................................................0052 00-1 

Restenciling (Unit)...........................................................................................................................0017 00-1 

Restitching (DS) ..............................................................................................................................0050 00-2 

Restitching (Unit).............................................................................................................................0015 00-2 

Rib, Canopy ....................................................................................................................................0058 00-1 

Rigger Rolling..................................................................................................................................0061 00-1 

Rinsing Parachute Assembly Immersed in Fresh-Water ...............................................0010 00-2/0012 00-2 

Rinsing Parachute Assembly Immersed in Salt-Water ..................................................0010 00-2/0012 00-1 

Ripcord Grip Test............................................................................................................................0006 00-1 

Ripcord Housing, Main....................................................................................................................0044 00-1 

Ripcord Housing, Reserve ..............................................................................................................0037 00-1 

Ripcord Pocket, Main......................................................................................................................0040 00-1 

Ripcord Pocket, Reserve ................................................................................................................0041 00-1 

Ripcord Release Pocket, AR2.........................................................................................................0046 00-1 

Ripcord Test....................................................................................................................................0005 00-1 

Riser Hook and Pile Tapes .............................................................................................................0035 00-1 

Risers, Main ....................................................................................................................................0033 00-1 

Routine Inspection ..........................................................................................................................0011 00-1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Index -6 

Subject WP Sequence No. – Page No. 

S

Safety Stow Loop............................................................................................................................0023 00-1 

Safety, Care and Handling.......................................................................................... 0001 00-5/0002 00-14 

Salt-Water Contamination Test.......................................................................................................0012 00-1 

Scope on Manual ............................................................................................................................0001 00-1 

Searing and Waxing (DS) ...............................................................................................................0051 00-1 

Searing and Waxing (Unit)..............................................................................................................0016 00-1 

Searing Crossports .........................................................................................................................0027 00-2 

Section Replacements ....................................................................................................................0059 00-1 

Service Upon Receipt .....................................................................................................................0004 00-1 

Setting Deployment Breaks.............................................................................................................0014 00-8 

Sewing Machine Code Symbols, Table 1 (DS)...............................................................................0050 00-2

Sewing Machine Code Symbols, Table 1 (Unit) .............................................................................0015 00-2

Sewing Procedures (DS).................................................................................................................0050 00-1 

Sewing Procedures (Unit) ...............................................................................................................0015 00-1 

Shakeout and Airing (Unit)..............................................................................................................0009 00-1 

Shipment .........................................................................................................................................0061 00-1 

Shipment, Preparation for ...............................................................................................................0061 00-1 

Slack Checker Inspection................................................................................................................0011 00-6 

Slider Stop, Main and Reserve Canopy..........................................................................................0031 00-1 

Slider, Main and Reserve Canopy ..................................................................................................0030 00-1 

Snap Fasteners...............................................................................................................................0039 00-1 

Spanwise Line Check....................................................................................................................0006 00-23 

Special Tools List ............................................................................................................................0073 00-1 

Special Tools, TMDE and Support Equipment ...............................................................................0001 00-5

Stabilizer Left or Right, Main or Reserve Canopy...........................................................................0028 00-1 

Stitching (DS) ..................................................................................................................................0050 00-2 

Stitching (Unit).................................................................................................................................0015 00-2 

Stitching and Restitching Specifications, Table 2 (DS)...................................................................0050 00-2

Stitching and Restitching Specifications, Table 2 (Unit) .................................................................0015 00-2

Storage Criteria ...............................................................................................................................0060 00-1 

Storage Requirements, General .....................................................................................................0060 00-1 

Storage Specifics for Parachutes....................................................................................................0060 00-1 

Storage, Preparation for..................................................................................................................0060 00-1 

Stow Canopy and Suspension Lines ............................................................................................0013 00-21 

Stowing Canopy in Deployment Bag ............................................................................................0014 00-28 

Stowing Suspension Lines............................................................................................................0014 00-29 

Stroke Simulator Test................................................................................................ 0013 00-34/0014 00-37 

Suspension Line Attaching Loop ....................................................................................................0036 00-1 

Suspension Line Attaching Loop ....................................................................................................0056 00-1 

Suspension Line Sets (Preferred Method)......................................................................................0054 00-1 

Suspension Lines (4A/B and 5A/B).................................................................................................0053 00-1 

Suspension Lines/Cascade Lines (Alternate Method)....................................................................0055 00-1

T

Table of Contents...........................................................................................................................................ii 

Tail Seam, Main or Reserve Canopy..............................................................................................0029 00-1 

Technical Bulletins ..........................................................................................................................0062 00-2 

Technical Manuals ..........................................................................................................................0062 00-1 

Technical/Rigger-Type Inspection ..................................................................................................0011 00-1 
TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

Index -7/(8 Blank) 

Subject WP Sequence No. – Page No. 

T

Temporary Tacking (DS).................................................................................................................0050 00-1 

Temporary Tacking (Unit) ...............................................................................................................0015 00-1 

Theory of Operation ........................................................................................................................0003 00-1 

W

Warning Summary ........................................................................................................................................ a 

Warranty Information.......................................................................................................................0001 00-3 

Waxing (DS)....................................................................................................................................0051 00-1 

Waxing (Unit) ..................................................................................................................................0016 00-1 

MICHAEL E. RYAN 

GENERAL, USAF 

Chief of Staff 

Official: 

GEORGE T. BABBETT

General, USAF 

Commander, Air Force Materiel Command 

D.G. MORRAL 

Rear Admiral, USN 

Program Executive Officer 

For Expeditionary Warfare 

Naval Sea Systems Command 

R.P SHOCKEY 

Director, Program Support 

Marine Corps Systems Command 

DISTRIBUTION: 

To be distributed in accordance with Initial Distribution Number (IDN 255304), requirements for

TM 10-1670-287-23&P.

JOHN M. KEANE

General, United States Army

Official: Acting Chief of Staff

JOEL B. HUDSON 

Administrative Assistant to the 

Secretary of the Army

0318803

By Order of the Secretaries of the Army, Air Force, and Navy (Including the Marine Corps):

These are the instructions for sending an electronic 2028

The following format must be used if submitting an electronic 2028. The subject line must be exactly the

same and all fields must be included; however only the following fields are mandatory: 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8,

9, 10, 13, 15, 16, 17, and 27.

From: “Whomever” <whomever@avma27.army.mil>

To: amssbriml@natick.army.mil

Subject: DA Form 2028

1. From: Joe Smith

2. Unit: home

3. Address: 4300 Park

4. City: Hometown

5. St: MO

6. Zip: 77777

7. Date Sent: 19--OCT--93

8. Pub no: 55--2840--229--23

9. Pub Title: TM

10. Publication Date: 04--JUL--85

11. Change Number: 7

12. Submitter Rank: MSG

13. Submitter FName: Joe

14. Submitter MName: T

15. Submitter LName: Smith

16. Submitter Phone: 123--123--1234

17. Problem: 1

18. Page: 2

19. Paragraph: 3

20. Line: 4

21. NSN: 5

22. Reference: 6

23. Figure: 7

24. Table: 8

25. Item: 9

26. Total: 123

27. Text:

This is the text for the problem below line 27.

RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND 

BLANK FORMS 

For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.

Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool 

Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/Supply Manuals 

(SC/SM).

DATE

21 October 2003 

TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

COMMANDER

U.S. ARMY TANK-AUTOMOTIVE AND ARMAMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CECT 

15 KANSAS STREET 

NATICK, MA 01760-5052

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) 

PFC Jane Doe 

CO A 3rd Engineer BR 

Ft. Leonardwood, MO 63108

PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS 

PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER 

TM 10-1670-296-23&P 

DATE

30 October 2002 

TITLE 

Unit Manual for Ancillary Equipment for Low Velocity Air 

Drop Systems 

ITEM 

NO.

PAGE

NO.

PARAGRAPHLINE 

NO. * 

FIGURE

NO.

TABLE

NO.

RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON 

(Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible). 

0036 00-2 1 In table 1, Sewing Machine Code Symbols, the second 

sewing machine code symbol should be MD ZZ not MD 

22.

Change the manual to show Sewing Machine, Industrial: 

Zig-Zag; 308 stitch; medium-duty; NSN 3530-01-181-1421 

as a MD ZZ code symbol. 

*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph. 

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE 

Jane Doe, PFC 

TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS 

EXTENSION

508-233-4141 

SIGNATURE

Jane Doe Jane Doe

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) 

COMMANDER

U.S. ARMY TANK-AUTOMOTIVE AND ARMAMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CECT 

15 KANSAS STREET 

NATICK, MA 01760-5052 

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) 

PFC Jane Doe 

CO A 3rd Engineer BR 

Ft. Leonardwood, MO 63108

DATE

21 October 2003

PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS 

PUBLICATION NUMBER 

TM 10-1670-296-23&P

DATE

30 October 2002

TITLE 

Unit Manual for Ancillary Equipment for Low 

Velocity Air Drop Systems

PAGE

NO.

COLM

NO.

LINE 

NO.

NATIONAL

STOCK NUMBER 

REFERENCE

NO.

FIGURE

NO.

ITEM 

NO.

TOTAL NO. OF 

MAJOR ITEMS 

SUPPORTED RECOMMENDED ACTION 

0066 00-1

 

4 Callout 16 in figure 4 is pointed 

to a D-Ring. In the Repair Parts 

List key for figure 4, item 16 is 

called a Snap Hook. Please 

correct one or the other.

 PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank 

forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION SIGNATURE

UASPPC V3.00 
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND 

BLANK FORMS 

For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.

Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool 

Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/Supply Manuals 

(SC/SM).

DATE

TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

COMMANDER 

U.S. ARMYTANK-AUTOMOTIVE AND ARMAMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CECT 

15 KANSAS STREET 

NATICK, MA 01760-5052

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS 

PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

DATE

30 July 2003 

TITLE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE 

SYSTEM

ITEM 

NO.

PAGE

NO.

PARAGRAPHLINE 

NO. * 

FIGURE

NO.

TABLE

NO.

RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON 

(Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible). 

 

*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph. 

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS 

EXTENSION

SIGNATURE

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00 
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) 

COMMANDER

U.S. ARMYTANK-AUTOMOTIVE AND ARMAMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CECT 

15 KANSAS STREET 

NATICK, MA 01760-5052

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE

PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS 

PUBLICATION NUMBER 

TM 10-1670-23&P

DATE

30 July 2003

TITLE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE FALL PERSONNEL 

PARACHUTE SYSTEM

PAGE

NO.

COLM

NO.

LINE 

NO.

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER

REFERENCE

NO.

FIGURE

NO.

ITEM 

NO.

TOTAL NO. 

OF MAJOR 

ITEMS

SUPPORTED

RECOMMENDED ACTION 

 

 PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and 

blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION SIGNATURE 

UASPPC V3.00 
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS AND 

BLANK FORMS 

For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.

Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and Special Tool 

Lists (RPSTL) and Supply Catalogs/Supply Manuals 

(SC/SM).

DATE

TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) 

COMMANDER 

U.S. ARMYTANK-AUTOMOTIVE AND ARMAMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CECT 

15 KANSAS STREET 

NATICK, MA 01760-5052

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS 

PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER 

TM 10-1670-287-23&P 

DATE

30 July 2003 

TITLE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE FALL PERSONNEL PARACHUTE 

SYSTEM

ITEM 

NO.

PAGE

NO.

PARAGRAPHLINE 

NO. * 

FIGURE

NO.

TABLE

NO.

RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON 

(Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible). 

 

*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph. 

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS 

EXTENSION

SIGNATURE

DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00 
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) 

COMMANDER

U.S. ARMYTANK-AUTOMOTIVE AND ARMAMENT COMMAND 

ATTN: AMSTA-LC-CECT 

15 KANSAS STREET 

NATICK, MA 01760-5052

FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE

PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS 

PUBLICATION NUMBER 

TM 10-1670-23&P

DATE

30 July 2003

TITLE 

MC-4 RAM AIR FREE FALL PERSONNEL 

PARACHUTE SYSTEM

PAGE

NO.

COLM

NO.

LINE 

NO.

NATIONAL STOCK 

NUMBER

REFERENCE

NO.

FIGURE

NO.

ITEM 

NO.

TOTAL NO. 

OF MAJOR 

ITEMS

SUPPORTED

RECOMMENDED ACTION 

 

 PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and 

blank forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION SIGNATURE 

UASPPC V3.00 
The Metric System and Equivalents

Linear Measure Liquid Measure

1 centimeter = 10 millimeters = .39 inch 1 centiliter = 10 milliliters = .34 fl. ounce

1 decimeter = 10 centimeters = 3.94 inches 1 deciliter = 10 centiliters = 3.38 fl. ounces

1 meter = 10 decimeters = 39.37 inches 1 liter = 10 deciliters = 33.81 fl. ounces

1 dekameter = 10 meters = 32.8 feet 1 dekaliter = 10 liters = 2.64 gallons

1 hectometer = 10 dekameters = 328.08 feet 1 hectoliter = 10 dekaliters = 26.42 gallons

1 kilometer = 10 hectometers = 3,280.8 feet 1 kiloliter = 10 hectoliters = 264.18 gallons

Weights Square Measure

1 centigram = 10 milligrams = .15 grain 1 sq. centimeter = 100 sq. millimeters = .155 sq. inch

1 decigram = 10 centigrams = 1.54 grains 1 sq. decimeter = 100 sq. centimeters = 15.5 sq. inches

1 gram = 10 decigrams = .035 ounce 1 sq. meter (centare) = 100 sq. decimeters = 10.76 sq. feet

1 dekagram = 10 grams = .35 ounce 1 sq. dekameter (are) = 100 sq. meters = 1,076.4 sq. feet

1 hectogram = 10 dekagrams = 3.52 ounces 1 sq. hectometer (hectare) = 100 sq. dekameters = 2.47 acres

1 kilogram = 10 hectograms = 2.2 pounds 1 sq. kilometer = 100 sq. hectometers = .386 sq. mile

1 quintal = 100 kilograms = 220.46 pounds

1 metric ton = 10 quintals = 1.1 short tons Cubic Measure

1 cu. centimeter = 1000 cu. millimeters = .06 cu. inch

1 cu. decimeter = 1000 cu. centimeters = 61.02 cu. inches

1 cu. meter = 1000 cu. decimeters = 35.31 feet

Approximate Conversion Factors

To change To Multiply by To change To Multiply by

inches centimeters 2.540 ounce--inches newton--meters .007062

feet meters .305 centimeters inches .394

yards meters .914 meters feet 3.280

miles kilometers 1.609 meters yards 1.094

square inches square centimeters 6.451 kilometers miles .621

square feet square meters .093 square centimeters square inches .155

square yards square meters .836 square meters square feet 10.764

square miles square kilometers 2.590 square meters square yards 1.196

acres square hectometers .405 square kilometers square miles .386

cubic feet cubic meters .028 square hectometers acres 2.471

cubic yards cubic meters .765 cubic meters cubic feet 35.315

fluid ounces milliliters 29.573 cubic meters cubic yards 1.308

pints liters .473 milliliters fluid ounces .034

quarts liters .946 liters pints 2.113

gallons liters 3.785 liters quarts 1.057

ounces grams 28.349 liters gallons .264

pounds kilograms .454 grams ounces .035

short tons metric tons .907 kilograms pounds 2.205

pound--feet newton--meters 1.356 metric tons short tons 1.102

pound--inches newton--meters .11296

Temperature (Exact)

_F Fahrenheit

temperature

5/9 (after

subtracting 32)

Celsius

temperature _C
PIN: 069481-000